Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is - MB, 18i/180i/180is - MB5 Operators manual Page 639

Operators manual

Page of 1586

/ 1586

PROGRAMMING

B–63534EN/02

22. RISC PROCESSOR

613

(b) If A > Remaining amount of travel in the block being executed

when the single–block command is executed

A stop state may continue over several blocks.

The stop is made as described later.

Feedrate

Single–block command

Time

Stop state continuing over multiple blocks

A: Amount of travel corresponding to deceleration from the

current feedrate to 0

(3) Stopping a movement if the stop may continue over several blocks

Acceleration/deceleration is performed over several blocks to

decrease the feedrate to zero.

Feedrate

Single–block command

Time

In AI High Precision Countour Control mode, the feedrate is

automatically controlled by the reading–ahead of blocks.

The feedrate is determined using the following conditions. If the

specified feedrate exceeds the determined feedrate, acceleration/

deceleration before interpolation is performed to achieve the determined

feedrate.

(1) Feedrate changes on each axis at a corner and the permissible feedrate

change that has been set

(2) Expected acceleration on each axis and the permissible acceleration

that has been set

22.1.2

Automatic Feedrate

Control Function

Contents Summary of Series 16i/160i/160is/18i/180i/180is - MB, 18i/180i/180is - MB5 Operators manual

Page 1FANUC Series 16*/160*/160*s-MB FANUC Series 18*/180*/180*s-MB5 FANUC Series 18*/180*/180*s-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63534EN/02
Page 2• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice. The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country from where the product is exported. In this manual we have tried as much as possi
Page 3SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this section assume this configuration). Note that some
Page 4SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63534EN/02 1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information i
Page 5B–63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WARNING 1. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the sing
Page 6SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63534EN/02 WARNING 8. Some functions may have been implemented at the request of the machine–tool builder. When using such functions, refer to the manual supplied by the machine–tool builder for details of their use and any related cautions. CAUTION 1 Do not remove the internal
Page 7B–63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO PROGRAMMING This section covers the major safety precautions related to programming. Before attempting to perform programming, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully such that you are fully familiar with
Page 8SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63534EN/02 WARNING 6. Stroke check After switching on the power, perform a manual reference position return as required. Stroke check is not possible before manual reference position return is performed. Note that when stroke check is disabled, an alarm is not issued even if a s
Page 9B–63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 4 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS RELATED TO HANDLING This section presents safety precautions related to the handling of machine tools. Before attempting to operate your machine, read the supplied operator’s manual and programming manual carefully, such that you are fully fami
Page 10SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63534EN/02 WARNING 7. Workpiece coordinate system shift Manual intervention, machine lock, or mirror imaging may shift the workpiece coordinate system. Before attempting to operate the machine under the control of a program, confirm the coordinate system carefully. If the machin
Page 11B–63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE WARNING 1. Memory backup battery replacement Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
Page 12SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–63534EN/02 WARNING 2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement Only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and fitted with an insula
Page 13B–63534EN/02 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING 3. Fuse replacement Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance training may perform this work. When replacing
Page 14
Page 15B–63534EN/02 Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1 I. GENERAL 1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.
Page 16Table of Contents B–63534EN/02 4.11 EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION (G02.3, G03.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 4.12 SMOOTH INTERPOLATION (G05.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 4.13 NURBS INTERP
Page 17B–63534EN/02 Table of Contents 9. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED VALUE DIRECTLY (S5
Page 18Table of Contents B–63534EN/02 13.3.3 Continuous–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 13.3.4 Intermittent–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 19B–63534EN/02 Table of Contents 15.CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 15.1 VARIABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 20Table of Contents B–63534EN/02 19.8 HIGH–PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 19.9 LOOK–AHEAD BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DECELERATION BEFORE INTERPOLATION TIME CONSTANT CHANGE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Page 21B–63534EN/02 Table of Contents 1.2 TOOL MOVEMENT BY PROGRAMING–AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 1.4 TESTING A PROGRAM . . . . . . .
Page 22Table of Contents B–63534EN/02 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789 4.1 MEMORY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 790 4.2 MDI O
Page 23B–63534EN/02 Table of Contents 8.3 FILE DELETION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 24Table of Contents B–63534EN/02 9.4 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953 9.5 DELETING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 25B–63534EN/02 Table of Contents 11.4.2 Tool Length Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 11.4.3 Displaying and Entering Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page 26Table of Contents B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX H. TAPE CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153 I. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156 J. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE . .
Page 27I. GENERA
Page 28
Page 29B–63534EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL This manual consists of the following parts: About this manual I. GENERAL Describes chapter organization, applicable models, related manuals, and notes for reading this manual. II. PROGRAMMING Describes each function: Format used to program functions in the
Page 301. GENERAL GENERAL B–63534EN/02 Model name Abbreviation FANUC Series 180i–MB 180i–MB Series 180i FANUC Series 180is–MB 180is–MB Series 180is Remark) The 18i–MB5, 180i–MB5, 180is–MB5, 18i–MB, 180i–MB, and 180is–MB may be collectively referred to as the 18i/180i/ 180is–MB. Special symbols This manual
Page 31B–63534EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL Related manuals of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/ 210i/160is/180is/210is MODEL B (2/2) Specification Manual name number CAP (T series) FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63284EN FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63304EN MANUAL GUIDE For Lathe PROGRAMMING MANU
Page 321. GENERAL GENERAL B–63534EN/02 Related manuals of The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR a series SERVO MOTOR a series Specification Manual name number FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a seriesDESCRIPTIONS B–65142 FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR a series B–65150 PARAMETER MANUAL FANUC AC SPINDLE MOT
Page 33B–63534EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 When machining the part using the CNC machine tool, first prepare the program, then operate the CNC machine by using the program. GENERAL FLOW OF OPERATION OF CNC 1) First, prepare the program from a part drawing to operate the CNC machine tool. MACHINE TOOL How t
Page 341. GENERAL GENERAL B–63534EN/02 Tool Side cutting Face cutting Hole machining Prepare the program of the tool path and machining condition according to the workpiece figure, for each machining. 8
Page 35B–63534EN/02 GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.2 NOTES ON READING CAUTION THIS MANUAL 1 The function of an CNC machine tool system depends not only on the CNC, but on the combination of the machine tool, its magnetic cabinet, the servo system, the CNC, the operator’s panels, etc. It is too difficult to describe
Page 36
Page 37II. PROGRAMMIN
Page 38
Page 39B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL 13
Page 401. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1.1 The tool moves along straight lines and arcs constituting the workpiece parts figure (See II–4). TOOL MOVEMENT ALONG WORKPIECE PARTS FIGURE– INTERPOLATION Explanations The function of moving the tool along straight lines and arcs is called the interpolation. D
Page 41B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL Symbols of the programmed commands G01, G02, ... are called the preparatory function and specify the type of interpolation conducted in the control unit. (a) Movement along straight line (b) Movement along arc G01 Y_ _; G03X––Y––R––; X– –Y– – – –; Control unit X a
Page 421. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1.2 Movement of the tool at a specified speed for cutting a workpiece is called the feed. FEED–FEED FUNCTION mm/min Tool F Workpiece Table Fig. 1.2 (a) Feed function Feedrates can be specified by using actual numerics. For example, to feed the tool at a rate of 15
Page 43B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.3 PART DRAWING AND TOOL MOVEMENT 1.3.1 A CNC machine tool is provided with a fixed position. Normally, tool Reference Position change and programming of absolute zero point as described later are performed at this position. This position is called the reference
Page 441. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1.3.2 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Z Coordinate System Z Specified by CNC – Program Y Y Coordinate System X X Coordinate system Part drawing CNC Command Tool Z Y Workpiece X Machine tool Fig. 1.3.2 (a) Coordinate system Explanations D Coordinate system Th
Page 45B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL The positional relation between these two coordinate systems is determined when a workpiece is set on the table. Coordinate system on part drawing estab- lished on the work- Coordinate system spe- piece cified by the CNC estab- lished on the table Y Y Workpiece X
Page 461. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (2) Mounting a workpiece directly against the jig Program zero point Jig Meet the tool center to the reference position. And set the coordinate system specified by CNC at this position. (Jig shall be mounted on the predetermined point from the reference position.)
Page 47B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.3.3 How to Indicate Command Dimensions for Moving the Tool – Absolute, Incremental Commands Explanations Command for moving the tool can be indicated by absolute command or incremental command (See II–8.1). D Absolute command The tool moves to a point at “the di
Page 481. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1.4 The speed of the tool with respect to the workpiece when the workpiece is cut is called the cutting speed. CUTTING SPEED – As for the CNC, the cutting speed can be specified by the spindle speed SPINDLE SPEED in rpm unit. FUNCTION Tool Tool diameter Spindle sp
Page 49B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.5 When drilling, tapping, boring, milling or the like, is performed, it is necessary to select a suitable tool. When a number is assigned to each tool SELECTION OF TOOL and the number is specified in the program, the corresponding tool is USED FOR VARIOUS select
Page 501. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1.6 When machining is actually started, it is necessary to rotate the spindle, and feed coolant. For this purpose, on–off operations of spindle motor and COMMAND FOR coolant valve should be controlled. MACHINE OPERATIONS – MISCELLANEOUS Tool FUNCTION Coolant Workp
Page 51B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.7 A group of commands given to the CNC for operating the machine is called the program. By specifying the commands, the tool is moved along PROGRAM a straight line or an arc, or the spindle motor is turned on and off. CONFIGURATION In the program, specify the co
Page 521. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations The block and the program have the following configurations. D Block 1 block N ffff G ff Xff.f Yfff.f M ff S ff T ff ; Sequence Preparatory Dimension word Miscel- Spindle Tool number function laneous function func- function tion End of block Fig. 1.7
Page 53B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL D Main program and When machining of the same pattern appears at many portions of a subprogram program, a program for the pattern is created. This is called the subprogram. On the other hand, the original program is called the main program. When a subprogram execu
Page 541. GENERAL PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1.8 TOOL FIGURE AND TOOL MOTION BY PROGRAM Explanations D Machining using the end Usually, several tools are used for machining one workpiece. The tools of cutter – Tool length have different tool length. It is very troublesome to change the program compensation f
Page 55B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 1. GENERAL 1.9 Limit switches are installed at the ends of each axis on the machine to prevent tools from moving beyond the ends. The range in which tools can TOOL MOVEMENT move is called the stroke. RANGE – STROKE Table Motor Limit switch Machine zero point Specify these di
Page 562. CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 2 CONTROLLED AXES 30
Page 57B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2. CONTROLLED AXES 2.1 CONTROLLED AXES Series 16i, Series 160i, 16i–MB, 160i–MB, 16i–MB, 160i–MB, Series 160is Item 160is–MB 160is–MB (two–path control) No. of basic controlled 3 axes for each path 3 axes axes (6 axes in total) Controlled axes Max. 8 axes Max. 8 axes for eac
Page 582. CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 2.2 The names of three basic axes are always X, Y, and Z. The name of an additional axis can be set to A, B, C, U, V, or W by using parameter 1020. AXIS NAME Parameter No. 1020 is used to determine the name of each axis. When this parameter is set to 0 or
Page 59B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 2. CONTROLLED AXES 2.3 The increment system consists of the least input increment (for input) and least command increment (for output). The least input increment is the INCREMENT SYSTEM least increment for programming the travel distance. The least command increment is the l
Page 602. CONTROLLED AXES PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 2.4 Maximum stroke = Least command increment 99999999 See 2.3 Incremen System. MAXIMUM STROKE Table 2.4 (a) Maximum strokes Increment system Maximum stroke Metric machine system "99999.999 mm "99999.999 deg IS–B Inch machine system "9999.9999 inch "99999.9
Page 613. PREPARATORY FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION) 3 PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) A number following address G determines the meaning of the command for the concerned block. G codes are divided into the following two types. Type Meaning One–shot G code The G code is effective only in
Page 623. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations 1. When the clear state (bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402) is set at power–up or reset, the modal G codes are placed in the states described below. (1) The modal G codes are placed in the states marked with as indicated in T
Page 633. PREPARATORY FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION) G code list for M series (1/4) G code Group Function G00 Positioning G01 Linear interpolation G02 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CW G03 01 Circular interpolation/Helical interpolation CCW G02.2, G03.2 Involute interpolation
Page 643. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 G code list for M series (2/4) G code Group Function G27 Reference position return check G28 Automatic return to reference position G29 Automatic return from reference position G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return 00 G30.1 Float
Page 653. PREPARATORY FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (G FUNCTION) G code list for M series (3/4) G code Group Function G52 Local coordinate system setting 00 G53 Machine coordinate system selection G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection 14 G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection G54.
Page 663. PREPARATORY FUNCTION (G FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 G code list for M series (4/4) G code Group Function G80 09 Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancel G80.5 24 Synchronization start of electronic gear box (EGB) (for two axes program- ming) G81 09 Drilling cycle, spot boring
Page 67B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4 INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 41
Page 684. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.1 The G00 command moves a tool to the position in the workpiece system POSITIONING (G00) specified with an absolute or an incremental command at a rapid traverse rate. In the absolute command, coordinate value of the end point is programmed. In t
Page 69B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Limitations The rapid traverse rate cannot be specified in the address F. Even if linear interpolation positioning is specified, nonlinear interpolation positioning is used in the following cases. Therefore, be careful to ensure that the tool does
Page 704. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.2 For accurate positioning without play of the machine (backlash), final positioning from one direction is available. SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (G60) Overrun Start position Start position Temporary stop End position Format G60IP_; IP_ : For an
Page 71B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Restrictions D During canned cycle for drilling, no single direction positioning is effected in Z axis. D No single direction positioning is effected in an axis for which no overrun has been set by the parameter. D When the move distance 0 is comma
Page 724. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.3 Tools can move along a line LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G01) Format G01 IP_F_; IP_:For an absolute command, the coordinates of an end point , and for an incremental commnad, the distance the tool moves. F_:Speed of tool feed (Feedrate) Explanations A
Page 73B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS A calculation example is as follows. G91 G01 X20.0B40.0 F300.0 ; This changes the unit of the C axis from 40.0 deg to 40mm with metric input. The time required for distribution is calculated as follows: Ǹ20 2 ) 40 2 8 0.14907 (min) 300 The feed rat
Page 744. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.4 The command below will move a tool along a circular arc. CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION (G02, G03) Format Arc in the XpYp plane G02 I_ J_ G17 Xp_Yp_ F_ ; G03 R_ Arc in the ZpXp plane G02 I_ K_ G18 Xp_ p_ F_ G03 R_ Arc in the YpZp plane G19 G02 J_ K_ F_
Page 75B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Explanations D Direction of the circular “Clockwise”(G02) and “counterclockwise”(G03) on the XpYp plane interpolation (ZpXp plane or YpZp plane) are defined when the XpYp plane is viewed in the positive–to–negative direction of the Zp axis (Yp axis
Page 764. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Arc radius The distance between an arc and the center of a circle that contains the arc can be specified using the radius, R, of the circle instead of I, J, and K. In this case, one arc is less than 180°, and the other is more than 180° are consi
Page 77B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples Y axis 100 50R 60 60R 40 0 X axis 90 120 140 200 The above tool path can be programmed as follows ; (1) In absolute programming G92X200.0 Y40.0 Z0 ; G90 G03 X140.0 Y100.0R60.0 F300.; G02 X120.0 Y60.0R50.0 ; or G92X200.0 Y40.0Z0 ; G90 G03 X
Page 784. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.5 Helical interpolation which moved helically is enabled by specifying up HELICAL to two other axes which move synchronously with the circular INTERPOLATION interpolation by circular commands. (G02, G03) Format Synchronously with arc of XpYp plan
Page 79B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.6 Helical interpolation B moves the tool in a helical manner. This interpolation can be executed by specifying the circular interpolation HELICAL command together with up to four additional axes in simple INTERPOLATION B high–precision contour co
Page 804. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.7 Spiral interpolation is enabled by specifying the circular interpolation command together with a desired number of revolutions or a desired SPIRAL increment (decrement) for the radius per revolution. INTERPOLATION, Conical interpolation is enab
Page 81B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Conical interpolation XpYp plane G02 G17 X_ Y_ Z_ I_ J_ K_ Q_ L_ F_ ; G03 ZpXp plane G02 G18 Z_ X_ Y_ K_ I_ J_ Q_ L_ F_ ; G03 YpZp plane G19 G02 Y_ Z_ X_ J_ K_ I_ Q_ L_ F_ ; G03 X,Y,Z Coordinates of the end point L Number of revolutions (positive
Page 824. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Function of spiral Spiral interpolation in the XY plane is defined as follows: interpolation (X – X0)2 + (Y – Y0)2 = (R + Q’)2 X0 : X coordinate of the center Y0 : Y coordinate of the center R : Radius at the beginning of spiral inte
Page 83B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Limitations D Radius In spiral or conical interpolation, R for specifying an arc radius cannot be specified. D Corner deceleration Corner deceleration between the spiral/conical interpolation block and other blocks can be performed only in simple h
Page 844. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (1) With absolute values, the path is programmed as follows: Q–20.0 G90 G02 X0 Y–30.0 I0 J–100.0 F300; L4 (2) With incremental values, the path is programmed as follows: Q–20.0 G91 G02 X0 Y–130.0 I0 J–100.0 F300; L4 (Either the Q or L setting can b
Page 85B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.8 Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system POLAR COORDINATE to the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement INTERPOLATIO
Page 864. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Distance moved and In the polar coordinate interpolation mode, program commands are feedrate for polar specified with Cartesian coordinates on the polar coordinate interpolation coordinate interpolation plane. The axis address for the rotation ax
Page 87B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Tool offset command The polar coordinate interpolation mode cannot be started or terminated (G12.1 or G13.1) in the tool offset mode (G41 or G42). G12.1 or G13.1 must be specified in the tool offset canceled mode (G40). D Tool length offset Tool
Page 884. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples Example of Polar Coordinate Interpolation Program Based on X Axis(Linear Axis) and C Axis (Rotary Axis) C’(hypothetical axis) C axis Path after cutter compensation Program path N204 N203 N205 N202 N201 N200 X axis Tool N208 N206 N207 Z axi
Page 89B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.9 The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface CYLINDRICAL so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with INTERPOLATI
Page 904. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Tool offset To perform tool offset in the cylindrical interpolation mode, cancel any ongoing cutter compensation mode before entering the cylindrical interpolation mode. Then, start and terminate tool offset within the cylindrical interpolation m
Page 91B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples Example of a Cylindrical Interpolation Program C O0001 (CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ); N01 G00 G90 Z100.0 C0 ; N02 G01 G91 G18 Z0 C0 ; Z R N03 G07.1 C57299 ; (*) N04 G90 G01 G42 Z120.0 D01 F250 ; N05 C30.0 ; N06 G02 Z90.0 C60.0 R30.0 ; N07 G
Page 924. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.10 Involute curve machining can be performed by using involute interpolation. Involute interpolation ensures continuous pulse distribution INVOLUTE even in high–speed operation in small blocks, thus enabling smooth and INTERPOLATION high–speed ma
Page 93B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Explanations D Involute curve An involute curve on the X–Y plane is defined as follows ; X (θ)=R [cos θ+ (θ-θ0 ) sin θ] +X0 Y (θ)=R [sin θ- (θ-θ0 ) cos θ] +Y0 where, X0 , Y0 : Coordinates of the center of a base circle R : Base circle radius θ0 : A
Page 944. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Choosing from two types When only a start point and I, J, and K data are given, two types of involute of involute curves curves can be created. One type of involute curve extends towards the base circle, and the other extends away from the base c
Page 95B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Specifiable G codes The following G codes can be specified in involute interpolation mode: G04 : Dwell G10 : Data setting G17 : X–Y plane selection G18 : Z–X plane selection G19 : Y–Z plane selection G65 : Macro call G66 : Macro modal call G67 :
Page 964. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Limitations D Number of involute curve Both the start point and end point must be within 100 turns from the point turns where the involute curve starts. An involute curve can be specified to make one or more turns in a single block. If the specifie
Page 97B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.11 Exponential interpolation exponentially changes the rotation of a workpiece with respect to movement on the rotary axis. Furthermore, EXPONENTIAL exponential interpolation performs linear interpolation with respect to INTERPOLATION another axi
Page 984. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Exponential relational Exponential relational expressions for a linear axis and rotary axis are expressions defined as follows: θ 1 X(θ)=R (e k –1) tan (I) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Movement on the linear axis (1) θ A(q)=(–1)w 360 2π ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Mov
Page 99B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS CAUTION The amount for dividing the linear axis for exponential interpolation (span value) affects figure precision. However, if an excessively small value is set, the machine may stop during interpolation. Try to specify an optimal span value depe
Page 1004. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Relational expressions θ r tan (B) +Z (0) Z (θ) = { –U tan (I) } (e k –1) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (3) 2 tan (I) θ r 1 X (θ) = { –U tan (I) } (e k –1) ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (4) 2 tan (I) θ A (q) = (–1)w 360 2π where K = tan (J) tan (I) X (q), Z (q), A (q) : Abso
Page 101B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.12 Either of two types of machining can be selected, depending on the program command. SMOOTH INTERPOLATION D For those portions where the accuracy of the figure is critical, such as at corners, machining is performed exactly as specified by the
Page 1024. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 When a program approximates a sculptured curve with line segments, the length of each segment differs between those portions that have mainly a small radius of curvature and those that have mainly a large radius of curvature. The length of the line
Page 103B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples Interpolated by smooth curve N17 N16 N15 N14 N13 N12 N11 N1 N2 N10 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 Interpolated by smooth curve Linearinterpolation Linearinterpolation N17 N16 N15 N14 N13 N12 N1 N11 N2 N10 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 D Conditions for Smooth
Page 1044. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Limitations D Controlled axes Smooth interpolation can be specified only for the X–, Y–, and Z–axes and any axes parallel to these axes (up to three axes at one time). D High–precision contour Commands for turning on and off smooth interpolation mo
Page 105B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.13 Many computer–aided design (CAD) systems used to design metal dies for automobiles and airplanes utilize non–uniform rational B–spline NURBS (NURBS) to express a sculptured surface or curve for the metal dies. INTERPOLATION This function enabl
Page 1064. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Format G05 P10000 ; (Start high–precision contour control mode) ... G06.2 [P_] K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] [F_] ; K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; ... K_ X_ Y_ Z_ [R_] ; K_ ; ... K_ ; G01 ... ... G05 P0 ; (End high–precision contour co
Page 107B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS D Knot The number of specified knots must equal the number of control points plus the rank value. In the blocks specifying the first to last control points, each control point and a knot are specified in an identical block. After these blocks, as m
Page 1084. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Alarms Displayed No. Description message PS5115 SPL: Error An illegal rank is specified. No knot is specified. An illegal knot is specified. Too many axes are specified. Other program error. PS5116 SPL: Error A look–ahead block contains a program e
Page 109B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Z Y 1000. X 2000. 83
Page 1104. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.14 In helical interpolation, when pulses are distributed with one of the circular interpolation axes set to a hypothetical axis, sine interpolation is HYPOTHETICAL AXIS enabled. INTERPOLATION When one of the circular interpolation axes is set to
Page 111B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Limitations D Manual operation The hypothetical axis can be used only in automatic operation. In manual operation, it is not used, and movement takes place. D Move command Specify hypothetical axis interpolation only in the incremental mode. D Coor
Page 1124. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.15 Straight threads with a constant lead can be cut. The position coder mounted on the spindle reads the spindle speed in real–time. The read THREAD CUTTING spindle speed is converted to the feedrate per minute to feed the tool. (G33) Format Z G3
Page 113B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 The spindle speed is limited as follows : Maximum feedrate 1 x spindle speed x Thread lead Spindle speed : min-1 Thread lead : mm or inch Maximum feedrate : mm/min or inch/min ; maximum command–specified feedrate for feed–per–minute mode or
Page 1144. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.16 Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01. If an external skip signal is input SKIP FUNCTION during the execution of this command, execution of the command is (G31) interrupted and the n
Page 115B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS Examples D The next block to G31 is an incremental command G31 G91X100.0 F100; Y50.0; Skip signal is input here 50.0 Y 100.0 Actual motion X Motion without skip signal Fig. 4.16 (a) The next block is an incremental command D The next block to G31 i
Page 1164. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.17 In a block specifying P1 to P4 after G31, the multistage skip function stores coordinates in a custom macro variable when a skip signal (4–point MULTISTAGE SKIP or 8–point ; 8–point when a high–speed skip signal is used) is turned on. (G31) Pa
Page 117B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 4. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS 4.18 The skip function operates based on a high–speed skip signal (connected directly to the NC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. HIGH SPEED SKIP In this case, up to eight signals can be input. SIGNAL (G31) Delay and error of sk
Page 1184. INTERPOLATION FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 4.19 The continuous high–speed skip function enables reading of absolute coordinates by using the high–speed skip signal. Once a high–speed skip CONTINUOUS signal has been input in a G31P90 block, absolute coordinates are read HIGH–SPEED SKIP into
Page 119B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5 FEED FUNCTIONS 93
Page 1205. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 5.1 The feed functions control the feedrate of the tool. The following two feed functions are available: GENERAL D Feed functions 1. Rapid traverse When the positioning command (G00) is specified, the tool moves at a rapid traverse feedrate set in the CNC (
Page 121B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Tool path in a cutting If the direction of movement changes between specified blocks during feed cutting feed, a rounded–corner path may result (Fig. 5.1 (b)). Y Programmed path Actual tool path 0 X Fig. 5.1 (b) Example of Tool Path between Two Blocks In
Page 1225. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 5.2 RAPID TRAVERSE Format G00 IP_IP ; G00 : G code (group 01) for positioning (rapid traverse) IP_ ; Dimension word for the end point IP Explanations The positioning command (G00) positions the tool by rapid traverse. In rapid traverse, the next block is ex
Page 123B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5.3 Feedrate of linear interpolation (G01), circular interpolation (G02, G03), etc. are commanded with numbers after the F code. CUTTING FEED In cutting feed, the next block is executed so that the feedrate change from the previous block is minimized. Four
Page 1245. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Feed per minute (G94) After specifying G94 (in the feed per minute mode), the amount of feed of the tool per minute is to be directly specified by setting a number after F. G94 is a modal code. Once a G94 is specified, it is valid until G95 (feed per revo
Page 125B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Inverse time feed (G93) When G93 is specified, the inverse time specification mode (G93 mode) is set. Specify the inverse time (FRN) with an F code. A value from 0.001 to 9999.999 can be specified as FRN, regardless of whether the input mode is inches or
Page 1265. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 G93 is a modal G code and belongs to group 05 (includes G95 (feed per revolution) and G94 (feed per minute)). When an F value is specified in G93 mode and the feedrate exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate, the feedrate is clamped to the maximum cutting feed
Page 127B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D One–digit F code feed When a one–digit number from 1 to 9 is specified after F, the feedrate set for that number in a parameter (Nos. 1451 to 1459) is used. When F0 is specified, the rapid traverse rate is applied. The feedrate corresponding to the number
Page 1285. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 5.4 Cutting feedrate can be controlled, as indicated in Table 5.4 (a). CUTTING FEEDRATE CONTROL Table 5.4 (a) Cutting Feedrate Control Function name G code Validity of G code Description The tool is decelerated at the end point This function is valid for sp
Page 129B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS Format Exact stop IP ; G09 IP_ Exact stop mode G61 ; Cutting mode G64 ; Tapping mode G63 ; Automatic corner override G62 ; 5.4.1 Exact Stop (G09, G61) Cutting Mode (G64) Tapping Mode (G63) Explanations The inter–block paths followed by the tool in the exact
Page 1305. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 5.4.2 When cutter compensation is performed, the movement of the tool is Automatic Corner automatically decelerated at an inner corner and internal circular area. This reduces the load on the cutter and produces a smoothly machined Override surface. 5.4.2.1
Page 131B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS Override range When a corner is determined to be an inner corner, the feedrate is overridden before and after the inner corner. The distances Ls and Le, where the feedrate is overridden, are distances from points on the cutter center path to the corner (Fig
Page 1325. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Override value An override value is set with parameter No. 1712. An override value is valid even for dry run and F1–digit specification. In the feed per minute mode, the actual feedrate is as follows: F × (automatic override for inner corners) × (feedrate o
Page 133B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS 5.4.3 This function automatically controls the feedrate at a corner according to Automatic Corner the corner angle between the machining blocks or the feedrate difference between the blocks along each axis. Deceleration This function is effective when ACD,
Page 1345. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Feedrate and time When the corner angle is smaller than the angle specified in the parameter, the relationship between the feedrate and time is as shown below. Although accumulated pulses equivalent to the hatched area remain at time t, the next block is
Page 135B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Selected plane The machining angle is compared with the angle specified in parameter (No. 1740) for movements on the selected plane only. Machining feedrates are compared with that specified in parameter (No. 1741) for movement along the first and second
Page 1365. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 5.4.3.2 This function decelerates the feedrate when the difference between the Corner Deceleration feedrates at the end point of block A and the start point of block B along each axis is larger than the value specified in parameter No. 1781. The According t
Page 137B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Acceleration / When acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is effective, the deceleration before relationship between the feedrate and time is as described below. interpolation When the feedrate difference between blocks A and B along each axis is
Page 1385. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Without corner deceleration With corner deceleration Feedrate along Vc [X] Vmax the X–axis Vmax Feedrate along the Y–axis Vc [Y] Vmax Feedrate along the tangent at the corner 1 F Rmax N1 N2 t D Setting the allowable The allowable feedrate difference can be
Page 139B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 5. FEED FUNCTIONS D Look–ahead control Parameters related to automatic corner deceleration in look–ahead control mode are shown below. Normal Look–ahead Parameter description mode control mode Switching the methods for automatic corner No.1602#4 No.1602#4 deceleration Allowa
Page 1405. FEED FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 5.5 DWELL (G04) Format Dwell G04 X_ ; or G04 P_ ; X_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point permitted) P_ : Specify a time or spindle speed (decimal point not permitted) Explanations By specifying a dwell, the execution of the next block is delaye
Page 141B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION 6 REFERENCE POSITION A CNC machine tool has a special position where, generally, the tool is exchanged or the coordinate system is set, as described later. This position is referred to as a reference position. 115
Page 1426. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 6.1 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN General D Reference position The reference position is a fixed position on a machine tool to which the tool can easily be moved by the reference position return function. For example, the reference position is used as a pos
Page 143B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION D Reference position Tools are automatically moved to the reference position via an return and movement intermediate position along a specified axis. Or, tools are automatically from the reference moved from the reference position to a specified positio
Page 1446. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Reference position Positioning to the intermediate or reference positions are performed at the return (G28) rapid traverse rate of each axis. Therefore, for safety, the cutter compensation, and tool length compensation should be cancelled
Page 145B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION NOTE 1 To this feedrate, a rapid traverse override (F0 ,25,50,100%) is applied, for which the setting is 100%. 2 After a machine coordinate system has been established upon the completion of reference position return, the automatic reference position re
Page 1466. REFERENCE POSITION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Restrictions D Status the machine lock The lamp for indicating the completion of return does not go on when the being turned on machine lock is turned on, even when the tool has automatically returned to the reference position. In this case, it is not c
Page 147B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 6. REFERENCE POSITION 6.2 Tools ca be returned to the floating reference position. A floating reference point is a position on a machine tool, and serves as FLOATING a reference point for machine tool operation. REFERENCE A floating reference point need not always be fixed,
Page 1487. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 7 COORDINATE SYSTEM By teaching the CNC a desired tool position, the tool can be moved to the position. Such a tool position is represented by coordinates in a coordinate system. Coordinates are specified using program axes. When three program axes, the
Page 149B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.1 The point that is specific to a machine and serves as the reference of the machine is referred to as the machine zero point. A machine tool builder MACHINE sets a machine zero point for each machine. COORDINATE A coordinate system with a machine zero
Page 1507. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 7.2 A coordinate system used for machining a workpiece is referred to as a workpiece coordinate system. A workpiece coordinate system is to be set WORKPIECE with the CNC beforehand (setting a workpiece coordinate system). COORDINATE A machining program s
Page 151B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.2.2 The user can choose from set workpiece coordinate systems as described below. (For information about the methods of setting, see II– 7.2.1.) Selecting a Workpiece (1) Once a workpiece coordinate system is selected by G92 or automatic Coordinate Sys
Page 1527. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 7.2.3 The six workpiece coordinate systems specified with G54 to G59 can be changed by changing an external workpiece zero point offset value Changing Workpiece or workpiece zero point offset value. Coordinate System Three methods are available to change
Page 153B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM Explanations D Changing by G10 With the G10 command, each workpiece coordinate system can be changed separately. D Changing by G92 By specifying G92IP_;, a workpiece coordinate system (selected with a code from G54 to G59) is shifted to set a new workpie
Page 1547. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples Y YȀ G54 workpiece coordinate system If G92X100Y100; is commanded when the tool 100 is positioned at (200, 160) in G54 mode, work- 160 Tool position piece coordinate system 1 (X’ – Y’) shifted by vector A is created. 60 A XȀ New workpiece coordi
Page 155B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.2.4 The workpiece coordinate system preset function presets a workpiece coordinate system shifted by manual intervention to the pre–shift Workpiece Coordinate workpiece coordinate system. The latter system is displaced from the System Preset (G92.1) ma
Page 1567. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (a) Manual intervention performed when the manual absolute signal is off (b) Move command executed in the machine lock state (c) Movement by handle interrupt (d) Operation using the mirror image function (e) Setting the local coordinate system using G52,
Page 157B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.2.5 Besides the six workpiece coordinate systems (standard workpiece coordinate systems) selectable with G54 to G59, 48 additional workpiece Adding Workpiece coordinate systems (additional workpiece coordinate systems) can be Coordinate Systems used. A
Page 1587. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (3) A custom macro allows a workpiece zero point offset value to be handled as a system variable. (4) Workpiece zero point offset data can be entered or output as external data. (5) The PMC window function enables workpiece zero point offset data to be r
Page 159B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.3 When a program is created in a workpiece coordinate system, a child workpiece coordinate system can be set for easier programming. Such a LOCAL COORDINATE child coordinate system is referred to as a local coordinate system. SYSTEM Format G52 IPIP _;
Page 1607. COORDINATE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 WARNING 1 When an axis returns to the reference point by the manual reference point return function,the zero point of the local coordinate system of the axis matches that of the work coordinate system. The same is true when the following command is issue
Page 161B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 7. COORDINATE SYSTEM 7.4 Select the planes for circular interpolation, cutter compensation, and drilling by G–code. PLANE SELECTION The following table lists G–codes and the planes selected by them. Explanations Table 7.4 Plane selected by G code Selected G code Xp Yp Zp pla
Page 1628. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 8 COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION This chapter contains the following topics. 8.1 ABSOLUTE AND INCREMENTAL PROGRAMMING (G90, G91) 8.2 POLAR COORDINATE COMMAND (G15, G16) 8.3 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) 8.4 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING 136
Page 1638. COORDINATE VALUE B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION 8.1 There are two ways to command travels of the tool; the absolute command, and the incremental command. In the absolute command, ABSOLUTE AND coordinate value of the end position is programmed; in the incremental INCREMENTAL command, move
Page 1648. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 8.2 The end point coordinate value can be input in polar coordinates (radius and angle). POLAR COORDINATE The plus direction of the angle is counterclockwise of the selected plane COMMAND first axis + direction, and the minus direction is cl
Page 1658. COORDINATE VALUE B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION D Setting the current Specify the radius (the distance between the current position and the position as the origin of point) to be programmed with an incremental command. The current the polar coordinate position is set as the origin of the
Page 1668. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 N5 G15 G80 ; Canceling the polar coordinate command Limitations D Specifying a radius in In the polar coordinate mode, specify a radius for circular interpolation the polar coordinate or helical cutting (G02, G03) with R. mode D Axes that ar
Page 1678. COORDINATE VALUE B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING AND DIMENSION 8.3 Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code. INCH/METRIC CONVERSION (G20, G21) Format G20 ; Inch input G21 ; mm input This G code must be specified in an independent block before setting the coordinate system at the beginning o
Page 1688. COORDINATE VALUE AND DIMENSION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 8.4 Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can DECIMAL POINT be specified with the following addresses: PROGRAMMING X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C
Page 1699. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) 9 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) The spindle speed can be controlled by specifying a value following address S. This chapter contains the following topics. 9.1 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPEED WITH A CODE 9.2 SPECIFYING THE SPINDLE SPE
Page 1709. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 9.1 When a value is specified after address S, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the machine to control the spindle rotation speed. SPECIFYING THE A block can contain only one S code. Refer to the appropriate manual SPINDLE
Page 1719. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) 9.3 Specify the surface speed (relative speed between the tool and workpiece) following S. The spindle is rotated so that the surface speed is constant CONSTANT regardless of the position of the tool. SURFACE SPEED CONTROL (G96, G97) Fo
Page 1729. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Constant surface speed G96 (constant surface speed control command) is a modal G code. After control command (G96) a G96 command is specified, the program enters the constant surface speed control mode (G96 mode) and spec
Page 1739. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) D Surface speed specified in the G96 mode G96 mode G97 mode Specify the surface speed in m/min (or feet/min) G97 command Store the surface speed in m/min (or feet/min) Specified Command for The specified the spindle spindle speed speed
Page 1749. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 9.4 With this function, an overheat alarm (No. 704) is raised when the spindle speed deviates from the specified speed due to machine conditions. SPINDLE SPEED This function is useful, for example, for preventing the seizure of the FLUC
Page 1759. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (S FUNCTION) Explanations The fluctuation of the spindle speed is detected as follows: 1. When an alarm is issued after a specified spindle speed is reached Spindle speed r d q Specified q d speed r Actual speed Check No check Check Time Specificati
Page 1769. SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 When an alarm is issued in automatic operation, a single block stop occurs. The spindle overheat alarm is indicated on the screen, and the alarm signal “SPAL” is output (set to 1 for the presence of an alarm). This signal is clea
Page 17710. TOOL FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10 TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) General Two tool functions are available. One is the tool selection function, and the other is the tool life management function. 151
Page 17810. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 10.1 By specifying an up to 8–digit numerical value following address T, tools can be selected on the machine. TOOL SELECTION One T code can be commanded in a block. Refer to the machine tool FUNCTION builder’s manual for the number of digits c
Page 17910. TOOL FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10.2 Tools are classified into various groups, with the tool life (time or frequency of use) for each group being specified. The function of TOOL LIFE accumulating the tool life of each group in use and selecting and using MANAGEMENT the next t
Page 18010. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 10.2.1 Tool life management data consists of tool group numbers, tool numbers, Tool Life Management codes specifying tool compensation values, and tool life value. Data Explanations D Tool group number The Max. number of groups and the number o
Page 18110. TOOL FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10.2.2 In a program, tool life management data can be registered in the CNC unit, Register, Change and and registered tool life management data can be changed or deleted. Delete of Tool Life Management Data Explanations A different program form
Page 18210. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Format D Register with deleting Format Meaning of command all groups G10L3 ; G10L3 :Register with deleting all groups P_L_ ; P_ :Group number T_H_D_ ; L_ :Life value T_H_D_ ; T_ :Tool number H_ :Code specifying tool offset value (H code) P_L_ ;
Page 18310. TOOL FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) D Setting a tool life cout Format Meaning of command type for groups G10L3 Q_ : Life count type (1:Frequency, 2:Time) or G10L3P1); P_L_Q_ ; T_H_D_ ; T_H_D_ ; P_L_Q_ ; T_H_D_ ; T_H_D_ ; G11 ; M02 (M30) ; CAUTION 1 When the Q command is omitted,
Page 18410. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 10.2.3 Tool Life Management Command in a Machining Program Explanations D Command The following command is used for tool life management: Toooo; Specifies a tool group number. The tool life management function selects, from a specified group, a
Page 18510. TOOL FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) D Types For tool life management, the four tool change types indicated below are available. The type used varies from one machine to another. For details, refer to the appropriate manual of each machinde tool builder. Table 10.2.3 Tool Change T
Page 18610. TOOL FUNCTION (T FUNCTION) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Tool change type B and C Suppose that the tool life management ignore number is 100. T101; A tool whose life has not expired is selected from group 1. (Suppose that tool number 010 is selected.) M06T102;Tool life counting is performed for the
Page 18710. TOOL FUNCTION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING (T FUNCTION) 10.2.4 The life of a tool is specified by a usage frequency (count) or usage time Tool Life (in minutes). Explanations D Usage count The usage count is incremented by 1 for each tool used in a program. In other words, the usage count is increme
Page 18811. AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 11 AUXILIARY FUNCTION General There are two types of auxiliary functions ; miscellaneous function (M code) for specifying spindle start, spindle stop program end, and so on, and secondary auxiliary function (B code) for specifying index table positioni
Page 189B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 11.1 When a numeral is specified following address M, code signal and a strobe signal are sent to the machine. The machine uses these signals to AUXILIARY turn on or off its functions. FUNCTION Usually, only one M code can be specified in one block. In
Page 19011. AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 11.2 In general, only one M code can be specified in a block. However, up to three M codes can be specified at once in a block by setting bit 7 (M3B) MULTIPLE M of parameter No. 3404 to 1. Up to three M codes specified in a block are COMMANDS IN A simu
Page 191B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 11. AUXILIARY FUNCTION 11.3 The M code group check function checks if a combination of multiple M codes (up to three M codes) contained in a block is correct. M CODE GROUP This function has two purposes. One is to detect if any of the multiple M CHECK FUNCTION codes specifie
Page 19211. AUXILIARY FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 11.4 Indexing of the table is performed by address B and a following 8–digit number. The relationship between B codes and the corresponding THE SECOND indexing differs between machine tool builders. AUXILIARY Refer to the manual issued by the machine t
Page 193B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 12 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION General D Main program and There are two program types, main program and subprogram. Normally, subprogram the CNC operates according to the main program. However, when a command calling a subprogram is encountered in the mai
Page 19412. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Program components A program consists of the following components: Table 12 Program components Components Descriptions Tape start Symbol indicating the start of a program file Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc. Program start
Page 195B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 12.1 This section describes program components other than program sections. See II–12.2 for a program section. PROGRAM COMPONENTS Leader section OTHER THAN Tape start % TITLE ; Program start PROGRAM O0001 ; SECTIONS Program section (COMMENT) Comment
Page 19612. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE If one file contains multiple programs, the EOB code for label skip operation must not appear before a second or subsequent program number. D Comment section Any information enclosed by the control–out and control–in codes is regarded as a comm
Page 197B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Tape end A tape end is to be placed at the end of a file containing NC programs. If programs are entered using the automatic programming system, the mark need not be entered. The mark is not displayed on the screen. However, when a file is output,
Page 19812. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 12.2 This section describes elements of a program section. See II–12.1 for program components other than program sections. PROGRAM SECTION CONFIGURATION % TITLE; Program number O0001 ; N1 … ; Sequence number (COMMENT) Comment section Program section
Page 199B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Sequence number and A program consists of several commands. One command unit is called a block block. One block is separated from another with an EOB of end of block code. Table 12.2 (a) EOB code Name ISO code EIA code Notation in this manual End
Page 20012. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Block configuration A block consists of one or more words. A word consists of an address (word and address) followed by a number some digits long. (The plus sign (+) or minus sign (–) may be prefixed to a number.) Word = Address + number (Example
Page 201B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Major addresses and Major addresses and the ranges of values specified for the addresses are ranges of command shown below. Note that these figures represent limits on the CNC side, values which are totally different from limits on the machine too
Page 20212. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Optional block skip When a slash followed by a number (/n (n=1 to 9)) is specified at the head of a block, and optional block skip switch n on the machine operator panel is set to on, the information contained in the block for which /n correspondi
Page 203B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Program end The end of a program is indicated by programming one of the following codes at the end of the program: Table 12.2 (d) Code of a program end Code Meaning usage M02 For main program M30 M99 For subprogram If one of the program end codes
Page 20412. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 12.3 If a program contains a fixed sequence or frequently repeated pattern, such a sequence or pattern can be stored as a subprogram in memory to simplify SUBPROGRAM the program. (M98, M99) A subprogram can be called from the main program. A called
Page 205B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION NOTE 1 The M98 and M99 code signal and strobe signal are not output to the machine tool. 2 If the subprogram number specified by address P cannot be found, an alarm (No. 078) is output. Examples l M98 P51002 ; This command specifies ”Call the subpro
Page 20612. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Special Usage D Specifying the sequence If P is used to specify a sequence number when a subprogram is number for the return terminated, control does not return to the block after the calling block, but destination in the main returns to the block w
Page 207B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION D Using a subprogram only A subprogram can be executed just like a main program by searching for the start of the subprogram with the MDI. (See III–9.3 for information about search operation.) In this case, if a block containing M99 is executed, con
Page 20812. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 12.4 The 8–digit program number function enables specification of program numbers with eight digits following address O (O00000001 to 8–DIGIT PROGRAM O99999999). NUMBER Explanations D Disabling editing of Editing of subprograms O00008000 to O0000899
Page 209B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 12. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION 2) Macro call using M code Program number Parameter used to specify M code When SPR = 0 When SPR = 1 No.6080 O00009020 O90009020 No.6081 O00009021 O90009021 No.6082 O00009022 O90009022 No.6083 O00009023 O90009023 No.6084 O00009024 O90009024 No.6085
Page 21012. PROGRAM CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 6) Pattern data function Program numaber When SPR = 0 When SPR = 1 O00009500 O90009500 O00009501 O90009501 O00009502 O90009502 O00009503 O90009503 O00009504 O90009504 O00009505 O90009505 O00009506 O90009506 O00009507 O90009507 O00009508 O90009508 O0
Page 21113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13 FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING General This chapter explains the following items: 13.1 CANNED CYCLE 13.2 RIGID TAPPING 13.3 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) 13.4 GRINDING WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION BY CONTINUOUS DRESSING (
Page 21213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1 Canned cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle, a frequently–used machining operation can be CANNED CYCLE specified in a single block with a G function; without canned cycles, normally more t
Page 21313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations A canned cycle consists of a sequence of six operations (Fig. 13.1 (a)) Operation 1 Positioning of axes X and Y (including also another axis) Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level Operation 3 Hole machining Operatio
Page 21413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples Assume that the U, V and W axes be parallel to the X, Y, and Z axes respectively. This condition is specified by parameter No. 1022. G17 G81 ………Z _ _ : The Z axis is used for drilling. G17 G81 ………W _ _ : The W axis is used for d
Page 21513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Return point level When the tool reaches the bottom of a hole, the tool may be returned to G98/G99 point R or to the initial level. These operations are specified with G98 and G99. The following illustrates how the tool moves when G98
Page 21613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.1 This cycle performs high–speed peck drilling. It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while removing chips from the hole. High–Speed Peck Drilling Cycle (G73) Format G73 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole po
Page 21713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations The high–speed peck drilling cycle performs intermittent feeding along the Z–axis. When this cycle is used, chips can be removed from the hole easily, and a smaller value can be set for retraction. This allows, drilling to b
Page 21813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.2 This cycle performs left–handed tapping. In the left–handed tapping cycle, when the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle rotates Left–Handed Tapping clockwise. Cycle (G74) Format G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole
Page 21913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that p
Page 22013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.3 The fine boring cycle bores a hole precisely. When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle stops, and the tool is moved away from the Fine Boring Cycle machined surface of the workpiece and retracted. (G76) Format G76
Page 22113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position, and the tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip and retracted. This ensures that the machined surface is no
Page 22213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.4 This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. The tool is then retracted from the bottom of the hole Drilling Cycle, Spot in rapid traverse. Drilling (G81) Format G81 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K
Page 22313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Restrictions D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Cancel Do not specify a G c
Page 22413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.5 This cycle is used for normal drilling. Cutting feed is performed to the bottom of the hole. At the bottom, a dwell Drilling Cycle Counter is performed, then the tool is retracted in rapid traverse. Boring Cycle (G82) This cycle i
Page 22513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Restrictions D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that
Page 22613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.6 This cycle performs peck drilling. It performs intermittent cutting feed to the bottom of a hole while Peck Drilling Cycle removing shavings from the hole. (G83) Format G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : Th
Page 22713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Q Specify Q in blocks that p
Page 22813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.7 An arbor with the overload torque detection function is used to retract the Small–Hole Peck tool when the overload torque detection signal (skip signal) is detected during drilling. Drilling is resumed after the spindle speed and
Page 22913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations D Component operations of the cycle *Positioning along the X–axis and Y–axis *Positioning at point R along the Z–axis *Drilling along the Z–axis (first drilling, depth of cut Q, incremental) Retraction (bottom of the hole →
Page 23013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Changing the drilling In a single G83 cycle, drilling conditions are changed for each drilling conditions operation (advance → drilling → retraction). Bits 1 and 2 of parameter OLS, NOL No. 5160 can be specified to suppress the change
Page 23113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Specifying address I The forward or backward traveling speed can be specified with address I in the same format as address F, as shown below: G83 I1000 ; (without decimal point) G83 I1000. ; (with decimal point) Both commands indicate
Page 23213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples N01M03 S___ ; N02Mjj ; N03G83 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ F_ I_ K_ P_ ; N04X_ Y_ ; : : N10G80 ; N01: Specifies forward spindle rotation and spindle speed. N02: Specifies the M code to execute G83 as the small–hole
Page 23313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations Tapping is performed by rotating the spindle clockwise. When the bottom of the hole has been reached, the spindle is rotated in the reverse direction for retraction. This operation creates threads. Feedrate overrides are ign
Page 23413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.9 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G85) Format G85 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level F_
Page 23513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Cancel Do not specify a G co
Page 23613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.10 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G86) Format G86 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level F_
Page 23713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D Cancel Do not specify a G co
Page 23813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.11 This cycle performs accurate boring. Back Boring Cycle (G87) Format G87 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ Q_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from the bottom of the hole to point Z R_ : The distance from the initial level to poi
Page 23913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations After positioning along the X– and Y–axes, the spindle is stopped at the fixed rotation position. The tool is moved in the direction opposite to the tool tip, positioning (rapid traverse) is performed to the bottom of the ho
Page 24013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.12 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G88) Format G88 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level
Page 24113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that p
Page 24213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.13 This cycle is used to bore a hole. Boring Cycle (G89) Format G89 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ : The distance from the initial level to point R level
Page 24313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D Axis switching Before the drilling axis can be changed, the canned cycle must be canceled. D Drilling In a block that does not contain X, Y, Z, R, or any other axes, drilling is not performed. D P Specify P in blocks that p
Page 24413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.1.14 G80 cancels canned cycles. Canned Cycle Cancel (G80) Format G80 ; Explanations All canned cycles are canceled to perform normal operation. Point R and point Z are cleared. This means that R = 0 and Z = 0 in incremental mode. Othe
Page 24513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Program example using tool length offset and canned cycles Reference position 350 #1 #11 #6 100 #7 #10 100 #2 #12 #5 100 Y #8 #9 200 100 #3 #13 #4 X 400 150 250 250 150 # 11 to 16 Drilling of a 10mm diameter hole # 17 to 10 Drilling of a
Page 24613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Offset value +200.0 is set in offset No.11, +190.0 is set in offset No.15, and +150.0 is set in offset No.31 Program example ; N001 G92X0Y0Z0; Coordinate setting at reference position N002 G90 G00 Z250.0 T11 M6; Tool change N003 G43 Z0 H
Page 24713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.2 The tapping cycle (G84) and left–handed tapping cycle (G74) may be performed in standard mode or rigid tapping mode. RIGID TAPPING In standard mode, the spindle is rotated and stopped along with a movement along the tapping axis usi
Page 24813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.2.1 When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a servo motor, a tapping cycle can be sped up. Rigid Tapping (G84) Format G84 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance from point R to the
Page 24913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Thread lead In feed–per–minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from the expression, feedrate × spindle speed. In feed–per–revolution mode, the thread lead equals the feedrate speed. D Tool length If a tool length compensation (G43, G
Page 25013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Subprogram call In the canned cycle mode, specify the subprogram call command M98P_ in an independent block. Examples Z–axis feedrate 1000 mm/min Spindle speed 1000 min-1 Thread lead 1.0 mm G94 ; Specif
Page 25113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.2.2 When the spindle motor is controlled in rigid mode as if it were a servo motor, tapping cycles can be speed up. Left–Handed Rigid Tapping Cycle (G74) Format G74 X_ Y_ Z_ R_ P_ F_ K_ ; X_ Y_ : Hole position data Z_ : The distance f
Page 25213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Thread lead In feed–per–minute mode, the thread lead is obtained from the expression, feedrate × spindle speed. In feed–per–revolution mode, the thread lead equals the feedrate. D Tool length If a tool length offset (G43, G44, or G49)
Page 25313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Examples Z–axis feedrate 1000 mm/min Spindle speed 1000 min-1 Thread lead 1.0 mm G94 ; Specify a feed–per–minute command. G00 X120.0 Y100.0 ; Positioning M29 S1000 ; Rigid mode specification G84 Z–100.0
Page 25413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.2.3 Tapping a deep hole in rigid tapping mode may be difficult due to chips sticking to the tool or increased cutting resistance. In such cases, the peck Peck Rigid Tapping rigid tapping cycle is useful. Cycle (G84 or G74) In this cyc
Page 25513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Explanations D High–speed peck After positioning along the X– and Y–axes, rapid traverse is performed tapping cycle to point R. From point R, cutting is performed with depth Q (depth of cut for each cutting feed), then the tool is retrac
Page 25613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D P/Q Specify P and Q in a block that performs drilling. If they are specified in a block that does not perform drilling, they are not stored as modal data. When Q0 is specified, the peck rigid tapping cycle is not performed. D Cancel Do
Page 25713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.3 Canned grinding cycles make it easier for the programmer to create programs that include grinding. With a canned grinding cycle, repetitive Canned Grinding operation peculiar to grinding can be specified in a single block with a G C
Page 25813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.3.1 A plunge grinding cycle is performed. Plunge Grinding Cycle (G75) Format G75 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J_ : Depth–of–cut 2 (A sign in the command sp
Page 25913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D X(Z), I, J, K X, (Z), I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode. D Clear I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78, and G79. They remain valid until new data is specified. They are c
Page 26013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.3.2 A direct constant–dimension plunge grinding cycle is performed. Direct Constant–Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle (G77) Format G77 I_ J_ K_ X(Z)_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cut
Page 26113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Skip signal When the cycle is performed using G77, a skip signal can be input to terminate the cycle. When a skip signal is input, the current operation sequence is interrupted or completed, then the cycle is terminated. The following
Page 26213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.3.3 A continuous–feed surface grinding cycle is performed. Continuous–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G78) Format G78 I_ (J_) K_ X_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J_ : Depth–of–c
Page 26313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Restrictions D J When J is omitted, it is assumed to be 1. J is valid only in the block where it is specified. D I, J, K, X X, I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode. D Clear I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data
Page 26413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.3.4 An intermittent–feed surface grinding cycle is performed. Intermittent–Feed Surface Grinding Cycle (G79) Format G79 I_ J_ K_ X_ R_ F_ P_ L_ ; I_: Depth–of–cut 1 (A sign in the command specifies the direction of cutting.) J_ : Dept
Page 26513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Restrictions D X, I, J, K X, I, J, and K must all be specified in incremental mode. D Clear I, J, X, and Z in canned cycles are modal data common to G75, G77, G78, and G79. They remain valid until new data is specified. They are cleared
Page 26613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.4 This function enables continuous dressing. When G75, G77, G78, or G79 is specified, grinding wheel cutting and GRINDING–WHEEL dresser cutting are compensated continuously according to the amount of WEAR continuous dressing during gr
Page 26713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.5 AUTOMATIC GRINDING WHEEL DIAMETER COMPENSATION AFTER DRESSING 13.5.1 Compensation amounts set in offset memory can be modified by using the external tool compensation function or programming (by changing Checking the Minimum offsets
Page 26813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.6 Every time an external signal is input, cutting is performed by a fixed amount according to the programmed profile in the specified Y–Z plane. IN–FEED GRINDING ALONG THE Y AND Z AXES AT THE END OF TABLE SWING (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)
Page 26913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.7 Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following: OPTIONAL ANGLE ⋅Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks CHAMFERING AND ⋅Between linear interpolation and circular interp
Page 27013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples N001 G92 G90 X0 Y0 ; N002 G00 X10.0 Y10.0 ; N003 G01 X50.0 F10.0 ,C5.0 ; N004 Y25.0 ,R8.0 ; N005 G03 X80.0 Y50.0 R30.0 ,R8.0 ; N006 G01 X50.0 ,R8.0 ; N007 Y70.0 ,C5.0 ; N008 X10.0 ,C5.0 ; N009 Y10.0 ; N010 G00 X0 Y0 ; N011 M0 ;
Page 27113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Restrictions D Plane selection Chamfering and corner rounding can be performed only in the plane specified by plane selection (G17, G18, or G19). These functions cannot be performed for parallel axes. D Next block A block specifying cham
Page 27213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.8 Upon completion of positioning in each block in the program, an external operation function signal can be output to allow the machine to perform EXTERNAL MOTION specific operation. FUNCTION Concerning this operation, refer to the ma
Page 27313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.9 Machining can be repeated after moving or rotating the figure using a subprogram. FIGURE COPY (G72.1, G72.2) Format D Rotational copy Xp–Yp plane (specified by G17) : G72.1 P_ L_ Xp_ Yp_ R_ ; Zp–Xp plane (specified by G18) : G72.1 P
Page 27413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (Example of a correct program) O1000 G00 G90 X100.0 Y200.0 ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅ ; ⋅⋅⋅⋅ ; M99 ; D Combination of The linear copy command can be specified in a subprogram for a rotational and linear rotational copy. Also, the rotational copy command can
Page 27513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Y End point of the first copy P4 P5 D D P2 P1 D D D D D D P3 P6 P7 Start point of the second copy D X Start point P0 90 Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ; N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ; N30 G01 G17 G41 X20. Y0 D01 F10 ; (P0) N40 Y20. ; (P1) N
Page 27613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Modes that must not be The figure cannot be copied during chamfering, corner rounding, or tool selected offset. D Unit system The two axes of the plane for copying a figure must have an identical unit system. D Single block Single–bloc
Page 27713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Rotational copy Y (spot boring) P1 P0 Start point 60° X Main program O3000 ; N10 G92 G17 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0) N20 G72.1 P4000 L6 X0 Y0 R60.0 ; N30 G80 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 ; (P0) N40 M30 ; Subprogram O4000 N100 G90 G81 X_ Y_ R_ Z_ F_ ; (P1) N
Page 27813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Linear copy Y P4 P5 P2 P7 Start point P P1 P3 6 X P0 70 70 70 P8 Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 X–20.0 Y0 ; N20 G00 G90 X0 Y0 ; N30 G01 G17 G41 X_ Y_ D01 F10 ; (P0) N40 Y_ ; (P1) N50 X_ ; (P2) N60 G72.2 P2000 L3 I70.0 J0 ; N70 X_ Y_ ; (P
Page 27913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Combination of rotational Y copying and linear P0 copying (bolt hole circle) Start point P1 45° X Main program O1000 ; N10 G92 G17 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N20 G72.1 P2000 X0 Y0 L8 R45.0 ; N30 G80 G00 X100.0 Y80.0 ; (P0) N40 M30 ; Subprogra
Page 28013. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 13.10 Coordinate conversion about an axis can be carried out if the center of rotation, direction of the axis of rotation, and angular displacement are THREE– specified. This function is very useful in three–dimensional machining DIMENSI
Page 28113. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING subsequent N3 block, coordinates in the X’’Y’’Z’’ coordinate system are specified with Xp, Yp, and Zp. The X’’Y’’Z’’ coordinate system is called the program coordinate system. If (Xp, Yp, Zp) is not specified in the N2 block, (Xp, Yp, Zp
Page 28213. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Equation for The following equation shows the general relationship between (x, y, z) three–dimensional in the program coordinate system and (X, Y, Z) in the original coordinate coordinate conversion system (workpiece coordinate system)
Page 28313. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Three basic axes and Three–dimensional coordinate conversion can be applied to a desired their parallel axes combination of three axes selected out of the basic three axes (X, Y, Z) and their parallel axes. The three–dimensional coordi
Page 28413. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 G53 Selecting the machine coordinate system G65 Custom macro calling G66 Continuous–state custom macro calling G67 Canceling continuous–state custom macro calling G73 Canned cycle (peck drilling cycle) G74 Canned cycle (reverse tapping c
Page 28513. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING Limitations D manual intervention Three–dimensional coordinate conversion does not affect the degree of manual intervention or manual handle interrupt. D Positioning in the Three–dimensional coordinate conversion does not affect position
Page 28613. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples N1 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 ; Carries out positioning to zero point H. N2 G68 X10. Y0 Z0 I0 J1 K0 R30. ; Forms new coordinate system X’Y’Z’. N3 G68 X0 Y–10. Z0 I0 J0 K1 R–90. ; Forms other coordinate system X’’Y’’Z’’. The origin agrees with
Page 28713. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 13.11 By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index table of the machining center can be INDEX TABLE indexed. INDEXING FUNCTION Before and after indexing, the index table is au
Page 28813. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 2. Using no miscellaneous functions By setting to bits 2, 3, and 4 of parameter ABS, INC,G90 No.5500, operation can be selected from the following two options. Select the operation by referring to the manual written by the machine tool b
Page 28913. FUNCTIONS TO SIMPLIFY B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING D Indexing function and other functions Table 13.11 (a) Index indexing function and other functions Item Explanation This value is rounded down when bit 1 of parameter REL No. 5500 Relative position display specifies this option. This va
Page 29014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14 COMPENSATION FUNCTION General This chapter describes the following compensation functions: 14.1 TOOL LENGTH OFFSET (G43, G44, G49) 14.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (G37) 14.3 TOOL OFFSET (G45–G48) 14.4 CUTTER COMPENSATION B (G39–G42) 14.5 C
Page 291B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.1 This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during programming and the actual tool length of the tool used TOOL LENGTH into the offset memory. It is possible to compensate the difference without OFFSET ch
Page 29214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Selection of tool length Select tool length offset A, B, or C, by setting bits 0 and 1 of parameter offset TLC,TLB No. 5001. D Direction of the offset When G43 is specified, the tool length offset value (stored in offset memory) speci
Page 293B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (2) Cutter compensation C When the offset numbers for cutter compensation C are specified or modified, the offset number validation order varies, depending on the condition, as described below. D When OFH (bit 2 of parameter No. 5001) = 0 O××××; H01
Page 29414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE The tool length offset value corresponding to offset No. 0, that is, H0 always means 0. It is impossible to set any other tool length offset value to H0. D Performing tool length Tool length offset B can be executed along two or more axes when
Page 295B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples Tool length offset (in boring holes No.1, 2, and 3) t1 t3 20 30 (6) +Y (13) (9) (1) t2 30 +X 120 30 50 +Z Actual position (2) Programmed 35 3 (12) position (3) (5) (10) 18 (7) (8) 22 offset 30 value (4) (11) ε=4mm 8 ⋅Program H1=–4.0 (Tool l
Page 29614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.1.2 This section describes the tool length offset cancellation and restoration G53, G28, G30, and performed when G53, G28, G30, or G31 is specified in tool length offset mode. Also described is the timing of tool length offset. G30.1 Commands in
Page 297B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE When tool length offset is applied to multiple axes, all specified axes involved in reference position return are subject to cancellation. When tool length offset cancellation is specified at the same time, tool length offset vector cancellatio
Page 29814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 In tool length offset mode Type EVO (bit 6 of pa- Restoration block rameter No. 5001) 1 Block containing a G43/G44 block A/B 0 Block containing an H command and G43/44 command Ignored Block containing a C G43P_H_/G44P_H_ command WARNING When tool le
Page 299B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.2 By issuing G37 the tool starts moving to the measurement position and keeps on moving till the approach end signal from the measurement AUTOMATIC TOOL device is output. Movement of the tool is stopped when the tool tip LENGTH reaches the measur
Page 30014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Changing the offset The difference between the coordinates of the position at which the tool value reaches for measurement and the coordinates specified by G37 is added to the current tool length offset value. Offset value = (Current compensation
Page 301B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION WARNING When a manual movement is inserted into a movement at a measurement federate, return the tool to the!position before the inserted manual movement for restart. NOTE 1 When an H code is specified in the same block as G37, an alarm is generated
Page 30214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples G92 Z760.0 X1100.0 ; Sets a workpiece coordinate system with respect to the programmed absolute zero point. G00 G90 X850.0 ; Moves the tool to X850.0. That is the tool is moved to a position that is a specified distance from the measurement
Page 303B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.3 The programmed travel distance of the tool can be increased or decreased by a specified tool offset value or by twice the offset value. TOOL OFFSET The tool offset function can also be applied to an additional (G45–G48) axis. Workpiece ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
Page 30414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Increase and decrease As shown in Table 14.3(a), the travel distance of the tool is increased or decreased by the specified tool offset value. In the absolute mode, the travel distance is increased or decreased as the tool is moved fr
Page 305B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION WARNING 1 When G45 to G48 is specified to n axes (n=1–6) simultaneously in a motion block, offset is applied to all n axes. When the cutter is offset only for cutter radius or diameter in taper cutting, overcutting or undercutting occurs. Therefore,
Page 30614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 When the specified direction is reversed by decrease as shown in the figure below, the tool moves in the opposite direction. Movement of the tool Program command Start Example position End G46 X2.50 ; position Tool offset value Equivalent com
Page 307B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples Program using tool offset N12 N11 30R N9 40 N10 N13 N8 N4 30R 40 N3 N5 N1 N2 N6 N7 ÇÇÇ 50 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ N14 80 50 40 30 30 Origin Y axis Tool diameter : 20φ Offset No. : 01 Tool offset value : +10.0 X axis Program N1 G91 G46 G00 X80.0 Y50.0 D01 ;
Page 30814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.4 When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool (Fig. 14.4). CUTTER To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, first create an offset COMPENSATION B vector with a length equal to the radius of the tool
Page 309B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Format D Start up G00 (or G01) G41 (or G42) IP_ I R_ H_ ; (Cutter compensation start) G41 : Cutter compensation left (Group 07) : Cutter compensation right (Group 07) G42 IP_ : Command for axis movement I R_ : Incremental value from the end position
Page 31014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Offset plane selection Cutter compensation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and offset vector and G19 (G codes for plane selection.). This plane is called the offset plane. If the offset plane is not specified, G17 is assumed to
Page 311B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.1 G41 offsets the tool towards the left of the workpiece as you see when you Cutter Compensation face in the same direction as the movement of the cutting tool. Left (G41) Explanations D G00 (positioning) or G41 X_ Y_ I_ J_ H_ ; G01 (linear int
Page 31214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D G02, G03 G41… ; (Circular interpolation) : G02 (or G03) X_ Y_ R_ ; Above command specifies a new vector to be created to the left looking toward the direction in which an arc advances on a line connecting the arc center and the arc end point, and
Page 313B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.2 G42, contrary to G41, specifies a tool to be offset to the right of work piece Cutter Compensation looking toward the direction in which the tool advances. G42 has the same function as G41, except that the directions of the vectors Right (G42
Page 31414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D G02 or G03 G42… ; (Circular interpolation) : G02 (or G03) X_ Y_ R_; ÇÇÇÇ (X, Y) ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ Programmed path New vector ÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Tool center path ÇÇÇÇÇ R ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Start position ÇÇÇÇÇ Old vector ÇÇÇÇÇ New vector ÇÇÇÇÇ (X, Y) R ÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇ Progra
Page 315B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.3 When the following command is specified in the G01, G02, or G03 mode, Corner Offset Circular corner offset circular interpolation can be executed with respect to the radius of the tool. Interpolation (G39) Format In offset mode X_Y_ G39 X_Z_
Page 31614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.4.4 When the following command is specified in the G00 or G01 mode, the Cutter Compensation tool moves from the head of the old vector at the start position to the end position (X, Y). In the G01 mode, the tool moves linearly. In the G00 Cancel (
Page 317B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.5 The offset direction is switched from left to right, or from right to left Switch between Cutter generally through the offset cancel mode, but can be switched not through it only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01). In this cas
Page 31814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.4.6 The offset amount is changed generally when the tool is changed in the Change of the Cutter offset cancel mode, but can be changed in the offset mode only in positioning (G00) or linear interpolation (G01). Compensation Value Program as descr
Page 319B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.4.7 If the tool compensation value is made negative (–), it is equal that G41 Positive/Negative and G42 are replaced with each other in the process sheet. Consequently, if the tool center is passing around the outside of the workbench it will Cut
Page 32014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples N6 N5 20.0 N7 N4 40.0 R1=40.0 40.0 N3 R2=20.0 20.0 N2 N8 N10 N9 20.0 ÇÇ N1 ÇÇ Y axis N11 ÇÇ 20.0 X axis Unit : mm N1 G91 G17 G00 G41 J1 X20.0 Y20.0 H08 ; N2 G01 Z–25.0 F100 ; N3 Y40.0 F250 ; N4 G39 I40.0 J20.0 ; N5 X40.0 Y20.0 ; N6 G39 I40.
Page 321B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.5 When the tool is moved, the tool path can be shifted by the radius of the tool (Fig. 14.5 (a)). OVERVIEW OF To make an offset as large as the radius of the tool, CNC first creates an CUTTER offset vector with a length equal to the radius of the
Page 32214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Format D Start up G00(or G01)G41(or G42) IP P_ D_ ; (Tool compensation start) G41 : Cutter compensation left (Group07) G42 : Cutter compensation right (Group07) IPP_ : Command for axis movement D_ : Code for specifying as the cutter compensation val
Page 323B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Offset mode cancel In the offset mode, when a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed, the CNC enters the offset cancel mode, and the action of this block is called the offset cancel. 1. G40 has been commanded. 2. 0 h
Page 32414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Positive/negative cutter If the offset amount is negative (–), distribution is made for a figure in compensation value and which G41’s and G42’s are all replaced with each other on the program. tool center path Consequently, if the tool center is
Page 325B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Plane selection and Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17, G18 and vector G19, (G codes for plane selection). This plane is called the offset plane. Compensation is not executed for the coordinate of a position which is
Page 32614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples N5 250R C1(700,1300) C3 (–150,1150) P4(500,1150) P5(900,1150) C2 (1550,1550) 650R 650R N4 N6 N3 N7 P3(450,900) P2 P6(950,900) P7 (250,900) (1150,900) N8 N2 P9(700,650) P1 P8 (250,550) (1150,550) N10 N9 N1 Y axis ÇÇÇ N11 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ Start positi
Page 327B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6 This section provides a detailed explanation of the movement of the tool for cutter compensation C outlined in Section 14.5. DETAILS OF CUTTER This section consists of the following subsections: COMPENSATION C 14.6.1 General 14.6.2 Tool Movemen
Page 32814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.6.2 When the offset cancel mode is changed to offset mode, the tool moves Tool Movement in as illustrated below (start–up): Start–up Explanations D Tool movement around an inner side of a corner Linear→Linear (180°xα) α Workpiece Programmed path
Page 329B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around Tool path in start–up has two types A and B, and they are selected by the outside of a corner at parameter SUP (No. 5003#0). an obtuse angle (90°xα<180°) Linear→Linear Start position G42 α Workpiece L Programmed path r S L Too
Page 33014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Tool movement around Tool path in start–up has two types A and B, and they are selected by the outside of an acute parameter SUP (No.5003#0). angle (α<90°) Linear→Linear Start position G42 L Workpiece α Programmed path r S L Tool center path Type
Page 331B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D A block without tool If the command is specified at start–up, the offset vector is not created. movement specified at start–up G91 G40 … ; : N6 X100.0 Y100.0 ; N7 G41 X0 ; N8 Y–100.0 ; N9 Y–100.0 X100.0 ; SS N7 N6 N8 S r Tool center path N9 Progra
Page 33214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.6.3 In the offset mode, the tool moves as illustrated below: Tool Movement in Offset Mode Explanations D Tool movement around the inside of a corner Linear→Linear (180°xα) α Workpiece Programmed path S L Tool center path Intersection L Linear→Cir
Page 333B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around the inside (α<1°) with an Intersection abnormally long vector, linear → linear r Tool center path Programmed path r r S Intersection Also in case of arc to straight line, straight line to arc and arc to arc, the reader should
Page 33414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Tool movement around the outside corner at an Linear→Linear obtuse angle (90°xα<180°) α Workpiece L Programmed path S Intersection L Tool center path Linear→Circular α L r Work- piece S L C Intersection Tool center path Programmed path Circular→Li
Page 335B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around the outside corner at an acute angle Linear→Linear (α<90°) L Workpiece r α L Programmed path S r L Tool center path L L Linear→Circular L r α L S r Work- L piece L C Tool center path Programmed path Circular→Linear C S α Workp
Page 33614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D When it is exceptional End position for the arc is not If the end of a line leading to an arc is programmed as the end of the arc on the arc by mistake as illustrated below, the system assumes that cutter compensation has been executed with respec
Page 337B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION The center of the arc is identiĆ If the center of the arc is identical with the start position or end point, P/S cal with the start position or alarm (No. 038) is displayed, and the tool will stop at the end position of the end position the precedin
Page 33814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Tool center path with an inter- section Linear→Linear S Workpiece G42 L r r Programmed path L G41 Tool center path Workpiece Linear→Circular C Workpiece r G41 G42 Programmed path r Workpiece Tool center path L S Circular→Linear Workpiece G42 Program
Page 339B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Tool center path without an in- When changing the offset direction in block A to block B using G41 and tersection G42, if intersection with the offset path is not required, the vector normal to block B is created at the start point of block B. Linea
Page 34014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 The length of tool center path Normally there is almost no possibility of generating this situation. larger than the circumference However, when G41 and G42 are changed, or when a G40 was of a circle commanded with address I, J, and K this situation
Page 341B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Temporary cutter If the following command is specified in the offset mode, the offset mode compensation cancel is temporarily canceled then automatically restored. The offset mode can be canceled and started as described in II–15.6.2 and 15.6.4. S
Page 34214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Cutter compensation G The offset vector can be set to form a right angle to the moving direction code in the offset mode in the previous block, irrespective of machining inner or outer side, by commanding the cutter compensation G code (G41, G42)
Page 343B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D A block without tool The following blocks have no tool movement. In these blocks, the tool movement will not move even if cutter compensation is effected. M05 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M code output S21 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S code out
Page 34414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Corner movement When two or more vectors are produced at the end of a block, the tool moves linearly from one vector to another. This movement is called the corner movement. If these vectors almost coincide with each other, the corner movement isn
Page 345B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION N4 G41 G91 G01 X150.0 Y200.0 ; P2 P3 P4 P5 N5 X150.0 Y200.0 ; N6 G02 J–600.0 ; N7 G01 X150.0 Y–200.0 ; N8 G40 X150.0 Y–200.0 ; P1 P6 N5 N7 N4 N8 Programmed path Tool center path N6 If the vector is not ignored, the tool path is as follows: P1 → P2 →
Page 34614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.6.4 Tool Movement in Offset Mode Cancel Explanations D Tool movement around an inside corner Linear→Linear (180°xα) Workpiece α Programmed path r G40 Tool center path L S L Circular→Linear α r G40 Work- piece S C L Programmed path Tool center pat
Page 347B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around Tool path has two types, A and B; and they are selected by parameter SUP an outside corner at an (No. 5003#0). obtuse angle (90°xα<180°) Linear→Linear G40 α Workpiece Programmed path L r Tool center path L S Type A Circular→Li
Page 34814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Tool movement around Tool path has two types, A and B : and they are selected by parameter SUP an outside corner at an (No. 5003#0) acute angle (α<90°) Linear→Linear G40 Workpiece L α Programmed path G42 r Tool center path L S Type A Circular→Line
Page 349B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool movement around the outside linear→linear S Tool center path at an acute angle less L than 1 degree (α<1°) r L (G42) Programmed path 1°or less G40 Start position D A block without tool When a block without tool movement is commanded together
Page 35014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Block containing G40 and I_J_K_ The previous block contains If a G41 or G42 block precedes a block in which G40 and I_, J_, K_ are G41 or G42 specified, the system assumes that the path is programmed as a path from the end position determined by t
Page 351B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION The length of the tool center In the example shown below, the tool does not trace the circle more than path larger than the circumfer- once. It moves along the arc from P1 to P2. The interference check ence of a circle function described in II–15.6.
Page 35214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.6.5 Tool overcutting is called interference. The interference check function Interference Check checks for tool overcutting in advance. However, all interference cannot be checked by this function. The interference check is performed even if over
Page 353B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (2) In addition to the condition (1), the angle between the start point and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point on the programmed path in circular machining(more than 180 degrees). r2
Page 35414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Correction of (1) Removal of the vector causing the interference interference in advance When cutter compensation is performed for blocks A, B and C and vectors V1, V2, V3 and V4 between blocks A and B, and V5, V6, V7 and V8 between B and C are pr
Page 355B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (Example 2) The tool moves linearly from V1, V2, V7, to V8 V2 V7 V1 V8 Tool center path C V6 V3 C r r A C V5 V4 Programmed path B V4, V5 : Interference V3, V6 : Interference O1 O2 V2, V7 : No Interference (2) If the interference occurs after correct
Page 35614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D When interference is assumed although actual interference does not (1) Depression which is smaller than the cutter compensation value occur Programmed path Tool center path Stopped A C B There is no actual interference, but since the direction pro
Page 357B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.6 Overcutting by Cutter Compensation Explanations D Machining an inside When the radius of a corner is smaller than the cutter radius, because the corner at a radius inner offsetting of the cutter will result in overcuttings, an alarm is smalle
Page 35814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Machining a step smaller When machining of the step is commanded by circular machining in the than the tool radius case of a program containing a step smaller than the tool radius, the path of the center of tool with the ordinary offset becomes re
Page 359B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION The above example should be modified as follows: N1 G91 G00 G41 X500.0 Y500.0 D1 ; N3 G01 Z–250.0 ; N5 G01 Z–50.0 F100 ; N6 Y1000.0 F200 ; Workpiece ÊÊÊÊÊ After compensation N6 ÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊ N3, N5:Move command for the Z axis (500, 500) N1
Page 36014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.6.7 Cutter compensation C is not performed for commands input from the Input Command from MDI. However, when automatic operation using the absolute commands is MDI temporarily stopped by the single block function, MDI operation is performed, then
Page 361B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.6.8 A function has been added which performs positioning by automatically G53, G28, G30, G30.1 canceling a cutter compensation vector when G53 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, then automatically restoring that cutter and G29 Commands i
Page 36214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (1) G53 specified in offset mode When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx; [Type A] Start–up G90G41_ _; r r G53X_Y_; (G41G00) s s G00 G53 G00 s [Type B] Start–up r r s s G00 G53 G00 s When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] r (G41G0
Page 363B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION When CCN (bit2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] r s G00 (G91G41G00) s G53 G90G00 (3) G53 specified in offset mode with no movement specified When CCN (bit2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx; [Type A] G90G41_ _; r Start–up s G00 G00X20.Y20. ; G00 r G5
Page 36414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 WARNING 1 When cutter compensation C mode is set and all–axis machine lock is applied, the G53 command does not perform positioning along the axes to which machine lock is applied. The vector, however, is preserved. When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.
Page 365B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE 1 When a G53 command specifies an axis that is not in the cutter compensation C plane, a perpendicular vector is generated at the end point of the previous block, and the tool does not move. In the next block, offset mode is automatically resum
Page 36614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D G28, G30, or G30.1 When G28, G30, or G30.1 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, command in cutter an operation of FS15 type is performed if CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. compensation C mode 5003) is set to 1. This means that an intersection v
Page 367B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (b) For return by G00 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) = 0 Oxxxx; [Type A] G91G41_ _ _; Intermediateposition G28/30/30.1 s s s G01 G28X40.Y0 ; r r G00 (G42G01) s Reference position or floating reference position [Type B] Intermediateposition G
Page 36814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) = 1 [FS15 Type] Intermediate position = return position (G42G01) s G01 s r G01 G28/30/30.1 G29 Reference position or floating reference position s (b) For return by G00 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O
Page 369B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (3) G28, G30, or G30.1, specified in offset mode (with movement to a reference position not performed) (a) For return by G29 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 Oxxxx; [Type A] G91G41_ _ _; Return position (G42G01) s s G01 r G28/30/30.1 r G28X40
Page 37014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (4) G28, G30, or G30.1 specified in offset mode (with no movement performed) (a) For return by G29 When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] G28/30/30.1/G29 Intersection vector G28X0Y0; (G41G01) r G29X0Y0; s G01 G01 Refere
Page 371B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] G28/30/30.1 (G41G01) r s G00 Reference position or floating G01 reference position =Intermediateposition WARNING 1 When a G28, G30, or G30.1 command is specified during all–axis machine lock, a per
Page 37214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 When a G28, G30, or G30.1 command specifies an axis that is not in the cutter compensation C plane, a perpendicular vector is generated at the end point of the previous block, and the tool does not move. In the next block, offset mode is auto
Page 373B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D G29 command in cutter When G29 is specified in cutter compensation C mode, an operation of compensation C mode FS15 type is performed if CCN (bit 2 of parameter No. 5003) is set to 1. This means that an intersection vector is generated in the prev
Page 37414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] Return position s G01 (G42G01) G29X40.Y40.; Intermediate r position s G29 s Start–up r [
Page 375B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=1 [FS15 Type] Return position (G42G01) s s G01 G28/30/30.1 G29 s Reference position or floating r referenceposition=Intermedi- ate position (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic refer
Page 37614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (3) G29 specified in offset mode (with movement to a reference position not performed) (a) For specification made immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] Intermediate
Page 377B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic reference position return O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] (G42G01) s s G01 G29X0Y0; r G29 G01 s Intermediateposition =Return position [Type B] (G42G01) s s G01 G29 G01 s Intermediateposi
Page 37814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (4) G29 specified in offset mode (with movement to an intermediate position and reference position not performed) (a) For specification made immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_
Page 379B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (b) For specification made other than immediately after automatic reference position return When CCN (bit 2 of parameter No.5003)=0 O××××; G91G41_ _ _; [Type A] G29 s G29X0Y0; G01 (G41G01) r G01 s Intermediate position=return position [Type B] G29 s
Page 38014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.6.9 By specifying G39 in offset mode during cutter compensation C, corner Corner Circular circular interpolation can be performed. The radius of the corner circular interpolation equals the compensation value. Interpolation (G39) Format In offset
Page 381B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Examples D G39 without I, J, or K . . X axis . . (In offset mode) N1 Y10.0 ; N2 G39 ; Y axis N3 X-10.0 ; . . . . Block N1 Offset vector Block N2 (0.0, 10.0) Block N3 Programmed path Tool center path (-10.0, 10.0) D G39 with I, J, and K . . X axis .
Page 38214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.7 In cutter compensation C, two–dimensional offsetting is performed for a selected plane. In three–dimensional tool compensation, the tool can be THREE– shifted three–dimensionally when a three–dimensional offset direction is DIMENSIONAL TOOL pro
Page 383B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Explanations D Three–dimensional tool In three–dimensional tool compensation mode, the following three compensation vector –dimensional compensation vector is generated at the end of each block: Programmed path Path after three–dimensional tool comp
Page 38414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Specifying I, J, and K Addresses I, J, and K must all be specified to start three–dimensional tool compensation. When even one of the three addresses is omitted, two–dimensional cutter compensation C is activated. When a block specified in three–d
Page 385B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Commands that clear the When one of the following G codes is specified in three–dimensional tool vector compensation mode, the vector is cleared: G73 Peck drilling cycle G74 Reverse tapping cycle G76 Fine boring G80 Canned cycle cancel G81 Drill c
Page 38614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.8 Tool compensation values include tool geometry compensation values and tool wear compensation (Fig. 14.8 (a)). TOOL COMPENSATION VALUES, NUMBER ÇÇ Reference position OF COMPENSATION VALUES, AND ÇÇ OFSG ÇÇ ÇÇ ENTERING VALUES FROM THE OFSW OFSG:G
Page 387B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool compensation Tool compensation memory A, B, or C can be used. memory and the tool The tool compensation memory determines the tool compensation values compensation value to that are entered (set) (Table 14.8 (b)). be entered Table 14.8 (b) Se
Page 38814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.9 A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling). The dimensions specified with X_, Y_, and Z_ can each be scaled up or SCALING down with the same or different rates of magnification. (G50, G51) The magnification rate can be specified
Page 389B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Explanations D Scaling up or down Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001 It is along all axes at the depended on parameter SCR (No. 5400#7) which value is selected. Then, same rate of set parameter SCLx (No.5401#0) to en
Page 39014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Scaling of circular Even if different magnifications are applie to each axis in circular interpolation interpolation, the tool will not trace an ellipse. When different magnifications are applied to axes and a circular interpolation is specified w
Page 391B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Tool compensation This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool length offset values, and tool offset values (Fig. 14.9 (e) ). Programmed figure Scaled figure Cutter compensation values are not scaled. Fig. 14.9 (e) Scaling du
Page 39214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling. 2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the following!results: (1)Circular command Direction of rotation is reversed. (2)Cutter compensation C .
Page 393B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.10 A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function it becomes possible, for example, to modify a program using a rotation command COORDINATE when a workpiece has been placed with some angle rotated from the SYSTEM ROTATION programmed po
Page 39414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 X Angle of rotation R (incremental value) Center of Angle of rotation (absolute value) rotation (α, β) Z Fig. 14.10 (b) Coordinate system rotation NOTE When a decimal fraction is used to specify angular displacement (R_), the 1’s digit corresponds t
Page 395B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Limitations D Commands related to In coordinate system rotation mode, G codes related to reference position reference position return return (G27, G28, G29, G30, etc.) and those for changing the coordinate and the coordinate system (G52 to G59, G92,
Page 39614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples D Cutter compensation C and coordinate system rotation It is possible to specify G68 and G69 in cutter compensation C mode. The rotation plane must coincide with the plane of cutter compensa- tion C. N1 G92 X0 Y0 G69 G01 ; N2 G42 G90 X1000
Page 397B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 2. When the system is in cutter compensation model C, specify the commands in the following order (Fig.14.10(e)) : (cutter compensation C cancel) G51 ; scaling mode start G68 ; coordinate system rotation start : G41 ; cutter compensation C mode star
Page 39814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Repetitive commands for It is possible to store one program as a subprogram and recall subprogram coordinate system by changing the angle. rotation Sample program for when the RIN bit (bit 0 of parameter 5400) is set to 1. The specified angular di
Page 399B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION 14.11 When a tool with a rotation axis (C–axis) is moved in the XY plane during cutting, the normal direction control function can control the tool so that NORMAL DIRECTION the C–axis is always perpendicular to the tool path (Fig. 14.11 (a)). CONTRO
Page 40014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Cutter center path Cutter center path Programmed path Center of the arc Programmed path Fig. 14.11 (b) Normal direction control left (G41.1) Fig. 14.11 (c) Normal direction control right (G42.1) Explanations D Angle of the C axis When viewed from th
Page 401B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Cutter center path S N1 S : Single block stop point Programmed path N2 S N3 S Fig. 14.11 (e) Point at which a Single–Block Stop Occurs in the Normal Direction Control Mode Before circular interpolation is started, the C–axis is rotated so that the C
Page 40214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D C axis feedrate Movement of the tool inserted at the beginning of each block is executed at the feedrate set in parameter 5481. If dry run mode is on at that time, the dry run feedrate is applied. If the tool is to be moved along the X–and Y–axes
Page 403B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Movement for which arc Specify the maximum distance for which machining is performed with insertion is ignored the same normal direction as that of the preceding block. D Linear movement When distance N2, shown below, is smaller than the set value
Page 40414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.12 A mirror image of a programmed command can be produced with respect to a programmed axis of symmetry (Fig. 14.12 (a)). PROGRAMMABLE MIRROR IMAGE Y Axis of symmetry (X=50) (G50.1, G51.1) (2) (1) 100 60 Axis of symmetry 50 (Y=50) 40 0 (3) (4) 0
Page 405B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Explanations D Mirror image by setting If the programmable mirror image function is specified when the command for producing a mirror image is also selected by a CNC external switch or CNC setting (see III–4.9), the programmable mirror image functio
Page 40614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.13 The grinding wheel compensation function creates a compensation vector by extending the line between the specified compensation center and the GRINDING WHEEL specified end point, on the specified compensation plane. WEAR COMPENSATION Compensat
Page 407B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION D Compensation vector A compensation vector is created by extending the line between the compensation center and the specified end point. The length of the compensation vector equals to the offset value corresponding to the offset number specified w
Page 40814. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Circular and helical Grinding wheel wear compensation can also be applied to circular interpolation interpolation and helical interpolation. If the radius at the start point differs from that at the end point, the figure does not become an arc; it
Page 409B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION (Example 1) When the compensation axes are the Y– and Z–axes and linear interpolation is performed for the X– and Y–axes Programmed path: a → b, compensated path: a’ → b’ + a’ Vay + Vay a’ Y Y Vb a a Va Vaz b’ Compensation Vby center Vby b’ b b Vbz
Page 41014. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 14.14 The rotary table dynamic fixture offset function saves the operator the trouble of re–setting the workpiece coordinate system when the rotary ROTARY TABLE table rotates before cutting is started. With this function the operator DYNAMIC FIXTURE
Page 411B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Explanations D When a move command When a command to move the tool about a rotation axis involved with a is specified for a rotation fixture offset is specified in the G54.2 mode, the coordinates about the axis in G54.2 mode rotation axis at the end
Page 41214. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Y F X W C W: Workpiece origin offset value F: Fixture offset corresponding to the reference angle Set the data on the fixture offset screen (See III–11.4). Eight groups of data items can be specified. (3) Setting a parameter for enabling or disablin
Page 413B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION NOTE The programmable data input function (G10) is required. (2) Reading and writing the data by a system variable of a custom macro System variable number = 5500 + 20:n + m The following system variable number can be used to read and write the refe
Page 41414. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Calculating the Fixture Offset (1) Relationship between the rotation axis and linear axes First group : 5(B–axis), 1(X–axis) , 3(Z–axis) Second group : 4(A–axis) , 3(Z–axis) , 2(Y–axis) Third group : 0, 0, 0 (2) Reference angle and reference fixtu
Page 415B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Limitation D When data is modified in In the G54.2 mode, a change made to the setting of parameter No. 7580 G54.2 mode to 7588 or to the reference fixture offset becomes effective when the next G54.2Pn is specified. D Movement due to a It depends on
Page 41614. COMPENSATION FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Example Parameter Parameter 7580=4 (C–axis) Parameter 7581=1 (X–axis) Parameter 7582=2 (Y–axis) Parameter 7583 to 7588=0 Parameter 7575#0(X)=1 (The offset is valid for the X–axis.) 7575#0(Y)=1 (The offset is valid for the Y–axis.) 7570#0=0 (When bit
Page 417B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 14. COMPENSATION FUNCTION Y C C=90_ N4 C=180k N5 N3 N2 [N3] X Zero POINT of the machine coordinate system Fig.14.14 (b) Example of fixture offset When G54.2 P1 is specified in the N2 block, the fixture offset vector (0, 10.0) is calculated. The vector is handled in the same
Page 41815. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15 CUSTOM MACRO Although subprograms are useful for repeating the same operation, the custom macro function also allows use of variables, arithmetic and logic operations, and conditional branches for easy development of general programs such as pocketing and
Page 419B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.1 An ordinary machining program specifies a G code and the travel distance directly with a numeric value; examples are G100 and X100.0. VARIABLES With a custom macro, numeric values can be specified directly or using a variable number. When a variable num
Page 42015. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Range of variable values Local and common variables can have value 0 or a value in the following ranges : –1047 to –10–29 0 10–29 to 1047 If the result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an P/S alarm No. 111 is issued. D Omission of the decimal When a
Page 421B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO (b) Operation < vacant > is the same as 0 except when replaced by < vacant> When #1 = < vacant > When #1 = 0 #2 = #1 #2 = #1 # # #2 = < vacant > #2 = 0 #2 = #1*5 #2 = #1*5 # # #2 = 0 #2 = 0 #2 = #1+#1 #2 = #1 + #1 # # #2 = 0 #2 = 0 (c) Conditional expression
Page 42215. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D The mark ******** indicates an overflow (when the absolute value of a variable is greater than 99999999) or an underflow (when the absolute value of a variable is less than 0.0000001). Limitations Program numbers, sequence numbers, and optional block skip
Page 423B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.2 System variables can be used to read and write internal NC data such as tool compensation values and current position data. Note, however, that SYSTEM VARIABLES some system variables can only be read. System variables are essential for automation and ge
Page 42415. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Table 15.2 (d) System variables for tool compensation memory C Cutter compensation Tool length compensation (H) (D) Compensation number Geomet- Wear Geometric Wear ric com- com- compensation compensation pensation pensation 1 #11001(#2201) #10001(#2001) #130
Page 425B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Time information Time information can be read and written. Table 15.2 (f) System variables for time information Variable Function number #3001 This variable functions as a timer that counts in 1–millisecond increments at all times. When the power is turned
Page 42615. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Table 15.2 (h) System variable (#3004) for automatic operation control #3004 Feed hold Feedrate Override Exact stop 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled 1 Disabled Enabled Enabled 2 Enabled Disabled Enabled 3 Disabled Disabled Enabled 4 Enabled Enabled Disabled 5 Disab
Page 427B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Settings Settings can be read and written. Binary values are converted to decimals. #3005 #15 #14 #13 #12 #11 #10 #9 #8 Setting FCV #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Setting SEQ INI ISO TVC #9 (FCV) : Whether to use the FS15 tape format conversion capability #5 (SEQ
Page 42815. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Number of machined The number (target number) of parts required and the number (completion parts number) of machined parts can be read and written. Table 15.2(i) System variables for the number of parts required and the number of machined parts Variable nu
Page 429B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Current position Position information cannot be written but can be read. Table 15.2 (k) System variables for position information Read Tool com- Variable Position Coordinate operation pensation number information system during value movement #5001–#5008 Bl
Page 43015. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Workpiece coordinate Workpiece zero point offset values can be read and written. system compensation Table 15.2 (l) System variables for workpiece zero point offset values values (workpiece zero point offset values) Variable Function number #5201 First–axi
Page 431B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO The following variables can also be used: Axis Function Variable number First axis External workpiece zero point offset #2500 #5201 G54 workpiece zero point offset #2501 #5221 G55 workpiece zero point offset #2502 #5241 G56 workpiece zero point offset #2503
Page 43215. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.3 The operations listed in Table 15.3(a) can be performed on variables. The expression to the right of the operator can contain constants and/or ARITHMETIC AND variables combined by a function or operator. Variables #j and #K in an LOGIC OPERATION express
Page 433B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D ARCTAN #i = S Specify the lengths of two sides, separated by a slash (/). ATAN[#j]/[#k]; S The solution ranges are as follows: When the NAT bit (bit 0 of parameter 6004) is set to 0: 0o to 360_ [Example] When #1 = ATAN[–1]/[–1]; is specified, #1 is 225.0.
Page 43415. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Rounding up and down With CNC, when the absolute value of the integer produced by an to an integer operation on a number is greater than the absolute value of the original number, such an operation is referred to as rounding up to an integer. Conversely, w
Page 435B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Limitations D Brackets Brackets ([, ]) are used to enclose an expression. Note that parentheses are used for comments. D Operation error Errors may occur when operations are performed. Table 15.3 (b) Errors involved in operations Average Maximum Operation Ty
Page 43615. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 S Also be aware of errors that can result from conditional expressions using EQ, NE, GE, GT, LE, and LT. Example: IF[#1 EQ #2] is effected by errors in both #1 and #2, possibly resulting in an incorrect decision. Therefore, instead find the difference betwee
Page 437B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.4 The following blocks are referred to as macro statements: S Blocks containing an arithmetic or logic operation (=) MACRO S Blocks containing a control statement (such as GOTO, DO, END) STATEMENTS AND S Blocks containing a macro call command (such as mac
Page 43815. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.5 In a program, the flow of control can be changed using the GOTO statement and IF statement. Three types of branch and repetition BRANCH AND operations are used: REPETITION Branch and repetition GOTO statement (unconditional branch) IF statement (conditi
Page 439B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Operators Operators each consist of two letters and are used to compare two values to determine whether they are equal or one value is smaller or greater than the other value. Note that the inequality sign cannot be used. Table 15.5.2 Operators Operator Me
Page 44015. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Nesting The identification numbers (1 to 3) in a DO–END loop can be used as many times as desired. Note, however, when a program includes crossing repetition loops (overlapped DO ranges), P/S alarm No. 124 occurs. 1. The identification numbers 3. DO loops
Page 441B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Sample program The sample program below finds the total of numbers 1 to 10. O0001; #1=0; #2=1; WHILE[#2 LE 10]DO 1; #1=#1+#2; #2=#2+1; END 1; M30; 415
Page 44215. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.6 A macro program can be called using the following methods: MACRO CALL Macro call Simple call (G65) modal call (G66, G67) Macro call with G code Macro call with M code Subprogram call with M code Subprogram call with T code Limitations D Differences betw
Page 443B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.6.1 When G65 is specified, the custom macro specified at address P is called. Simple Call (G65) Data (argument) can be passed to the custom macro program. G65 P p L ȏ ; P : Number of the program to call ȏ : Repetition count (1 by
Page 44415. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Argument specification II Argument specification II uses A, B, and C once each and uses I, J, and K up to ten times. Argument specification II is used to pass values such as three–dimensional coordinates as arguments. Address Variable Address Variable Addres
Page 445B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Local variable levels S Local variables from level 0 to 4 are provided for nesting. S The level of the main program is 0. S Each time a macro is called (with G65 or G66), the local variable level is incremented by one. The values of the local variables at
Page 44615. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Sample program A macro is created which drills H holes at intervals of B degrees after a (bolt hole circle) start angle of A degrees along the periphery of a circle with radius I. The center of the circle is (X,Y). Commands can be specified in either the abs
Page 447B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Macro program O9100; (called program) #3=#4003; Stores G code of group 3. G81 Z#26 R#18 F#9 K0; (Note) Drilling cycle. Note: L0 can also be used. IF[#3 EQ 90]GOTO 1; . . . . . . . . Branches to N1 in the G90 mode. #24=#5001+#24; . . . . . . . . . . . . . C
Page 44815. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Call S After G66, specify at address P a program number subject to a modal call. S When a number of repetitions is required, a number from 1 to 9999 can be specified at address L. S As with a simple call (G65), data passed to a macro program i
Page 449B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Calling format G65 P9110 X x Y y Z z R r F f L l ; X: X coordinate of the hole (absolute specification only) . . . . (#24) Y: Y coordinate of the hole (absolute specification only) . . . . (#25) Z: Coordinates of position Z (absolute specification only) .
Page 45015. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Correspondence between parameter Program number Parameter number numbers and program O9010 6050 numbers O9011 6051 O9012 6052 O9013 6053 O9014 6054 O9015 6055 O9016 6056 O9017 6057 O9018 6058 O9019 6059 D Repetition As with a simple call, a number of repet
Page 451B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Correspondence between parameter Program number Parameter number numbers and program O9020 6080 numbers O9021 6081 O9022 6082 O9023 6083 O9024 6084 O9025 6085 O9026 6086 O9027 6087 O9028 6088 O9029 6089 D Repetition As with a simple call, a number of repet
Page 45215. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Correspondence between parameter Program number Parameter number numbers and program numbers O9001 6071 O9002 6072 O9003 6073 O9004 6074 O9005 6075 O9006 6076 O9007 6077 O9008 6078 O9009 6079 D Repetition As with a simple call, a number of repetitions from
Page 453B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.6.7 By using the subprogram call function that uses M codes, the cumulative Sample Program usage time of each tool is measured. Conditions S The cumulative usage time of each of tools T01 to T05 is measured. No measurement is made for tools with numbers g
Page 45415. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Macro program O9001(M03); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro to start counting (program called) M01; IF[#4120 EQ 0]GOTO 9; . . . . . . . . . No tool specified IF[#4120 GT 5]GOTO 9; . . . . . . . . . Out–of–range tool number #3002=0; . . . . . . . . .
Page 455B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.7 For smooth machining, the CNC prereads the NC statement to be performed next. This operation is referred to as buffering. During AI PROCESSING contour control mode or AI nano contour control mode, the CNC prereads MACRO not only the next block but also
Page 45615. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Buffering the next block in other than cutter > N1 X100.0 ; N1 N4 compensation mode NC statement (G41, G42) (normally N2 #1=100 ; execution N3 #2=200 ; prereading one block) N4 Y200.0 ; N2 N3 : Macro statement execution N4 Buffer > : Block being executed j
Page 457B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D When the next block involves no movement in cutter compensation C > N1 G01 G41 X100.0 G100 Dd ; (G41, G42) mode N2 #1=100 ; > : Block being executed N3 Y100.0 ; j : Blocks read into the buffer N4 #2=200 ; N5 M08 ; N6 #3=300 ; N7 X200.0 ; : N1 N3 NC stateme
Page 45815. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Note (In case not to Read Number of Meaning command M code Write Variable preventing buffer- ing or G53 block.) Time information Read #3001,#3002 The data is read / writ- Write ten at buffering a mac- ro program. Read #3011,#3012 The data is read at bufferin
Page 459B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Example) O0001 O2000 N1 X10.Y10.; (Mxx ;) Specify preventing buffering M code or G53 N2 M98P2000; N100 #1=#5041;(Reading X axis current position) N3 Y200.0; N101 #2=#5042;(Reading Y axis current position) : : M99; In above case, the buffering of N2 block is
Page 46015. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.8 Custom macro programs are similar to subprograms. They can be registered and edited in the same way as subprograms. The storage REGISTERING capacity is determined by the total length of tape used to store both custom CUSTOM MACRO macros and subprograms.
Page 461B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO 15.9 LIMITATIONS D MDI operation The macro call command can be specified in MDI mode. During automatic operation, however, it is impossible to switch to the MDI mode for a macro program call. D Sequence number A custom macro program cannot be searched for a
Page 46215. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.10 In addition to the standard custom macro commands, the following macro commands are available. They are referred to as external output EXTERNAL OUTPUT commands. COMMANDS – BPRNT – DPRNT – POPEN – PCLOS These commands are provided to output variable val
Page 463B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO Example ) BPRNT [ C** X#100 [3] Y#101 [3] M#10 [0] ] Variable value #100=0.40956 #101=–1638.4 #10=12.34 LF 12 (0000000C) M –1638400(FFE70000) Y 410 (0000019A) X Space C D Data output command DPRNT DPRNT [ a #b [cd] …] Number of significant decimal places Num
Page 46415. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Example ) DPRNT [ X#2 [53] Y#5 [53] T#30 [20] ] Variable value #2=128.47398 #5=–91.2 #30=123.456 (1) Parameter PRT(No.6001#1)=0 LF T sp 23 Y – sp sp sp 91200 X sp sp sp 128474 (2) Parameter PRT(No.6001#1)=0 LF T23 Y–91.200 X128.474 D Close command PCLOS PCLO
Page 465B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO NOTE 1 It is not necessary to always specify the open command (POPEN), data output command (BPRNT, DPRNT), and close command (PCLOS) together. Once an open command is specified at the beginning of a program, it does not need to be specified again except afte
Page 46615. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.11 When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT) from the machine. This function is INTERRUPTION TYPE referred to as an interruption type custom macro function. Program an CUSTOM MACRO interrupt co
Page 467B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO CAUTION When the interrupt signal (UINT, marked by * in Fig. 15.11) is input after M97 is specified, it is ignored. And, the interrupt signal must not be input during execution of the interrupt program. 15.11.1 Specification Method Explanations D Interrupt c
Page 46815. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15.11.2 Details of Functions Explanations D Subprogram–type There are two types of custom macro interrupts: Subprogram–type interrupt and macro–type interrupts and macro–type interrupts. The interrupt type used is selected interrupt by MSB (bit 5 of paramete
Page 469B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO (iii) If there are no NC statements in the interrupt program, control is returned to the interrupted program by M99, then the program is restarted from the command in the interrupted block. Interrupted by macro interrupt ÉÉÉÉ Execution in ÉÉÉÉ progress Norma
Page 47015. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Conditions for enabling The interrupt signal becomes valid after execution starts of a block that and disabling the custom contains M96 for enabling custom macro interrupts. The signal becomes macro interrupt signal invalid when execution starts of a block
Page 471B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Custom macro interrupt There are two schemes for custom macro interrupt signal (UINT) input: signal (UINT) The status–triggered scheme and edge– triggered scheme. When the status–triggered scheme is used, the signal is valid when it is on. When the edge tr
Page 47215. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Return from a custom To return control from a custom macro interrupt to the interrupted macro interrupt program, specify M99. A sequence number in the interrupted program can also be specified using address P. If this is specified, the program is searched
Page 473B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO NOTE When an M99 block consists only of address O, N, P, L, or M, this block is regarded as belonging to the previous block in the program. Therefore, a single–block stop does not occur for this block. In terms of programming, the following and are basic
Page 47415. CUSTOM MACRO PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (2) After control is returned to the interrupted program, modal information is specified again as necessary. O∆∆∆∆ M96Pxxx Oxxx; Interrupt signal (UINT) Modify modal information (Without P specification) Modal information remains M99(Pffff); unchanged before
Page 475B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 15. CUSTOM MACRO D Custom macro interrupt When the interrupt signal (UINT) is input and an interrupt program is and custom macro called, the custom macro modal call is canceled (G67). However, when modal call G66 is specified in the interrupt program, the custom macro modal
Page 47616. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 16 PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION This function enables users to perform programming simply by extracting numeric data (pattern data) from a drawing and specifying the numerical values from the MDI panel. This eliminates the need for programming
Page 47716. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 16.1 Pressing the OFFSET SETTING key and [MENU] is displayed on the following DISPLAYING THE pattern menu screen. PATTERN MENU MENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000 1. TAPPING 2. DRILLING 3. BORING 4. POCKET 5. BOLT HOLE 6. LINE ANGLE 7. GRID 8. PE
Page 47816. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Macro commands Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10 C11 C12 specifying the menu C1,C2, ,C12 : Characters in the menu title (12 characters) title Macro instruction G65 H90 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk : H90:Specifies the menu title p : Assume a1 a
Page 47916. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION D Macro instruction Pattern name: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10 describing the pattern C1, C2, ,C10: Characters in the pattern name (10 characters) name Macro instruction G65 H91 Pn Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H91: Specifies the menu title n : Specifies
Page 48016. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Example Custom macros for the menu title and hole pattern names. MENU : HOLE PATTERN O0000 N00000 1. TAPPING 2. DRILLING 3. BORING 4. POCKET 5. BOLT HOLE 6. LINE ANGLE 7. GRID 8. PECK 9. TEST PATRN 10. BACK > _ MDI **** *** *** 16:05:59 [ MACR
Page 48116. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 16.2 When a pattern menu is selected, the necessary pattern data is displayed. PATTERN DATA DISPLAY VAR. : BOLT HOLE O0001 N00000 NO. NAME DATA COMMENT 500 TOOL 0.000 501 STANDARD X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE 502 STANDARD Y 0.000 CIRCLE* 503 RADIUS 0.00
Page 48216. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Macro instruction Menu title : C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9C10C11C12 specifying the pattern C1 ,C2, , C12 : Characters in the menu title (12 characters) … data title Macro instruction (the menu title) G65 H92 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H92 : Specifies
Page 48316. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION D Macro instruction to One comment line: C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 describe a comment C1, C2,…, C12 : Character string in one comment line (12 characters) Macro instruction G65 H94 Pp Qq Rr Ii Jj Kk ; H94 : Specifies the comment p
Page 48416. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples Macro instruction to describe a parameter title , the variable name, and a comment. VAR. : BOLT HOLE O0001 N00000 NO. NAME DATA COMMENT 500 TOOL 0.000 501 STANDARD X 0.000 *BOLT HOLE 502 STANDARD Y 0.000 CIRCLE* 503 RADIUS 0.000 SET P
Page 48516. PATTERN DATA INPUT B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 16.3 CHARACTERS AND CODES TO BE USED FOR THE PATTERN DATA INPUT Table. 16.3 (a) Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input function FUNCTION Char- Char- Code Comment Code Comment acter acter A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056
Page 48616. PATTERN DATA INPUT FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Table 16.3 (b) Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input function Subprogram No. Function O9500 Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu. O9501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data correspondin
Page 48717. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING ENTRY (G10) 17 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10) General The values of parameters can be entered in a lprogram. This function is used for setting pitch error compensation data when attachments are changed or the maximum cutting feedrate or cutting
Page 48817. PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER ENTRY (G10) PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples 1. Set bit 2 (SBP) of bit type parameter No. 3404 G10L50 ; Parameter entry mode N3404 R 00000100 ; SBP setting G11 ; cancel parameter entry mode 2. Change the values for the Z–axis (3rd axis) and A–axis (4th axis) in axis type
Page 48918. MEMORY OPERATION USING B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FS15 TAPE FORMAT 18 MEMORY OPERATION USING FS15 TAPE FORMAT General Memory operation of the program registered by FS15 tape format is possible with setting of the setting parameter (No. 0001#1). Explanations Data formats for cutter compensation, su
Page 49019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19 HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 464
Page 491B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.1 HIGH–SPEED CYCLE CUTTING General This function can convert the machining profile to a data group that can be distributed as pulses at high–speed by the macro compiler and macro executor. The function can also call and execute the data gr
Page 49219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Alarms Alarm Descriptions number 115 The contents of the header are invalid. This alarm is issued in the following cases. 1. The header corresponding to the number of the specified call machining cycle was not found. 2. A cycle connection dat
Page 493B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.2 When an arc is cut at a high speed in circular interpolation, a radial error exists between the actual tool path and the programmed arc. An FEEDRATE approximation of this error can be obtained from the following CLAMPING BY ARC expressio
Page 49419. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.3 A remote buffer can continuously supply a large amount of data to the CNC at high speeds when connected to the host computer or input/output HIGH–SPEED equipment via a serial interface. REMOTE BUFFER RS–232–C / RS–422 Host Remote compute
Page 495B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Format VBinary input operation enabled : G05; VBinary input operation disabled : The travel distance along all axes are set to zero. VData format for binary input operation Byte High byte 1st axis Data Low byte sequence High byte 2nd axis Low
Page 49619. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 * * * * * * * 0 * * * * * * * 0 Example: When the travel distance is 700 µm per unit time (millimeter machine with increment system IS–B) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Page 497B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.3.2 High–speed remote buffer A uses binary data. On the other hand, High–Speed Remote high–speed remote buffer B can directly use NC language coded with equipment such as an automatic programming unit to perform high–speed Buffer B (G05) m
Page 49819. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.4 During high–speed machining, the distribution processing status is monitored. When distribution processing terminates, P/S alarm No. 000 DISTRIBUTION and P/S alarm No. 179 are issued upon completion of the high–speed PROCESSING machining
Page 499B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS 19.5 The high–speed linear interpolation function processes a move command related to a controlled axis not by ordinary linear interpolation but by HIGH–SPEED high–speed linear interpolation. The function enables the high–speed LINEAR executi
Page 50019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (Maximum feedrate) = 8 122,848 (IS–B, metric input) (interpolation period) Minimum Interpolation period: Interpolation period: feedrate 8 msec 4 msec (IS–B, metric input) 4 mm/min 8 mm/min (IS–B, inch input) 0.38 inch/min 0.76 inch/mim (IS–C,
Page 501B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Single–block operation Single–block operation is disabled in high–speed linear interpolation mode. : G05 P2 ; X10 Z20 F1000 ; : : Handled as a single block : Y30 ; G05 P0 ; : D Feed hold Feed hold is disabled in high–speed linear interpolat
Page 50219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.6 This function is designed for high–speed precise machining. With this function, the delay due to acceleration/deceleration and the delay in the ADVANCED servo system which increase as the feedrate becomes higher can be PREVIEW CONTROL su
Page 503B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS ⋅ Inverse time feed ⋅ High–precision contour control ⋅ Axis control by the PMC (Bits 4 (G8R) and 3 (G8C) of parameter No. 8004 can be set to also use this function in the look–ahead control mode.) ⋅ Single direction positioning ⋅ Polar coordi
Page 50419. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.7 AI CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION/AI NANO CONTOUR CONTROL FUNCTION Overview The AI contour control/AI nano contour control function is provided for high–speed, high–precision machining. This function enables suppression of acceleration/deceler
Page 505B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Functions valid in the AI The functions listed below are valid in the AI contour control/AI nano contour control/AI nano contour control mode: contour control mode ⋅ Nano–interpolation (only in the AI nano contour control mode) ⋅ Look–ahead
Page 50619. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Linear accelera- tion/deceleration before interpolation Specified Distribution feedrate pulse Acceleration/ Feedrate Interpolation deceleration Servo calculation calculation after control interpolation Linear interpolation, circular interpola
Page 507B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Look–ahead bell–shaped Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for cutting feed in acceleration/deceleration the AI contour control/AI nano contour control mode can be changed to before interpolation bell–shaped acceleration/d
Page 50819. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 When the feedrate is changed, deceleration and acceleration are performed as follows: For deceleration: Bell–shaped deceleration is started in the preceding block so that deceleration terminates by the beginning of the block in which the feed
Page 509B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS N1 G01 G91 X100. F1000 ; N2 Y100. ; N2 Tool path when deceleration is not performed at the corner Tool path when deceleration is performed at the corner N1 Feedrate When deceleration is not performed Feedrate along the X–axis F1000 at the cor
Page 51019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Feedrate clamping by When continuous minute straight lines form curves as shown in the acceleration example in the figure below, the feedrate difference for each axis at each corner is not so large. For this reason, deceleration according t
Page 511B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9 D Feedrate clamping by The maximum allowable feedrate v for an arc of radius r specified in a arc radius program is calculated using the arc radius R and maximum allowable feedrate V (setting of a parameter) for the radius a
Page 51219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Rapid traverse By setting the corresponding parameter, the linear or non–linear interpolation type can be selected. (In the AI nano contour control mode, the non–linear interpolation type cannot be selected.) When the linear interpolation t
Page 513B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Feedrate Linear acceleration/ deceleration Bell–shapedacceleration/ deceleration ta Depends on the linear acceleration. tb Time constant for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration tc Bell–shapedacceleration/ deceleration time tc = ta + tb ta t
Page 51419. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 If the feedrate during movement is F, the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration is A, the time constant for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration is T, the time required for acceleration/ deceleration can be obtained as follows: T
Page 515B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Involute interpolation During involute interpolation, the following overrides are applied to the (only in the AI contour specified cutting feedrate. By this function, a good cutting surface with control mode) higher machining precision can
Page 51619. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (2) Override near the base circle In a part near the base circle where the change in the curvature of the involute curve is relatively significant, cutting at the feedrate as specified in the program may put a heavy load on the cutter, result
Page 517B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS NOTE 1 When the override near the base circle is enabled, the override for inward offset in cutter compensation is disabled. These overrides cannot be enabled simultaneously. 2 When the distance from the center of the base circle to the start
Page 51819. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (3) Parameter related to feedrate clamping by acceleration Parameter number Ad- Parameter vanced AI Normal preview contour control Parameter for determining the allowable ac- None 1785 celeration (4) Parameters related to feedrate clamping by
Page 519B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Parameter number Ad- Parameter vanced AI Normal preview contour control Arc radius corresponding to the upper fee- 1731 drate limit * For AI nano–contour control, the rapid traverse movement type is not set with a parameter, but is always lin
Page 52019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 2) When the total distance of blocks read in advance reaches the distance for decelerating from the current feedrate, deceleration is started. When look–ahead operation proceeds and the total distance of blocks increases by termination of dec
Page 521B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Name Function Machine lock f When the machine lock signal for each axis (MLK1 to MLK8) is turned on or off, accelera- tion/deceleration is not applied to the axis for which machine lock is performed. Stroke check before movement Mirror image
Page 52219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Name Function Skip function (G31) f (*1) High–speed skip function (G31) f (*1) Continuous high–speed skip (G31) Multistage skip function (G31 Px) f (*1) Reference position return (G28) f (*1) To execute G28 in the status in which the refer- e
Page 523B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Name Function Inverse time feed (G93) f Override cancel f External deceleration f Look–ahead bell–shaped accel- f eration/deceleration before inter- polation High–precision contour control f (G05P10000) NURBS interpolation (G06.2) Program inp
Page 52419. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Name Function Three–dimensionalcoordinate conversion (G68) Programmable mirror image f (G51.1) Figure copy (G72.1, G72.2) Retrace F15 tape format f Auxiliary functions/spindle–speed functions f : Can be specified. : Cannot be specified. Name
Page 525B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Other functions f : Can be specified. : Cannot be specified. Name Function Cycle start/feed hold f Dry run f Single block f Sequence number comparison f and stop Program restart f For the time constant for acceleration/decelera- tion during m
Page 52619. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.8 Some machining errors are due to the CNC. Such errors include machining errors caused by acceleration/deceleration after interpolation. HIGH–PRECISION To eliminate these errors, the following functions are performed at high CONTOUR CONTR
Page 527B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS G73, G74, G76, G81 to G89 : Canned cycle, rigid tapping G80 : Canned cycle cancel G90 : Absolute command G91 : Incremental command Dxxx : Specifying a D code Fxxxxx : Specifying an F code Nxxxxx : Specifying a sequence number G05P10000 : Sett
Page 52819. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D When unspecifiable data In the HPCC mode, specifying unspecifiable data causes an alarm No. is specified 5000. To specify a program containing unspecifiable data, specify G05P0 to exit from the HPCC mode before specifying the program. < Sam
Page 529B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS S When the offset mode is canceled temporarily In the HPCC mode, automatic reference position return (G28) and automatic return from the reference position (G29) cannot be specified. Therefore, commands that must cancel the offset mode tempor
Page 53019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (2) When a block containing no movement operation is specified together with the cutter compensation cancel code (G40), a vector with a length equal to the offset value is created in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the
Page 531B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Positioning and auxiliary When bit 1 of parameter MSU No. 8403 is set to 1, G00, M, S, T, and B functions codes can be specified even in HPCC mode. When specifying these codes in HPCC mode, note the following: (1) When a G00, M, S, T, or B
Page 53219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (2) When G00 is specified with bit 7 of parameter SG0 No. 8403 set to 1, the following points should be noted: ⋅Since the G00 command is replaced by the G01 command, the tool moves at the feedrate set in parameter No. 8481 even when data is s
Page 533B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Limitations D Modes that can be Before G05P10000 can be specified, the following modal values must be specified set. If they are not set, the P/S alarm No. 5012 is issued. G code Meaning G13.1 Cancels polar coordinate interpolation. G15 Cance
Page 53419. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.9 LOOK–AHEAD BELL–SHAPED ACCELERATION/DEC ELERATION BEFORE INTERPOLATION TIME CONSTANT CHANGE FUNCTION General In Look–ahead bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation, the speed during acceleration/deceleration is as shown
Page 535B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching specified acceleration/deceleration Speed Specified speed Time T1 T1 T2 Fig.19.9 (b) If linear acceleration/deceleration not reaching the specified acceleration occurs in AI contour control (AICC)
Page 53619. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Speed Non–linear acceleration/deceleration Specified speed Time T1’ T2’ T2’ Fig.19.9 (c) Description D Methods of specifying the The acceleration/deceleration reference speed is the feedrate used as the acceleration/deceleration reference for
Page 537B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (1) Specifying the speed If an F command is used in a G05.1 Q1 (AICC or AI nanoCC) block or in a G05.1 Q1 block or G05 P10000 (AI–HPCC or AI–nanoHPCC) block, the speed specified G05 P10000 block with the F command is assumed the acceleration/
Page 53819. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (3) Using the speed The speed specified with the F command issued when a cutting block specified with the F group (such as G01 and G02) starts is assumed the command issued at acceleration/deceleration reference speed, the start of cutting as
Page 539B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (2) A proper acceleration is determined under the condition that the acceleration change must be about the same as the setting so that parameter changes do not cause considerable shock to the machine, that is: Acceleration after change Accele
Page 54019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 19.10 OPTIMUM TORQUE ACCELERATION/DEC ELERATION General This function enables acceleration/deceleration in accordance with the torque characteristics of the motor and the characteristics of the machines due to its friction and gravity and per
Page 541B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Speed Acceleration Deceleration and and Time + move + move Acceleration Deceleration and and Acceleration – move – move Time Acc/Dec pattern can be changed in each condition. Fig.19.10 (b) Acceleration/deceleration with this function Descript
Page 54219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Table. 19.10 (a) Optimum torque acceleration/deceleration FAP FRP Reference Bell–shaped Acceleration 19540#0 19501#5 accelera– acceleration pattern tion change time 1 1 No.1420 No.1774 See “Setting ac- Before– & celeration pat- interpolation
Page 543B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Set the speed and the acceleration at each of the acceleration setting points P0 to P5 for each condition, plus movement and acceleration, plus movement and deceleration, minus movement and acceleration, minus movement and deceleration, and f
Page 54419. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Example of setting In this example, the machine is equipped with the aM30/4000i?. acceleration pattern data Motor speed at rapid traverse is 3000 (min–1). 150 Torque(Nm) 100 50 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Speed(min-1) Fig.19.10 (d) Speed–torque
Page 545B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS Let the torque be x (Nm), the inertia be y(Kgm2), and the ball screw pitch p(mm), then the acceleration A is calculated as follows: x[N @ m] p x([kg @ mńsec 2][m]) p A+ [mm] + [mm] y[kg @ m ] 2p 2 y[kg @ m 2] 2p x p ĂĂ + [mmńsec 2] 2p y Machi
Page 54619. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Table. 19.10 (c) Example of setting parameters related to acceleration pattern (2/2) Parameter Setting Unit Remarks No. Accelera- 19546,19552 18712 0.01% At P1, 90(Nm) can be used for tion at P1 19558,19564 the acceleration/deceleration, so s
Page 547B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS D Examples of setting if From the effect of gravity and friction, torque for acceleration/deceleration the acceleration pattern is different on each condition, such as acceleration, deceleration or plus move differs depending on (up), minus m
Page 54819. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Parameter setting is as follows, Parameter Setting Unit Remarks No. Accel- 19545 14554 0.01 At P0, 70(Nm) can be used for eration at % the acceleration/deceleration, so P0 set the ratio 6002 (mm/sec2) to 4124 (mm/sec2). 1.4554 = 6002/4124 Acc
Page 549B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS P0 P1 150 Torque(Nm) P5 100 50 0 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Speed(min–1) Fig.19.10(i) Torque for Acc/Dec in case of + move and deceleration Parameter setting is as follows, Parameter Setting Unit Remarks No. Accel- 19557 27027 0.01 At P0, 130(Nm)
Page 55019. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (3) In case of minus move (down) and acceleration Because torque of Gravity works forward to the output torque of motor and torque of friction works against the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maxim
Page 551B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 19. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS (4) In case of minus move (down) and deceleration Because torque of Gravity works against the output torque of motor and torque of friction works forward to the output torque of motor, torque for acceleration/deceleration is as follows. Maxim
Page 55219. HIGH SPEED CUTTING FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 9000 P0 P1 8000 Acceleration (mm/sec2) 7000 6000 P5 5000 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 0 16000 32000 48000 Speed (mm/min) Fig.19.10(n) Acceleration pattern in case of – move and deceleration Limitations D Linear type positioning When Optimum torque a
Page 553B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20 AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 527
Page 55420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 20.1 It is possible to change the operating mode for two or more specified axes to either synchronous operation or normal operation by an input signal SIMPLE from the machine. SYNCHRONOUS Synchronous control can be performed for up to four pairs of
Page 555B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Normal operation This operating mode is used for machining different workpieces on each table. The operation is the same as in ordinary CNC control, where the movement of the master axis and slave axis is controlled by the independent axis addres
Page 55620. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Limitations D Setting a coordinate In synchronous axis control, commands that require no axis motion, such system as the workpiece coordinate system setup command (G92) and the local coordinate system setup command (G52), are set to the Y axis by p
Page 557B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.2 ROTARY AXIS ROLL–OVER 20.2.1 The roll–over function prevents coordinates for the rotation axis from Rotary Axis Roll–over overflowing. The roll–over function is enabled by setting bit 0 of parameter ROAx 1008 to 1. Explanations For an incremen
Page 55820. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 20.2.2 This function controls a rotary axis as specified by an absolute command. Rotary Axis Control With this function, the sign of the value specified in the command is interpreted as the direction of rotation, and the absolute value of the speci
Page 559B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.3 To replace the tool damaged during machining or to check the status of machining, the tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece. The tool can TOOL WITHDRAWAL then be advanced again to restart machining efficiently. AND RETURN (G10.6) The tool wit
Page 56020. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Retraction When the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator’s panel is turned on during automatic operation or in the automatic operation stop or hold state, the tool is retracted the length of the programmed retraction distance
Page 561B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Limitations D offset If the origin, presetting, or workpiece origin offset value (or External workpiece origin offset value) is changed after retraction is specified with G10.6 in absolute mode, the change is not reflected in the retraction positio
Page 56220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 20.4 When enough torque for driving a large table cannot be produced by only one motor, two motors can be used for movement along a single axis. TANDEM CONTROL Positioning is performed by the main motor only. The submotor is used only to produce to
Page 563B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.5 When the angular axis makes an angle other than 90° with the perpendicular axis, the angular axis control function controls the distance ANGULAR AXIS traveled along each axis according to the inclination angle. For the CONTROL/ ordinary angula
Page 56420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Absolute and relative An absolute and a relative position are indicated in the programmed position display Cartesian coordinate system. D Machine position display A machine position indication is provided in the machine coordinate system where an
Page 565B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.6 When contour grinding is performed, the chopping function can be used to grind the side face of a workpiece. By means of this function, while CHOPPING the grinding axis (the axis with the grinding wheel) is being moved FUNCTION vertically, a c
Page 56620. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 The chopping feedrate is clamped to the maximum chopping feedrate (set with parameter No. 8375) if the specified feedrate is greater than the maximum chopping feedrate. The feedrate can be overridden by 0% to 150% by applying the chopping feedrate
Page 567B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS (2) When the lower dead point is changed during movement from the upper dead point to the lower dead point Previous upper dead point New lower dead point Previous lower dead point The tool first moves to the previous lower dead point, then to the u
Page 56820. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Servo delay When high–speed chopping is performed with the grinding axis, a servo compensation function delay and acceleration/deceleration delay occur. These delays prevent the tool from actually reaching the specified position. The control unit
Page 569B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Mode switching during If the mode is changed during chopping, chopping does not stop. In chopping manual mode, the chopping axis cannot be moved manually. It can, however, be moved manually by means of the manual interrupt. D Reset during choppin
Page 57020. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Program restart When a program contains G codes for starting chopping (G81.1) and stopping chopping (G80), an attempt to restart that program results in a P/S 5050 alarm being output. When a program that does not include the chopping axis is rest
Page 571B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.7 Gears can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync with the rotation of the spindle (hob axis) connected to a hob. HOBBING MACHINE Also, a helical gear can be cut by turning the workpiece (C–axis) in sync FUNCTION (G80, G81) with the m
Page 57220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Releasing the Synchronization between the hob axis and C–axis can also be canceled synchronization status when: ⋅ The power is turned off. ⋅ An emergency stop or servo alarm occurs. ⋅ A reset (external reset signal, reset & rewind signal, or rese
Page 573B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Direction of helical gear 1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1 compensation (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z –Z –Z C: + C: + C: + C: + Z: + Z: + Z: – Z: – P: + P: – P: + P: – Compensation Compensation Compensation Compensatio
Page 57420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Setting the helical gear The Z–axis (axial feed axis) is usually the third axis. However, any axis axial feed axis can be set as the Z–axis by setting the corresponding parameter appropriately (parameter No. 7709). D C–axis servo delay The servo
Page 575B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS ⋅ Method in which compensation for the delay when a command is specified is performed (G82, G83) G82: Cancels C–axis servo delay compensation. G83: Executes C–axis servo delay compensation. (Example) G81 T__ L__ ; · · · Starts synchronization. M03
Page 57620. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 S In C–axis servo delay compensation (G83), compensation is not applied to the integer part of the gear pitch. The compensation direction is opposite to that of the C–axis rotation. D C–axis synchronous S C–axis handle interrupt shift During synchr
Page 577B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.8 In the same way as with the hobbing machine function, to machine (grind/cut) a gear, the rotation of the workpiece axis connected to a servo SIMPLE ELECTRIC motor is synchronized with the rotation of the tool axis (grinding GEAR BOX wheel/hob)
Page 57820. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Synchronization control 1 Start of synchronization When synchronization mode is set with G81, the synchronization switch of the EGB function is closed, and synchronization between the tool axis and workpiece axis starts. At this time
Page 579B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Helical gear When a helical gear is to be produced, the compensation of workpiece axis compensation rotation is needed according to the travel distance on the Z–axis (axial feed). Helical gear compensation is performed by adding compensation puls
Page 58020. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Direction of helical gear 1 When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No. 7700 = 1 compensation (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z –Z –Z C : + C : + C : + C : + Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : – P : + P : – P : + P : – Compensation Compensation Compensation
Page 581B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Coordinates in helical In helical compensation, the machine coordinates and absolute compensation coordinates of the workpiece axis (4th axis) are updated by the amount of helical compensation. D Retraction By turning on the retract signal RTRCT
Page 58220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples O1000 ; N0010 M19 ; Performs tool axis orientation. N0020 G28 G91 C0 ; Performs reference position return operation of the workpiece axis. N0030 G81 T20 L1 ; Starts synchronization between the tool axis and workpiece axis. (The workpiece a
Page 583B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Format G81 T_ L_ ; (EGB mode on) G31.8 G91 a0 P_ Q_ R_ ; (EGB skip command) a : EGB axis (Work axis) P : The top number of the consecutive custom macro variables in which the machine coordinate positions of the EGB axis (work axis) at the skip sign
Page 58420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 In the G31.8 block, only the EGB axis (work axis) should be commanded. When another axis is commanded, the P/S alarm (No.5068) will occur. 2 If P is not specified in the G31.8 block, the P/S alarm (No.5068) will occur. 3 If R is not specifie
Page 585B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 20.8.3 Spindle Electronic Gear Box General A gear can be shaped (grind/cut) by the synchronization of the workpiece axis rotation to the tool axis (grinding axis /hob) rotation by using two spindles as a tool axis and a workpiece axis. To synchroni
Page 58620. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 CNC 2nd spindle (Slave) ÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ Position feedback Velocity feedback ÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔ Ô ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔ – – + + Position + Built–in Work– Velocity ÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔ ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ Cs control motor & piece control (PI) command Position gain Det
Page 587B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS NOTE Specify G81 and G80 code only in a block. D Parameter setting The following parameters should be set for the Spindle EGB control. (1) Master axis number (Parameter No.7771) * Only Cs contour axis (2) Slave axis number (Parameter No.7710) (3) N
Page 58820. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Synchronization start command (G81) Synchronization mode Synchronization mode signal SYNMOD Tool axis rotation command Tool axis stop command Tool axis rotation speed Work piece axis rotation speed Synchronization cancel command (G80) Fig. 2
Page 589B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS N00100 G01 X_ F_ ; Makes movement on the X–axis(for retraction). N00110 Myy ; Stops the tool axis. N00120 G80 ; Cancels synchronization. N00130 M30 ; Helical gear When a helical gear is to be produced, the compensation of the workpiece compensation
Page 59020. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (1) When bit 2 (HDR) of parameter No.7700 is 1. (a) (b) (c) (d) +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C +Z +C –Z –Z –Z –Z C : + C : + C : + C : + Z : + Z : + Z : – Z : – P : + P : – P : + P : – Cmp. direc. : + Cmp. direc. : – Cmp. direc. : – Cmp. direc. : + (e) (f) (g)
Page 591B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Synchronous ratio The synchronous ratio of the Spindle EGB control is internally represented using a fraction. The fraction is calculated from T and L command in G81 block and the number of position detector pulses per rotation about the tool and
Page 59220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Position feedback 0 – 36000 Slave axis *CMR Cs command 0 (*1) Motor Workpiece Detector + + K2/K1 : Synchronous ratio EGB *K2/K1 36000 (*1/10) 360000 + – Master axis *CMR Motor Tool axis Detector Cs command 360000 (*1) 360000 Fig. 20.8.3 (d) Pulse d
Page 593B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS – Interlock – Feed hold – Machine lock 3) The EGB synchronization should be started and canceled at the stop of the master and the slave axis. It means that the tool axis (master axis) rotation should be started while the synchronization mode signa
Page 59420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Alarms Num- Message Contents ber 010 IMPROPER G–CODE Parameters for axis setting are not set cor- rectly regarding G81. (No.7710,7771,4352, or Cs axis setting). Confirm the parameter setting. 181 FORMAT ERROR IN G81 block format error G81 BLOCK 1)T
Page 595B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D Acceleration/deceleration type Spindle speed Synchronization Synchronization start command cancellation command Workpiece– axis speed Synchronization Acceleration state Deceleration D Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization
Page 59620. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Acceleration/deceleration plus automatic phase synchronization type G81 T_ L_ R2; Synchronization start G80 R2; Synchronization end T : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1–1000) L : Number of hob threads (range of valid settings: –21 to +
Page 597B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS 3. When G80R1 is specified, the EGB mode check signal is set to 0, and deceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter (No. 2135,2136 or No.4384,4385) is started immediately. When the speed is reduced to 0, the G80R1 block is t
Page 59820. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 2. Specify G81R2 to start synchronization. When G81R2 is specified, the workpiece axis is accelerated with the acceleration according to the acceleration rate set in the parameter (No.2135,2136 or No.4384,4385). When the synchronization speed is re
Page 599B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS CAUTION 1 In automatic phase synchronization, specify the speed in parameter No.7776 and the movement direction in parameter PHD, bit 7 of No. 7702. In phase synchronization, rapid–traverse linear acceleration/deceleration (with the time constant s
Page 60020. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Examples D Acceleration/deceleration type M03 ; Clockwise spindle rotation command G81 T_ L_ R1 ; Synchronization start command G00 X_ ; Positions the workpiece at the machining position. Machining in the synchronous state G00 X_ ; Retract the work
Page 601B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS D About the direction of The EGB automatic phase synchronization is made on the premise that the rotation (This item is the rotation of the slave axis is the same direction as the master axis. Refer for spindle EGB.) to the following chart. + Comma
Page 60220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 20.8.5 Electronic Gear Box 2 Pair General The Electronic Gear Box is a function for rotating a workpiece in sync with a rotating tool, or to move a tool in sync with a rotating workpiece. With this function, the high–precision machining of gears, t
Page 603B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS NOTE A sampling period of 1 ms is applied when feedback pulses are read from the master axis; the synchronization pulses for a slave axis are calculated according to synchronization coefficient K; and the pulses are specified for position control o
Page 60420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 A manual handle interruption can be issued to the slave axis or other axes during synchronization. 2 The maximum feedrates for the master axis and the slave axis are limited according to the position detectors used. 3 An inch/metric conversi
Page 605B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS G81 T_(L_)(Q_P_); T : Number of teeth (range of valid settings: 1 to 1000) L : Number of hob threads (range of valid settings: –21 to +21, excluding 0) The sign of L determines the direction of rotation for the workpiece axis. When L is positive, t
Page 60620. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Compensation angle + Z Q sin(P) 360 (In inch input) p T Where, Compensation angle : Absolute value with sign (degrees) Z : Amount of travel along the Z axis after a G81 command is issued (mm or inch) P : Twisted angle of the gear with sign (degrees
Page 607B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Examples (1) When the master axis is the spindle, and the slave axis is the C–axis 1. G81.5 T10 C0 L1 ; Synchronization between the master axis and C–axis is started at the ratio of one rotation about the C–axis to ten rotations about the master ax
Page 60820. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 O0100 ; ............... N01 Mxx ; Performs spindle orientation. N02 G00 G90 C... ; Positions the C–axis. Starts synchronization at the ratio of N03 G81.5 T10 C0 L1 ; one rotation about the C–axis to ten N04 Myy S300 spindle rotations. ;N05 Rotates
Page 609B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS O1234 ; ........... ........... N01 G81 T20 L1 ; Starts synchronization with the spindle and C–axis at the ratio of a 1/20 rotation about the C–axis to one spindle rotation. N02 Mxx S300 ; Rotates the spindle at 300 min–1. N03 X... F... ; Makes a m
Page 61020. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Example 1) Based on the controlled axis configuration described in Fig.20.8.5, suppose that the spindle and V–axis are as follows: Spindle pulse coder : 72000pulse/rev (4 pulses for one A/B phase cycle) C–axis least command increment : 0.001 degr
Page 611B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm is output. In this sample program, when T1 is specified for the master axis, the synchronization ratio (fraction) of the CMR of the C–axis to the denominator Kd can always be reduced to lowest
Page 61220. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Ps : (Amount of V–axis movement) CMR 254 B 100 → 10000 5 254 B 100 Kn + 10000 5 254 + 127 Kd 72000 100 72 Both Kn and Kd are within the allowable range. No alarm is output. (c) For a millimeter machine and inch input Command : G81.5 T1 V0.0013 ; Op
Page 613B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Ps : (Amount of C–axis movement) CMR → 3260 1 B 2 Kn + 3260 1 + 163 Kd 72000 2 7200 (a) causes an alarm to be output because the values cannot be abbreviated. (b) causes no alarm because the ratio of the travel distances can be abbreviated to a s
Page 61420. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 1004#7 Ten times minimum input increment 1001#0 Inch/metric switching (rotation axis/linear axis) 1006#1 Shape of machine coordinate system (rotation axis/linear axis) 1006#2 Shape of machine coordinate system for pitch error compensation (rotation
Page 615B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 20. AXIS CONTROL FUNCTIONS Alarms Num- Message Contents ber P/S 181 FORMAT ERROR IN Format error in the block in which EGB G81 BLOCK was specified (1) The axis during synchronization by EGB is specified by G81.5 again. (2) U–axis is specified by G81.5/G80.5 with U–axis contr
Page 61621. TWO–PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 21 TWO-PATH CONTROL FUNCTION 590
Page 61721. TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 21.1 The two–path control function is designed for use on a machining center where two systems are operated independently to simultaneously perform GENERAL cutting. D Controlling two path The operations of two path are programmed independently o
Page 61821. TWO–PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 21.2 WAITING FOR PATHS Explanations Control based on M codes is used to cause one path to wait for the other during machining. By specifying an M code in a machining program for each path, the two paths can wait for each other at a specified blo
Page 61921. TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION NOTE 1 An M code for waiting must always be specified in a single block. 2 If one path is waiting because of an M code for waiting specified, and a different M code for waiting is specified with the other path, an P/S alarm (No. 160) is raised,
Page 62021. TWO–PATH CONTROL FUNCTION PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 21.3 A machine with two paths have different custom macro common variables and tool compensation memory areas for path 1 and 2. Paths 1 MEMORY COMMON and 2 can share the custom macro common variables and tool TO PATH compensation memory areas pr
Page 62121. TWO–PATH CONTROL B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING FUNCTION 21.4 In a CNC supporting two–path control, specified machining programs can be copied between the two paths by setting bit 0 (PCP) of parameter COPYING A No. 3206 to 1. A copy operation can be performed by specifying either PROGRAM a single prog
Page 62222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 22 RISC PROCESSOR General The following functions are executed at high speed with RISC processor. D AI high precision contour control D AI NANO high precision contour control D Cylindrical interpolation cutting point control D Tool center point control D T
Page 623B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 5–axis control mode The state to execute the each function of AI high precision contour control, AI NANO high precision contour control, Tool center point control, Tool axis compensation in tool axis direction, 3–dimensional cutter compensation and 3–dimen
Page 62422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 S External operation function –G81 S Chopping function –G81.1 S Setting a workpiece coordinate system –G92 S Workpiece coordinate system preset –G92.1 S Feed per revolution –G95 S Constant surface speed control –G96,G97 S Infeed control –G160,G161 Restrict
Page 625B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR – MDI intervention Restriction –5 When the following function is used, the function which executed with RISC processor cannot be used. S Angular axis control S Arbitary angular axis control Restriction –6 The following modal G code are placed in the cleare
Page 62622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 The Function list which can be used Item Specifications Note Axis control Controlled axes 3 axes Controlled paths 1–path Simultaneously controlled axes 2 axes Controlled axis expansion Up to 8 axes Simultaneously controlled axis expan- Up to 6 axes sion Ax
Page 627B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Item Specifications Note Axis control Interlock All axes/each axis Machine lock All axes/each axis Emergency stop Stored stroke check 1 The stroke limit cannot be set by the stroke limit external setting signal in the AI high precision contour control mode
Page 62822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Interpolation functions Positioning G00 The AI high precision contour control function or AI nano high precision con- tour control functions except the ad- vanced preview feed–forward function , multi buffer function , and the nano
Page 629B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Item Specifications Note Feed functions Bell–type acceleration/deceleration of cutting feed after interpolation Feedrate override 0 to 254% (1% step) 2nd. Feedrate override 0 to 254% (1% step) F1 digit feed Using the manual pulse generator can not change F
Page 63022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Program input Programmable parameter input G10 The AI high precision contour control mode or the AI nano high precision contour control mode is automatically canceled once and the buffering is in- hibited if this function is used i
Page 631B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Item Specifications Note Miscellaneous/spindle functions Miscellaneous function The AI high precision contour control mode or the AI nano high precision contour control mode is automatically canceled once and the buffering is in- hibited if this function i
Page 63222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Tool functions 3–dimensional tool compensation G41.2,G42.2 The command which automatically G41.3 cancel AI high precision contour con- trol mode or AI nano high precision contour control mode can not be used. However M,S,T and B co
Page 633B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 22.1 AI HIGH PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL/ AI NANO HIGH PRECISION CONTOUR CONTROL General This function is designed to achieve high–speed, high–precision machining with a program involving a sequence of very small straight lines and NURBS curved lines, like t
Page 63422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (Acceleration change time constant type) (2) Deceleration function based on feedrate differences at corners (3) Advanced feed–forward fu
Page 635B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR D Example of acceleration Acceleration is performed so that the feedrate specified for a block is attained when the block is executed. Feedrate Programmed speed F3 Feedrate obtained by acceleration/ deceleration beforeinterpolation F2 F1 Time N1 N2 Look–ah
Page 63622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Method of determining Acceleration/deceleration is performed with the largest tangent the tangent acceleration acceleration/deceleration that does not exceed the acceleration set for each axis. (Example) X–axis permissible acceleration: 1000 mm/sec2 Y–ax
Page 637B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR D Deceleration Deceleration starts in advance so that the feedrate programmed for a block is attained at the beginning of the block. Deceleration can be performed over several blocks. Feedrate Speed control by Deceleration bell–shapedacceleration/ start po
Page 63822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (b) If A + B > Remaining amount of travel in the block being executed when the single–block command is executed A stop state may continue over several blocks. The stop is made as described later. Feedrate %%% $$$ Single–block command %%% $$$ $$ %%% $$$ $$
Page 639B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (b) If A > Remaining amount of travel in the block being executed when the single–block command is executed A stop state may continue over several blocks. The stop is made as described later. Feedrate Single–block command ### ### ## ### ## Stop state conti
Page 64022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (3) Cutting load that is expected from the travel direction on the Z–axis Specified tool path The machining error is decreased because of the deceleration by Tool path assumed difference in feedrate. when Al High Precision Contour Control is not used Tool
Page 641B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (c) During descent on the Z–axis, the cutting load increases, and override is applied according to the Z–axis descent angle. (Example) Z N1 N2 Specified feedrate X N3 N1 N2 N3 t Deceleration based on With look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpo
Page 64222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (Example) Program N1 G01 G91 X100. F5000 N2 Y100. N2 N1 Tangent feedrate Tangent feedrate The deceleration based on the feedrate difference is used. X–axis feedrate X–axis feedrate The feedrate difference becomes The tangent feedrate is small, and the feed
Page 643B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (Example) If parameter FNW (bit 6 of No. 19500) = 0 and the permissible feedrate difference = 500 mm/min (on all axes) Deceleration to Deceleration to 354 mm/min 500 mm/min If “1” is set, the feedrate is determined not only with the condition that the perm
Page 64422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 N8 N7 N9 N6 N5 Y N1 X N4 N3 N2 X–axis feedrate Y–axis feedrate Tangent feedrate N1 N5 N9 N1 N5 N9 Fig. 22.1.2 (b) Example of Determining the Feedrate with the Acceleration The method of determining the feedrate with the acceleration differs depending on th
Page 645B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR If “1” is set, the feedrate is determined with not only the condition that the permissible acceleration on each axis is not exceeded but also the condition that the deceleration feedrate is constant regardless of the travel direction if the shape is the sa
Page 64622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Usually, the cutting resistance is higher when machining is performed with the bottom of the cutter, as shown in Fig. 22.1.2 (c) an when machining is performed with the side of the cutter, as shown in Fig. 22.1.2 (d). Deceleration is, therefore, required.
Page 647B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR CAUTION 1 The function for determining the feedrate with the cutting feed is effective only when the tool is parallel with the Z–axis. Thus, it may not be possible to apply this function, depending on the structure of the machine used. 2 In the function fo
Page 64822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 When bit 3 (OVR) of parameter No. 8459 is 1, the following feedrates can be overridden: – Feedrate decelerated by deceleration based on feedrate difference in look–ahead acceleration/deceleration before interpolation – Feedrate decelerated by deceleration
Page 649B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR S Mirror image (Do not change the state of the signal). S F1 digit feed (Feedrate can not be changed by using the manual pulse generator.) D Restriction –2 The AI high Precision Contour Control mode or the AI Nano high Precision Contour Control mode is aut
Page 65022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 S 3–dimensional tool compensation –G41 S Wheel wear compensation –G41 S Tool offset –G45,G46,G47,G48 S Local coordinate system –G52 S Machine coordinate system –G53 S Single direction positioning –G60 S Automatic corner override –G62 S Tapping mode –G63 S
Page 651B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR D Restriction –5 When the following function is used, a AI High Precision Contour Control and the AI Nano High Precision Contour Control cannot be used. S Angular axis control S Arbitary angular axis control D Restriction –6 The limitation may be attached
Page 65222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Axis control Axis control by PMC The axis which is used in the AI High Precision Contour Control mode or in the AI nano High Precision Contour Control mode can not be used as the control axis of the PMC Axis Control in the AI High
Page 653B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Item Specifications Note Axis control Stored stroke check 2 The AI high precision contour control mode or the AI nano high precision contour control mode is automatically canceled once and the buffering is in- hibited if G22 or G23 is used in the AI high P
Page 65422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Interpolation functions Linear interpolation G01 Circular interpolation G02,G03 Helical interpolation (Circular interpolation) + (Linear inter- polation for up to 2 axes) Helical interpolation B (Circular interpolation) + (Linear i
Page 655B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Item Specifications Note Feed functions F1 digit feed Using the manual pulse generator can not change Feedrate. Inverse time feed G93 External deceleration External deceleration Look ahead liner–type acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation. Look ah
Page 65622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Program input External memory and sub program M198 calling function Subprogram call M98 Circular interpolation by R program- ming Scaling G50,G51 The mode of AI high precision contour control or of AI nano high precision contour co
Page 657B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Item Specifications Note Miscellaneous/spindle functions 2nd. Auxiliary function The AI high precision contour control mode or the AI nano high precision contour control mode is automatically canceled once and the buffering is in- hibited if this function
Page 65822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Item Specifications Note Tool functions 3–dimensional tool compensation G41.2,G42.2 The command which automatically G41.3 cancel AI high precision contour con- trol mode or AI nano high precision contour control mode can not be used. However M,S,T and B co
Page 659B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 22.2 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION CUTTING POINT CONTROL (G07.1) General The conventional cylindrical interpolation function controls the tool center so that the tool axis always moves along a specified path on the cylindrical surface, towards the rotation axi
Page 66022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Format G05 P10000 ; Sets AI High precision contour control mode. : G07.1 IPr ; Sets cylindrical interpolation mode. : ..G41(G42).. Sets cutter compensation mode. : ..G40.. Clear cutter compensation mode. : G07.1 IP0 ; Clears cylindrical interpolation mode.
Page 661B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 1) Let C0 be the head of the vector normal to N1 from S0, which is the tool center position at the start point of circular block N1. Let C1 be the head of the similar vector at the end point. 2) As the tool moves from S0 to S1, a superimposed movement is m
Page 66222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 V : C–axis component of C2 – C1 Z–axis C1 : Cutting surface of block N1 C2 : Cutting surface after the end of block N1 Tool center path S1 S2 C2 C1 N1 C2 N2 V N3 Programmed path C–axis on the Y–axis cylindrical surface Fig. 22.2 (d) When Bit 6 (CYS) of Par
Page 663B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 3) When the amount of travel (L1) of block N2 is less than the value set in parameter No. 6113, as shown in Fig. 22.2 (f), cutting point compensation is not applied between blocks N1 and N2. Instead, block N2 is executed with the cutting point compensation
Page 66422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 V : Cutting point compensation between blocks N2 and N3 C1 : Cutting surface of blocks N1 and N2 Z–axis C2 : Cutting surface of block N3 L1 V R S2 S1 N2 C1 C2 N3 C1 Tool center path N1 Programmed path C–axis on the Y–axis cylindrical surface Fig. 22.2 (g)
Page 665B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Z–axis Fc’ Programmed path Tool center path Ve Tool Vce Fz = Fz’ Vs Vcs Fc C–axis Y–axis Fig. 22.2 (h) Actual Speed Indication during Circular Interpolation D Usable G codes (1) In any of the following G code modes, cylindrical interpolation cutting point
Page 66622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Tool Tool Overcut portion Fig. 22.2 (i) Overcutting D Setting the minimum Set the same minimum input increment for an offset axis and linear axis input increment for an when cylindrical interpolation is performed. offset axis (Y–axis) D Workpiece radius Wh
Page 667B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Z–axis Z–axis (mm) 120 Tool C–axis on the Cylindrical (1) (2) (3) surface (4) 90 80 70 Programmed path 60 Tool center path 30 (5) Tool 20 30 C–axis on the Cylindrical surface 60 70 (deg) Fig. 22.2 (j) Path of Sample Program for Cylindrical Interpolation Cu
Page 66822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Alarm Number Message Contents 0015 TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED A move command was specified for more axes than can be controlled by simultaneous axis control. Either add on the simultaneous axis control extension op- tion, or divide the number of programmed mo
Page 669B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 22.3 TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL General On a five–axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool, tool length compensation can be performed momentarily even in the middle of a block. This tool length compensation is classified into one of two types
Page 67022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 NOTE The length from the tool tip to tool pivot point must equal the sum of the tool length compensation amount and tool holder offset value. Format D Specifying tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 H_; H : Offset number D Specifying tool center point
Page 671B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR When only the rotation axis position is specified in tool center point control (type 1) mode, and when only I, J, and K are specified in tool center point control (type 2) mode, the tool tip center position remains unchanged before and after the specificat
Page 67222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Flat–end mill Tool tip center Programmed path Corner–radius–endmill Tool tip center Programmed path D Linear interpolation When linear interpolation (G01) is specified in tool center point control (G01) mode, the feedrate is controlled so that the tool tip
Page 673B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR D Positioning (G00) NOTE 1 Set the following parameters: (1)Bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.1401 = 1: Linear–type rapid traverse (2)Bit 5 (FRP) of parameter No.19501 = 1: Acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation is used in rapid traverse (3) Parameter N
Page 67422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 x, y , z : Tool center position ( x, y , z ) b, c : Rotation axis position X ,Y , Z : tip position (programmed position) l I, J,K : Tool axis direction l : Tool offset value (I, J , K) All positions are represented by absolute coordinates. ( X ,Y , Z ) I x
Page 675B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (2) When the rotation axes are the B– and C–axes, and the tool axis is the Z–axis B C Z Workpiece C B Y X ǸI 2 ) J2 b + tan*1 K c + tan*1 J I (3) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is the X–axis A B Z Workpiece A X B Y a + tan*
Page 67622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (4) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is the Z–axis (master axis : B–axis) B A Z B X Workpiece Y A a + tan*1 *J ǸI 2 ) K2 b + tan*1 I K (5) When the rotation axes are the A– and B–axes, and the tool axis is the Z–axis (master
Page 677B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR D Three–dimensional Tool center point control and three–dimensional cutter compensation can cutter compensation be used at the same time. Three–dimensional cutter compensation is applied to a specified tool tip point. Three–dimensional cutter compensation,
Page 67822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Functions resulting in When the following functions are used in tool center point control mode, the same operation as the same operation as tool length compensation in tool axis direction tool length results: compensation in tool – Specification of an ax
Page 679B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR S 3–dimensional tool compensation –G41 S Wheel wear compensation –G41 S Tool offset –G45,G46,G47,G48 S Programmable mirror image –G50.1,G51.1 S Local coordinate system –G52 S Machine coordinate system –G53 S Single direction positioning –G60 S Automatic co
Page 68022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The alarm(P/S5196) is issued when the following functions are used. : – Manual interruption operation – Tool retract and recover The following functions can not be used in tool center p
Page 681B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 22.4 TOOL AXIS COMPENSATION IN TOOL AXIS DIRECTION General When a 5–axis machine that has two axes for rotating the tool is used, tool length compensation can be performed in a specified tool axis direction on a rotation axis. When a rotation axis is speci
Page 68222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Command for tool length The tool compensation vector changes as the offset value changes or compensation in tool movement is made on a rotation axis. When the tool compensation vector axis direction changes, movement is made according to the
Page 683B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (2) B–axis and C–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis B C Z Workpiece C B Y X Vx = Lc * sin(b) * cos(c) Vy = Lc * sin(b) * sin(c) Vz = Lc * cos(b) (3) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the X–axis A B Z Workpiece A X B Y Vx = Lc * cos(b) Vy = Lc *
Page 68422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 (4) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the B–axis used as the master B A Z B X Workpiece Y A Vx = Lc * cos(a) * sin(b) Vy = –Lc * sin(a) Vz = Lc * cos(a) * cos(b) (5) A–axis and B–axis, with the tool axis on the Z–axis, and the A–axis
Page 685B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR D Tool holder offset The machine–specific length from the rotation center of the tool rotation axes (A– and B–axes, A– and C–axes, and B– and C–axes) to the tool mounting position is referred to as the tool holder offset. Unlike a tool length offset value,
Page 68622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Xp = Lc * sin(B–(Bz+Bo)) * cos(C–(Cz+Co)) Yp = Lc * sin(B–(Bz+Bo)) * sin(C–(Cz+Co)) Zp = Lc * cos(B–(Bz+Bo)) Bz,Cz : B–axis and C–axis origin compensation values Bo,Co : B–axis and C–axis rotation axis offset values D Control Point Normally, the control po
Page 687B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR According to the machine type, set the values listed in the following table: Table 22.4 (a) Setting the Tool Holder Offset and Rotation Center Compensation Vector Machine type Tool holder offset Rotation center Parameter No. 19666 compensation vector Param
Page 68822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Second rotation axis center (control point) Rotation center compensation vector parameter (No. 19661) First rotation axis center Spindle center compensation vector parameter (No. 19662) Spindle center Tool holder offset parameter (No. 19666) Tool mounting
Page 689B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Ordinary tool length Tool length compensation in tool axis Tool length compensation in tool axis compensation (G43) direction(G43.1) : direction (G43.1) : When tool is not tilted When tool is tilted Control point before shift Shift vector Control Control p
Page 69022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Suppose the above. Then, the tool length compensation vector for each axis is calculated depending on the machine type, as follows: (1) A– and C–axes. The tool axis is the Z–axis. ƪƫ ƪ Vx Vy Vz + cos C * sin C 0 sin C cos C 0 0 0 1 ƫȡȧȢƪ 1 0 0 0 cos A * si
Page 691B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR – Mirror image The condition of DI signal cannot be changed. – Tool life management function The tool length compensation use the amount of the tool specified by tool life management function. The command for the tool life management function have to comma
Page 69222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 – Figure copy –G72.1,G72.2 – Canned cycles –G73–G79,G80,G81–G89, G98,G99 – Electric gear box –G80,G81 – Function for hobbing machine –G80,G81 – External motion function –G81 – Chopping –G81.1 – Small–hole peck drilling cycle –G83 – Changing workpiece coord
Page 693B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR – External deceleration External decelaration is not available in this mode. D Others tool axis direction tool length compensation function cannot be used with the following function. – Angular axis control – Arbitrary angular axis contol The limitation at
Page 69422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 22.5 The 3–dimensional cutter compensation function is used with machines that can control the direction of tool axis movement by using rotation axes 3–DIMENSIONAL (such as the B– and C–axes). This function performs cutter compensation CUTTER by calculatin
Page 695B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Explanations D Operation at compensation start–up and cancellation (1) Type A Type A operation is similar to cutter compensation as shown below. Operation in linear interpolation :Tool center path :Programmed tool path Tool G40 G41.2 Operation in circular
Page 69622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Operation in circular interpolation :Tool center path :Programmed tool path G40 G42.2 Tool Fig. 22.5.1 (c) Operation at compensation start–up and cancellation (Type B) (3) Type C As shown in the following figures, when G41.2, G42.2, or G40 is specified, a
Page 697B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR NOTE For type C operation, the following conditions must be satisfied when tool side compensation is started up or canceled : 1 The block containing G40, G41.2, or G42.2 must be executed in the G00 or G01 mode. 2 The block containing G40, G41.2, or G42.2 m
Page 69822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 :Tool center path Workpiece :Programmed tool path :Tool offset value Actual tool Actual tool Reference tool Workpiece Reference tool Example(1)–3 Example(1)–4 Fig. 22.5.1 (f) Operation in the compensation mode (1)–3, 4 (2) When the tool moves at a corner,
Page 699B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR :Tool center path :Programmed tool path Example(3)–1 Tool movement when Example(3)–2 Tool movement when the changing G41.2 to G42.2 G code is left unchanged (G41.2 mode) (G41.2 mode) G91 G01 X100.0 G91 G01 X100.0 G42.2 X–100.0 X–100.0 Fig. 22.5.1 (h) Opera
Page 70022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Compensation vector calculation Q e1=VT VD Z P e2 e3 Y X R Fig. 22.5.1 (j) Compensation vector calculation In above figure, cutter compensation vector VD at point Q is calculated as follows : (1) Calculating the tool vector (VT) (2) Calculating the coord
Page 701B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (3) Converting coordinates from coordinate system C1 to coordinate system C2 The coordinates of the start and end points P and Q of a block and coordinates of the end point R of the next block in coordinate system C1 are converted to coordinates P’, Q’, an
Page 70222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Calculation used when the compensation plane is changed (1) When a rotation axis and linear axis are specified at the same time When a rotation axis and linear axis are specified in the same block in the G41.2 or G42.2 mode (the compensation plane change
Page 703B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Vector calculation at the end point (Q) of block N2 – The tool vector (VT) and coordinate conversion matrix (MN2) are calculated using the coordinates (B = 0, C = 0) of the rotation axis at point Q. – The cutter compensation vector (VN2) is calculated usin
Page 70422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Z Y N3 X N10 N7 N4 N6 N8 N9 N5 Fig. 22.5.1 (n) Conceptual Diagram Z C A Vb Va 45° 46° B Y Va: Tool direction vector when A = –46 Vb: Tool direction vector when A=45 A : End point of N3 B : End point of N4 C : End point of N6 Fig. 22.5.1 (o) Tool Direction
Page 705B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR The move direction of A’B’ is opposite to that of B’C’, so that two compensation vectors, V1 and V2, are produced at point B’ (end point of N4). There is a possibility of overcutting in this case, so an alarm (PS0272) is issued from N4. (1) Conditions for
Page 70622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 e3 e2 B’ C’ A’ Ra Rb A’ : Point A projected onto the compensation plane B’ : Point B projected onto the compensation plane C’ : Point C projected onto the compensation plane Ra : Vector A’B’ Rb : Vector B’C’ Fig. 22.5.1 (r) Programmed Path (on the Compensa
Page 707B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR e3 e2 B’ C’ A’ V At point B’, a vector (V) perpendicular to A’B’ is generated. Fig. 22.5.1 (s) Q1 Command A vertical vector can also be generated by specifying G41.2 or G42.1 in the next block as indicated in the example below. Example) N6 G41.2 Y–400 Z0 (
Page 70822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 22.5.2 Leading edge offset is a type of cutter compensation that is used when a Leading Edge Offset workpiece is machined with the edge of a tool. A tool is automatically shifted by a specified cutter compensation value on the line where a plane formed by
Page 709B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR (1) When the tool vector is inclined in the direction the tool moves : Tool center path : Programmed tool path Tool vector(VT) Tool G41.3(VC) VM G40 Fig. 22.5.2 (b) When the tool vector is inclined in the direction the tool moves (2) When the tool vector i
Page 71022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Tool center path(after compensation) VT2 VT1 VC1 Programmed path VM4 VM1 VM2 VC2 = VC3 There is one block that specifies no movement. Fig. 22.5.2 (e) There is one block that specifies no movement. If block 3 involves no movement, the compensation vector of
Page 711B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR VTn Direction of VCn VCn q (VMn+1 VTn) VTn VMn+1 VMn+1 q represents the included angle VCn q between VMn+1 and VTn. (0° v q v 180°) VTn Fig. 22.5.2 (g) Direction of the compensation vector (1) (b) (VMn+1,VTn) < 0 (90deg < q < 180deg.) VCn q Direction of VC
Page 71222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Compensation When the included angle q between VMn+1 and VTn is regarded as 0deg., performed when q is 180deg., or 90deg., the compensation vector is created in a different way. approximately 0deg., So, when creating an NC program, note the following poi
Page 713B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR next block must not point in the same direction or in opposite directions at start–up. The previously created compensation vector is maintained other than at start–up at all times. If the included angles between VT2 and VM3, VT3 andVM4, and VT4 and VM4, an
Page 71422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Tool center path (after compensation) VT2 VT3 VT4 VT5 VT1 VC5 VC1 VC2 VM1 VC3 VC4 VM2 VM3 VM6 Programmed VM4 VM5 Path Fig. 22.5.2 (o) When q=90deg. Is Determined (2) 22.5.3 Restrictions D G41.2, G42.2, and G41.3 G41.2, G42.2, G41.3, and G40 are continuous–
Page 715B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR – One–digit F code feed The feedrate cannot be changed by using manual pulse generator. D Commands that cannot In the mode for this function, the following commands cannot be used. be specified The alarm is issued when the following commands are orderd. :
Page 71622. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 – Small–hole peck drilling cycle –G83 – Changing workpiece coordinate system –G92 – workpiece coordinate system preset –G92.1 – Feed per revolution –G95 – Constant surface speed control –G96,G97 – Infeed control –G160,G161 – NURBS interpolation –G06.2 – Wo
Page 717B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Alarms Number Message Contents 0037 CRC:PLANE CHANGE An attempt was made to change the plane in the cutter compensation mode. To change the plane, cancel the cutter compensation mode. 0041 CRC:INTERFERENCE The depth of the cut is too great during cutter co
Page 71822. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 5408 G41.3 ILLEGAL (1) The G41.3 G code (startup) was START_UP specified in a group 01 mode for oth- er than G00 and G01. (2) The angle formed by the tool direc- tion vector and the movement direc- tion vector was 0° or 180° degrees
Page 719B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR 22.6 3–DIMENSIONAL CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION General Specifying an intermediate and end point on an arc enables circular interpolation in a 3–dimensional space. Format The command format is as follows: G02.4XX1 YY1 ZZ1 αα1 ββ1 ; First block (mid–point of the
Page 72022. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 Mid–point X (X1,Y1,Z1) Y Z Start point End point (X2,Y2,Z2) Fig.22.6 Start, Mid, and End Points If the modal code is changed by specifying a code such as G01 with the end point not specified, the arc cannot be obtained, and alarm PS5432 is issued. During M
Page 721B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR Limitation D Cases in which linear interpolation is D If the start point, mid–point, and end–point are on the same line, linear performed interpolation is performed. D If the start point coincides with the mid–point, the mid–point coincides with the end po
Page 72222. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 D Commands that cannot In the mode for this function, the following commands cannot be used. be specified The alarm is issued when the following commands are orderd. : – Custom macro B – Exponentioal interpolation –G02.3,G03.3 – Dwell –G04 – Function conce
Page 723B–63534EN/02 PROGRAMMING 22. RISC PROCESSOR – workpiece coordinate system preset –G92.1 – Feed per revolution –G95 – Constant surface speed control –G96,G97 – Infeed control –G160,G161 – NURBS interpolation –G06.2 – Workpiece coordinate system –G54,G54.1,G55,G56,G57, G58,G59 – Three–dimensional coor
Page 72422. RISC PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING B–63534EN/02 – Macro executor ( Execution macro ) – Manual handle interruption operation – External deceleration External decelaration is not available in this mode. – Arbitrary chanfering/Corner rounding D Others 3 dimensional cutter compensation function cannot be us
Page 725III. OPERATIO
Page 726
Page 727B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1 GENERAL 701
Page 7281. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 1.1 MANUAL OPERATION Explanations D Manual reference The CNC machine tool has a position used to determine the machine position return position. (See Section III–3.1) This position is called the reference position, where the tool is replaced or the coordinate are se
Page 729B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL D The tool movement by Using machine operator’s panel switches, pushbuttons, or the manual manual operation handle, the tool can be moved along each axis. Machine operator’s panel Manual pulse generator Tool Workpiece Fig. 1.1 (b) The tool movement by manual operati
Page 7301. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 1.2 Automatic operation is to operate the machine according to the created program. It includes memory, MDI and DNC operations. (See Section TOOL MOVEMENT III–4). BY PROGRAMING– AUTOMATIC Program 01000 ; OPERATION M_S_T ; G92_X_ ; Tool G00... ; G01...... ; . . . . F
Page 731B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.3 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanations D Program selection Select the program used for the workpiece. Ordinarily, one program is prepared for one workpiece. If two or more programs are in memory, select the program to be used, by searching the program number (Section
Page 7321. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Handle interruption While automatic operation is being executed, tool movement can overlap automatic operation by rotating the manual handle. (See Section III–4.8) Tool position during Z automatic operation Tool position after handle interruption Programmed depth
Page 733B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.4 Before machining is started, the automatic running check can be executed. It checks whether the created program can operate the machine TESTING A as desired. This check can be accomplished by running the machine PROGRAM actually or viewing the position display c
Page 7341. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Single block When the cycle start pushbutton is pressed, the tool executes one operation then stops. By pressing the cycle start again, the tool executes the next operation then stops. The program is checked in this manner. (See Section III–5.5) Cycle start Cycle
Page 735B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.5 After a created program is once registered in memory, it can be corrected or modified from the MDI panel (See Section III–9). EDITING A PART This operation can be executed using the part program storage/edit PROGRAM function. Program registration Program correct
Page 7361. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 1.6 The operator can display or change a value stored in CNC internal memory by key operation on the MDI screen (See III–11). DISPLAYING AND SETTING DATA Data setting Data display Screen Keys MDI CNC memory Fig. 1.6 (a) Displaying and Setting Data Explanations D Off
Page 737B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1st tool path Machined shape 2nd tool path Offset value of the 1st tool Offset value of the 2nd tool Fig. 1.6 (c) Offset Value D Displaying and setting Apart from parameters, there is data that is set by the operator in operator’s setting data operation. This data c
Page 7381. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Displaying and setting The CNC functions have versatility in order to take action in parameters characteristics of various machines. For example, CNC can specify the following: S Rapid traverse rate of each axis S Whether increment system is based on metric system
Page 739B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.7 DISPLAY 1.7.1 The contents of the currently active program are displayed. In addition, Program Display the programs scheduled next and the program list are displayed. (See Section III–11.2.1) Active sequence number Active program number PROGRAM O1100 N00005 N1 G
Page 7401. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 1.7.2 The current position of the tool is displayed with the coordinate values. Current Position The distance from the current position to the target position can also be displayed. (See Section III–11.1.1 to 11.1.3) Display Y x y X Workpiece coordinate system ACTUA
Page 741B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 1. GENERAL 1.7.4 When this option is selected, two types of run time and number of parts Parts Count Display, are displayed on the screen. (See Section lll–11.4.5) Run Time Display ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O0003 N00003 X 150.000 Y 300.000 Z 100.000 PART COUNT 18 RUN TIME 0H1
Page 7421. GENERAL OPERATION B–63534EN/02 1.8 Programs, offset values, parameters, etc. input in CNC memory can be output to paper tape, cassette, or a floppy disk for saving. After once DATA INPUT/OUTPUT output to a medium, the data can be input into CNC memory. Portable tape reader FANUC PPR Memory Paper
Page 743B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2 OPERATIONAL DEVICES The available operational devices include the setting and display unit attached to the CNC, the machine operator’s panel, and external input/output devices such as a, Handy File and etc. 717
Page 7442. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.1 The setting and display units are shown in Subsections 2.1.1 to 2.1.5 of Part III. SETTING AND DISPLAY UNITS 7.2”/8.4” LCD–Mounted type CNC Control Unit . . . . . . . III–2.1.1 9.5”/10.4” LCD–Mounted type CNC Control Unit . . . . . . III–2.1.2 Stand–
Page 745B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.1 7.2″/8.4″ LCD–Mounted Type CNC Control Unit 2.1.2 9.5″/10.4″ LCD–Mounted Type CNC Control Unit 719
Page 7462. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.1.3 Stand–Alone Type Small MDI Unit Address/numeric keys Function keys Shift key Cancel (CAN) key Input key Edit keys Help key Reset key Cursor keys Page change keys 720
Page 747B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.1.4 Stand–Alone Type Standard MDI Unit Address/numeric keys Help key Reset key Edit keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Shift key Function keys Page change keys Cursor keys 721
Page 7482. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.1.5 Stand–Alone Type 61 Full Key MDI Unit Reset key Address/numeric keys Function keys Shift key Help key Page change keys Cursor keys Cancel (CAN) key Input key Edit keys 722
Page 749B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.2 EXPLANATION OF THE KEYBOARD Table 2.2 Explanation of the MDI keyboard Number Name Explanation 1 RESET key Press this key to reset the CNC, to cancel an alarm, etc. RESET 2 HELP key Press this button to use the help function when uncertain about the o
Page 7502. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Table 2.2 Explanation of the MDI keyboard Number Name Explanation 10 Cursor move keys There are four different cursor move keys. : This key is used to move the cursor to the right or in the forward direction. The cursor is moved in short units in the for
Page 751B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3 The function keys are used to select the type of screen (function) to be displayed. When a soft key (section select soft key) is pressed FUNCTION KEYS immediately after a function key, the screen (section) corresponding to the AND SOFT KEYS selected
Page 7522. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.3.2 Function keys are provided to select the type of screen to be displayed. Function Keys The following function keys are provided on the MDI panel: POS Press this key to display the position screen. PROG Press this key to display the program screen.
Page 753B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.3 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft Soft Keys key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations. The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing each function key. The symbols in the f
Page 7542. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS POS Absolute coordinate display [ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC] [RUNPRE] [EXEC] [WORK] [ALLEXE] (Axis name) [EXEC] Relative coordinate display [REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]
Page 755B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the MEM mode 1/2 PROG Program display screen [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” (O number) [O SRH] (1) (N number) [N SRH] [REWIND] [P TYPE] [Q TYP
Page 7562. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2/2 (2) [FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display) File directory display screen [DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (number) [F SET] [EXEC] Schedule operation display screen [SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Schedule data) [INPUT] 730
Page 757B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the EDIT mode 1/2 PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] [F SRH] [CA
Page 7582. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See"When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed" (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] Graphic Conversational Prog
Page 759B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the MDI mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” Program input screen [MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT]
Page 7602. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed” Current block display screen [CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “Wh
Page 761B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG (When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed in all modes) 1/2 PROG Program display [PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END] (O number) [O SRH] (Address) [SRH↓] (Address) [SRH↑] [REWIND] [F SRH] [CAN] (N n
Page 7622. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2/2 (1) Program directory display [LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] (O number) [O SRH] Return to the program [READ] [CHAIN] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] [PUNCH] [STOP] [CAN] (O number) [EXEC] Graphic Conversational Programming [C.A.P.] [PRGRM] Return to the prog
Page 763B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OFFSET OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SETTING 1/2 OFFSET SETTING Tool offset screen [OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] (Axis name) [INP.C.] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [CLEAR] [ALL] [WEAR] [GEOM] [READ]
Page 7642. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2/2 (1) Pattern data input screen [MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT] Software operator’s panel screen [OPR] Tool life management setting screen [TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [CLEAR] [CAN] [EXEC] (Numeral) [INPUT] Modem card screen [MODEM] [MD.MON] [
Page 765B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM 1/2 SYSTEM Parameter screen [PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] Note) Search for the start of the
Page 7662. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (4) 2/2 Pitch error compensation screen [PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH] [ON:1] [OFF:0] (Numeral) [+INPUT] (Numeral) [INPUT] [READ] [CAN] [EXEC] [PUNCH] [CAN] Note) Search for the start of the file using [EXEC] the PRGRM screen for read/punch. Servo param
Page 767B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE MESSAGE Alarm display screen [ALARM] Message display screen [MSG] Alarm history screen [HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] HELP SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP H
Page 7682. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 GRAPHIC SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH Tool path graphics GRAPH Tool path graphics [PARAM] [EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO] [STSRT] [STOP] [REWIND] [CLEAR] [ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC] [←] [→] [POS] [↑] [↓] Solid graphics GRAPH Solid grap
Page 769B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.4 When an address and a numerical key are pressed, the character Key Input and Input corresponding to that key is input once into the key input buffer. The contents of the key input buffer is displayed at the bottom of the CRT Buffer screen. In order
Page 7702. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.3.5 After a character or number has been input from the MDI panel, a data Warning Messages check is executed when INPUT key or a soft key is pressed. In the case of incorrect input data or the wrong operation a flashing warning message will be displaye
Page 771B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.3.6 There are 12 soft keys in the 10.4″LCD/MDI or 9.5″LCD/MDI. As Soft Key Configuration illustrated below, the 5 soft keys on the right and those on the right and left edges operate in the same way as the 7.2″LCD or 8.4″ LCD, whereas the 5 keys on the
Page 7722. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.4 External input/output devices such as FANUC Handy File and so forth are available. For details on the devices, refer to the manuals listed below. EXTERNAL I/O Table 2.4 (a) External I/O device DEVICES Max. Reference Device name Usage storage manual c
Page 773B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Parameter Before an external input/output device can be used, parameters must be set as follows. CNC MAIN CPU BOARD OPTION–1 BOARD Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A RS–232–C RS–232–C RS–232–C RS–422 Reader/ Reader/ Host Host puncher punch
Page 7742. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Input/output channel 0101 Stop bit and other data number (parameter 0020) I/O CHANNEL=0 Number specified for 0102 (channel 1) the input/output device 0020 I/O CHANNEL 0103 Baud rate Specify a channel for an 0111 Stop bit and other data input/output devic
Page 775B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES 2.5 POWER ON/OFF 2.5.1 Turning on the Power Procedure of turning on the power Procedure 1 Check that the appearance of the CNC machine tool is normal. (For example, check that front door and rear door are closed.) 2 Turn on the power according to the man
Page 7762. OPERATIONAL DEVICES OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2.5.2 If a hardware failure or installation error occurs, the system displays one Screen Displayed at of the following three types of screens then stops. Information such as the type of printed circuit board installed in each slot Power–on is indicated.
Page 777B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 2. OPERATIONAL DEVICES Screen indicating module setting status B0H1 – 01 SLOT 01 (3046) : END END: Setting completed SLOT 02 (3050) : Blank: Setting not completed Module ID Slot number Display of software configuration B0H1 – 01 CNC control software SERVO : 90B0–01 Digital ser
Page 7783. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 3 MANUAL OPERATION MANUAL OPERATION are six kinds as follows : 3.1 Manual reference position return 3.2 Jog feed 3.3 Incremental feed 3.4 Manual handle feed 3.5 Manual absolute on and off 3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed/Tool axis direction handle feed B
Page 779B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.1 The tool is returned to the reference position as follows : The tool is moved in the direction specified in parameter ZMI (bit 5 of No. MANUAL 1006) for each axis with the reference position return switch on the REFERENCE machine operator’s panel. The t
Page 7803. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Automatically setting the Bit 0 (ZPR) of parameter No. 1201 is used for automatically setting the coordinate system coordinate system. When ZPR is set, the coordinate system is automatically determined when manual reference position return is
Page 781B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.2 In the jog mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the JOG FEED machine operator’s panel continuously moves the tool along the selected axis in the selected direction. The jog feedrate is specified in a parameter (No.1423) The jog f
Page 7823. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Limitations D Acceleration/decelera- Feedrate, time constant and method of automatic acceleration/ tion for rapid traverse deceleration for manual rapid traverse are the same as G00 in programmed command. D Change of modes Changing the mode to the jog mode
Page 783B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.3 In the incremental (INC) mode, pressing a feed axis and direction selection switch on the machine operator’s panel moves the tool one step INCREMENTAL FEED along the selected axis in the selected direction. The minimum distance the tool is moved is the
Page 7843. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 3.4 In the handle mode, the tool can be minutely moved by rotating the manual pulse generator on the machine operator’s panel. Select the axis MANUAL HANDLE along which the tool is to be moved with the handle feed axis selection FEED switches. The minimum d
Page 785B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION Explanations D Availability of manual Parameter JHD (bit 0 of No. 7100) enables or disables the manual handle pulse generator in Jog feed in the JOG mode. mode (JHD) When the parameter JHD( bit 0 of No. 7100) is set 1,both manual handle feed and incremental
Page 7863. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Restrictions D Number of MPGs Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected, one for each axis. The three manual pulse generators can be simultaneously operated. WARNING Rotating the handle quickly with a large magnification such as x100 moves the to
Page 787B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.5 Whether the distance the tool is moved by manual operation is added to the coordinates can be selected by turning the manual absolute switch on MANUAL ABSOLUTE or off on the machine operator’s panel. When the switch is turned on, the ON AND OFF distance
Page 7883. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanation The following describes the relation between manual operation and coordinates when the manual absolute switch is turned on or off, using a program example. G01G90 X100.0Y100.0F010 ; X200.0Y150.0 ; X300.0Y200.0 ; The subsequent figures use
Page 789B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D When reset after a Coordinates when the feed hold button is pressed while block is being manual operation executed, manual operation (Y–axis +75.0) is performed, the control unit following a feed hold is reset with the RESET button, and block is read
Page 7903. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 When the switch is ON during cutter compensation Operation of the machine upon return to automatic operation after manual intervention with the switch is ON during execution with an absolute command program in the cutter compensation mode will be described.
Page 791B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION Manual operation during cornering This is an example when manual operation is performed during cornering. VA2’, VB1’, and VB2’ are vectors moved in parallel with VA2, VB1 and VB2 by the amount of manual movement. The new vectors are calculated from VC1 and
Page 7923. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 3.6 Tool axis direction handle feed moves the tool over a specified distance by handle feed in the direction of the tool axis tilted by the rotation of the TOOL AXIS rotary axis. DIRECTION HANDLE FEED/TOOL AXIS Tool axis direction handle feed B has the func
Page 793B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION Explanations D Axis configuration Assume that the rotary axes for basic axes X, Y, and Z are A, B, and C, respectively. Assume also that the Z–axis represents the tool axis. Depending on the axis configuration of the machine, four types of tool axis directi
Page 7943. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (2) B–C axis type Z Xp = Hp sin (b) cos (c) Yp = Hp sin (b) sin (c) Zp = Hp cos (b) b Zp Hp X b C Yp Y Xp Hpxy (3) A–B axis (A axis master) type Xp = Hp sin (b) Z Yp = –Hp cos (b) sin (a) Zp = Hp cos (b) cos (a) a Zp b Yp Y X Xp (4)A–B axis (B axis master)
Page 795B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION In the figures above, a, b, and c represent the positions (angles) of the A–axis, B–axis, and C–axis from the machine zero point; those values present when the tool axis direction handle feed mode is set or a reset occurs are used. To change the feed direct
Page 7963. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed Procedure 1 Select the HANDLE switch from the mode selection switches. MODE 2 Select the tool axis normal direction handle feed switch. MEMORY REMOTE MDI 3 Select the tool axis direction handle feed mode axis as the handle fe
Page 797B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Pulse distribution to The figure below shows handle pulse (Hp) distribution to the X–axis, basic axes Y–axis, and Z–axis for each of the four directions. (1) A–C axis type (X–axis direction) Xp = Hp COS (C) Yp = Hp SIN (C) Zp = 0 0 Y C The XY plane is dra
Page 7983. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (3) B–C axis type (X–axis direction) Xp = Hp COS (B) COS (C) Yp = Hp COS (B) SIN (C) Zp = –Hp SIN (B) Z Xp 0’ Zp Hp X (X direction) B C X’ C Yp 0 Hpxy Y (4) B–C axis type (Y–axis direction) Xp = –Hp SIN (C) Yp = Hp COS (C) Zp = 0 X 0 C The XY plane is drawn
Page 799B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Setting basic axes and Basic axes X, Y, and Z are determined by parameter No. 1022 (plane rotary axes selection). Rotary axes A, B, and C are determined by parameter No. 1020 (axis name). D Tool axis direction The direction of the tool X axis is determine
Page 8003. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 3.7 In manual handle feed or jog feed, the following types of feed operations are enabled in addition to the conventional feed operation along a MANUAL specified single axis (X–axis, Y–axis, Z–axis, and so forth) based on LINEAR/CIRCULAR simultaneous 1–axis
Page 801B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION For jog feed The feedrate can be overridden using the manual feedrate override dial. The procedure above is just an example. For actual operations, refer to the relevant manual provided by the machine tool builder. Explanations D Definition of a straight Fo
Page 8023. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (2) Linear feed (simultaneous 2–axis control) By turning a manual handle, the tool can be moved along the straight line parallel to a specified straight line on a simultaneous 2–axis control basis. This manual handle is referred to as the guidance handle. M
Page 803B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Feedrate for manual The feedrate depends on the speed at which a manual handle is turned. handle feed A distance to be traveled by the tool (along a tangent in the case of linear or circular feed) when a manual handle is turned by one pulse can be selecte
Page 8043. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Manual handle feed in Even in JOG mode, manual handle feed can be enabled using bit 0 (JHD) JOG mode of parameter No. 7100. In this case, however, manual handle feed is enabled only when the tool is not moved along any axis by jog feed. Limitations D Mirr
Page 805B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.8 For execution of rigid tapping, set rigid mode, then switch to handle mode and move the tapping axis with a manual handle. For more information MANUAL RIGID about rigid tapping, see Section II–13.2 and refer to the relevant manual TAPPING provided by th
Page 8063. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Manual rigid tapping Manual rigid tapping is enabled by setting bit 0 (HRG) of parameter No. 5203 to 1. D Cancellation of rigid To cancel rigid mode, specify G80 as same the normal rigid tapping. mode When the reset key is pressed, rigid mode
Page 807B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION 3.9 The manual numeric command function allows data programmed through the MDI to be executed in jog mode. Whenever the system is MANUAL NUMERIC ready for jog feed, a manual numeric command can be executed. The COMMAND following eight functions are supporte
Page 8083. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Example 2: When the maximum number of controlled axes is 7 or 8 PROGRAM (JOG) O0010 N00020 G00 P (ABSOLUTE) (DISTANCE TO GO) X X 0.000 X 0.000 Y Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z Z 0.000 Z 0.000 U U 0.000 U 0.000 V V 0.000 V 0.000 W W 0.000 W 0.000 A A 0.000 A 0.000 C C 0.
Page 809B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION NOTE When an alarm state exists, data cannot be set. 5 Press the cycle start switch on the machine operator’s panel to start command execution. The status is indicated as ”MSTR.” (When the 9” screen is being used, the actual feedrate ”ACT.F” and spindle spe
Page 8103. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 NOTE When the manual rapid traverse selection switch is set to the OFF position, the jog feedrate for each axis is clamped such that a parameter–set feedrate, determined by bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No. 1401 as shown below, is not exceeded. LRP = 0: Manual r
Page 811B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference The tool returns directly to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position without position return (G30) passing through any intermediate points, regardless of the specified amount of travel. To select a reference position, specify P2
Page 8123. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D B codes (second After address B, specify a numeric value of no more than the number of auxiliary functions) digits specified by parameter No. 3033. NOTE 1 B codes can be renamed ”U,” ”V,” ”W,” ”A,” or ”C” by setting parameter No. 3460. If the new name is
Page 813B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 3. MANUAL OPERATION D Erasing data (1) When soft key [CLEAR] is pressed, followed by soft key [EXEC], all the set data is cleared. In this case, however, the G codes are set to G00 or G01, depending on the setting of bit 0 (G01) of parameter No. 3402. Data can also be cleared
Page 8143. MANUAL OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D REF mode The manual numeric command screen appears even when the mode is changed to REF mode. If, however, an attempt is made to set and execute data, a ”WRONG MODE” warning is output and the attempt fails. D Indexing of the index Commands cannot be speci
Page 815B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4 AUTOMATIC OPERATION Programmed operation of a CNC machine tool is referred to as automatic operation. This chapter explains the following types of automatic operation: • MEMORY OPERATION Operation by executing a program registered in CNC memory • MDI O
Page 8164. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 4.1 Programs are registered in memory in advance. When one of these programs is selected and the cycle start switch on the machine operator’s MEMORY panel is pressed, automatic operation starts, and the cycle start LED goes OPERATION on. When the feed ho
Page 817B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION b. Terminating memory operation Press the RESET key on the MDI panel. Automatic operation is terminated and the reset state is entered. When a reset is applied during movement, movement decelerates then stops. Explanation Memory operation After memory op
Page 8184. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Optional block skip When the optional block skip switch on the machine operator’s panel is turned on, blocks containing a slash (/) are ignored. D Cycle start for the For the two–path control, a cycle start switch is provided for each tool two–path con
Page 819B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.2 In the MDI mode, a program consisting of up to 10 lines can be created in the same format as normal programs and executed from the MDI panel. MDI OPERATION MDI operation is used for simple test operations. The following procedure is given as an examp
Page 8204. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 5 To execute a program, set the cursor on the head of the program. (Start from an intermediate point is possible.) Push Cycle Start button on the operator’s panel. By this action, the prepared program will start. (For the two–path control, select the too
Page 821B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanation The previous explanation of how to execute and stop memory operation also applies to MDI operation, except that in MDI operation, M30 does not return control to the beginning of the program (M99 performs this function). D Erasing the program
Page 8224. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Macro call When the custom macro option is provided, macro programs can also be created, called, and executed in the MDI mode. However, macro call commands cannot be executed when the mode is changed to MDI mode after memory operation is stopped during
Page 823B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.3 By activating automatic operation during the DNC operation mode (RMT), it is possible to perform machining (DNC operation) while a DNC OPERATION program is being read in via reader/puncher interface, or remote buffer. If the floppy cassette directory
Page 8244. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Program screen PROGRAM O0001 N00020 (Seven soft key type LCD) N020 X100.0 Z100.0 (DNC–PROG) ; N030 X200.0 Z200.0 ; N040 X300.0 Z300.0 ; N050 X400.0 Z400.0 ; N060 X500.0 Z500.0 ; N070 X600.0 Z600.0 ; N080 X700.0 Z400.0 ; N090 X800.0 Z400.0 ; N100 x900.0
Page 825B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Limitations D Limit on number of In program display, no more than 256 characters can be displayed. characters Accordingly, character display may be truncated in the middle of a block. D M198 (command for In DNC operation, M198 cannot be executed. If M198
Page 8264. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 4.4 While an automation operation is being performed, a program input from an I/O device connected to the reader/punch interface can be executed and SIMULTANEOUS output through the reader/punch interface at the same time. INPUT/OUTPUT Simultaneous Input/
Page 827B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Limitations D M198 (command for M198 cannot be executed in the input, output and run simultaneous mode. calling a program from An attempt to do so results in alarm No. 210. within an external input/output unit) D Macro control command A macro control com
Page 8284. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 4.5 This function specifies Sequence No. of a block to be restarted when a tool PROGRAM RESTART is broken down or when it is desired to restart machining operation after a day off, and restarts the machining operation from that block. It can also be used
Page 829B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure for Program Restart by Specifying a Sequence Number Procedure 1 [ P TYPE ] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [ Q TYPE ] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released,
Page 8304. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 5 The sequence number is searched for, and the program restart screen appears on the LCD display. PROGRAM RESTART O0002 N01000 DESTINATION M 1 2 X 57. 096 1 2 Y 56. 877 1 2 Z 56. 943 1 2 1 2 1 ******** DISTANCE TO GO ******** ******** 1 X 1. 459 T*******
Page 831B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure for Program Restart by Specifying a Block Number Procedure 1 [ P TYPE ] 1 Retract the tool and replace it with a new one. When necessary, change the offset. (Go to step 2.) [ Q TYPE ] 1 When power is turned ON or emergency stop is released, per
Page 8324. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 The coordinates and amount of travel for restarting the program can be displayed for up to five axes. If your system supports six or more axes, pressing the [RSTR] soft key again displays the data for the sixth and subsequent axes. (The program restart s
Page 833B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION < Example 2 > CNC Program Number of blocks O 0001 ; 1 G90 G92 X0 Y0 Z0 ; 2 G90 G00 Z100. ; 3 G81 X100. Y0. Z–120. R–80. F50. ; 4 #1 = #1 + 1 ; 4 #2 = #2 + 1 ; 4 #3 = #3 + 1 ; 4 G00 X0 Z0 ; 5 M30 ; 6 Macro statements are not counted as blocks. D Storing /
Page 8344. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Single block When single block operation is ON during movement to the restart position, operation stops every time the tool completes movement along an axis. When operation is stopped in the single block mode, MDI intervention cannot be performed. D Ma
Page 835B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.6 The schedule function allows the operator to select files (programs) SCHEDULING registered on a floppy–disk in an external input/output device (Handy FUNCTION File, Floppy Cassette, or FA Card) and specify the execution order and number of repetition
Page 8364. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Procedure for Scheduling Function Procedure D Procedure for executing 1 Press the MEMORY switch on the machine operator’s panel, then one file press the PROG function key on the MDI panel. 2 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key), then press
Page 837B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator’s panel to enter the RMT mode, then press the cycle start switch. The selected file is executed. For details on the REMOTE switch, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool builder. The selected fi
Page 8384. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Move the cursor and enter the file numbers and number of repetitions in the order in which to execute the files. At this time, the current number of repetitions “CUR.REP” is 0. 5 Press the REMOTE switch on the machine operator’s panel to enter the RMT mo
Page 839B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Displaying the floppy During the execution of file, the floppy directory display of background disk directory during file editing cannot be referenced. execution D Restarting automatic To resume automatic operation after it is suspended for scheduled o
Page 8404. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 4.7 The subprogram call function is provided to call and execute subprogram SUBPROGRAM CALL files stored in an external input/output device(Handy File, FLOPPY FUNCTION (M198) CASSETTE, FA Card)during memory operation. When the following block in a progra
Page 841B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Restrictions D Subprogram call For the two–path control, subprograms in a floppy cassette cannot be function with two–path called for the two tool posts at the same time. control NOTE 1 When M198 in the program of the file saved in a floppy cassette is e
Page 8424. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 4.8 The movement by manual handle operation can be done by overlapping MANUAL HANDLE it with the movement by automatic operation in the automatic operation INTERRUPTION mode. Tool position during Z automatic operation Tool position after handle interrupt
Page 843B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Explanations D Relation with other The following table indicates the relation between other functions and the functions movement by handle interrupt. Display Relation Machine lock Machine lock is effective. The tool does not move even when this signal tu
Page 8444. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (a) INPUT UNIT : Handle interrupt move amount in input unit system Indicates the travel distance specified by handle interruption according to the least input increment. (b) OUTPUT UNI : Handle interrupt move amount in output unit system Indicates the tr
Page 845B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.9 During automatic operation, the mirror image function can be used for MIRROR IMAGE movement along an axis. To use this function, set the mirror image switch to ON on the machine operator’s panel, or set the mirror image setting to ON from the MDI pan
Page 8464. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2–4 Move the cursor to the mirror image setting position, then set the target axis to 1. 3 Enter an automatic operation mode (memory mode or MDI mode), then press the cycle start button to start automatic operation. Explanations D The mirror image functi
Page 847B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.10 The tool can be withdrawn from a workpiece in order to replace the tool when it is damaged during machining, or merely to check the status of TOOL WITHDRAWAL machining. The tool can then be advanced again to restart machining AND RETURN efficiently.
Page 8484. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Procedure2 Suppose that the TOOL WITHDRAW switch on the machine operator’s Retract panel is turned on when the tool is positioned at point A during execution of the N30 block. Machine operator’s panel TOOL RETRAC- BEING TION WITH- POSITION DRAWN A TOOL T
Page 849B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure3 Set the manual operation mode, then withdraw the tool. For manual Withdrawal operation, either jog feed or handle feed is possible. 11 12 10 9 8 3 4 7 2 5 6 Z E point 1 A point X Y 823
Page 8504. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Procedure4 After withdrawing the tool and any additional operation such as replacing Return the tool, move the tool back to the previous retraction position. To return the tool to the retraction position, return the mode to automatic operation mode, then
Page 851B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Procedure 5 While the tool is at the retraction position (point E in the figure below) Repositioning and the RETRACTION POSITION LED is on, press the cycle start switch. The tool is then repositioned at the point where retraction was started (i.e. where
Page 8524. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanation 2 Withdrawal D Axis selection To move the tool along an axis, select the corresponding axis selection signal. Never specify axis selection signals for two or more axes at a time. D Path memorization When the tool is moved in manual operation
Page 853B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.11 With the retrace function, the tool can be moved in the reverse direction (reverse movement) by using the REVERSE switch during automatic RETRACE FUNCTION operation to trace the programmed path. The retrace function also enables the user to move the
Page 8544. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Feed hold stop REVERSE switch rurned on cycle start Cycle start (forward movement started) Forward movement Reverse movement Reverse movement started D Reverse movement → Three methods are available for moving the tool in the forward direction Forward re
Page 855B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION Cycle start (forward movement started) Reverse movement Feed hold stop started REVERSE switch turned off Forward movement Cycle start Reverse movement Forward return Forward return movement started movement D Reverse movement → When there are no more blo
Page 8564. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Feed hold stop Cycle start Reverse movement (forward movement started) signal=1,cycle start Reverse movement started Forward movement started Forward return movement started Forward movement Reverse movement Forward return movement Explanations D Forward
Page 857B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Reset Upon reset (when the RESET key on the MDI panel is pressed, the external reset signal is applied, or the reset and rewind signal is applied), the memorized reverse movement blocks are cleared. D Feedrate A feedrate for reverse movement can be spe
Page 8584. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Circular Be sure to specify the radius of an arc with R. interpolation(G02,G03) WARNING If an end point is not correctly placed on an arc (if a leading line is produced) when an arc center is specified using I, J, and K, the tool does not perform corre
Page 859B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION D Skip funtion (G31), In reverse movement and forward return movement, the skip signal and automatic tool length automatic tool length measurement signal are ignored. In reverse measurement (G37) movement and forward return movement, the tool moves along
Page 8604. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Auxiliary function The M, S, and T functions, and secondary auxiliary functions (B functions) are output directly in reverse movement and forward return movement. When an M, S, or T function, or secondary auxiliary function (B function) is specified in
Page 861B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.12 In cases such as when tool movement along an axis is stopped by feed hold during automatic operation so that manual intervention can be used to MANUAL replace the tool: When automatic operation is restarted, this function INTERVENTION AND returns th
Page 8624. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Example 1. The N1 block cuts a workpiece Tool N2 Block start point N1 2. The tool is stopped by pressing the feed hold switch in the middle of the N1 block (point A). N2 N1 Point A 3. After retracting the tool manually to point B, tool movement is restar
Page 863B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.13 DNC OPERATION WITH MEMORY CARD 4.13.1 “DNC operation with Memory Card” is a function that it is possible to Specification perform machining with executing the program in the memory card, which is assembled to the memory card interface, where is the
Page 8644. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 NOTE 1 To use this function, it is necessary to set the parameter of No.20 to 4 by setting screen. No.20 [I/O CHANEL: Setting to select an input/output unit] Setting value is 4.: It means using the memory card interface. 2 When CNC control unit is a stan
Page 865B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.13.2.2 When the following block in a program in CNC memory is executed, a Subprogram Call (M198) subprogram file in memory card is called. Format 1. Normal format M198 Pffff ∆∆∆∆ ; File number for a file in the memory card Number of repetition Memory c
Page 8664. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 4.13.3 (1) The memory card can not be accessed, such as display of memory card Limitation and Notes list and so on, during the DNC operation with memory card. (2) It is possible to execute the DNC operation with memory card on multi path system. However,
Page 867B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4.13.5 Connecting PCMCIA Card Attachment 4.13.5.1 Specification Number Specification Remarks A02B–0236–K160 For 7.2″ LCD or 8.4″ LCD A02B–0236–K161 For 9.5″ LCD or 10.4″ LCD 4.13.5.2 1) How to assemble to the unit Assembling Assemble an attachment guide
Page 8684. AUTOMATIC OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2) How to mount the card (a) Insert the card to slit of the attachment. Please pay attention to the direction of the card. (Please mach the direction of ditch on the card.) (b) Push up the card to the upper end of the attachment. 3) Assembling of the att
Page 869B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION 4) Appearance after connection NOTE 1 In both case of stand–alone type i series and LCD–mounted type i series, the memory card interface where is the left side of the screen of the display unit. (The memory card interface on the stand–alone type controll
Page 8705. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 5 TEST OPERATION The following functions are used to check before actual machining whether the machine operates as specified by the created program. 5.1 Machine Lock and Auxiliary Function Lock 5.2 Feedrate Override 5.3 Rapid Traverse Override 5.4 Dry Run 5.5
Page 871B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION 5.1 To display the change in the position without moving the tool, use machine lock. MACHINE LOCK AND There are two types of machine lock: all–axis machine lock, which stops AUXILIARY the movement along all axes, and specified–axis machine lock, which FUNCTIO
Page 8725. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Restrictions D M, S, T, B command by M, S, T and B commands are executed in the machine lock state. only machine lock D Reference position When a G27, G28, or G30 command is issued in the machine lock state, return under Machine the command is accepted but th
Page 873B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION 5.2 A programmed feedrate can be reduced or increased by a percentage (%) selected by the override dial.This feature is used to check a program. FEEDRATE For example, when a feedrate of 100 mm/min is specified in the program, OVERRIDE setting the override dia
Page 8745. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 5.3 An override of four steps (F0, 25%, 50%, and 100%) can be applied to the rapid traverse rate. F0 is set by a parameter (No. 1421). RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇ Rapid traverse Override ÇÇ 5m/min rate10m/min 50% Fig. 5.3 Rapid traverse override Ra
Page 875B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION 5.4 The tool is moved at the feedrate specified by a parameter regardless of the feedrate specified in the program. This function is used for checking DRY RUN the movement of the tool under the state taht the workpiece is removed from the table. Tool Table Fi
Page 8765. TEST OPERATION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 5.5 Pressing the single block switch starts the single block mode. When the cycle start button is pressed in the single block mode, the tool stops after SINGLE BLOCK a single block in the program is executed. Check the program in the single block mode by exec
Page 877B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 5. TEST OPERATION Explanation D Reference position If G28 to G30 are issued, the single block function is effective at the return and single block intermediate point. D Single block during a In a canned cycle, the single block stop points are the end of , , and canned cycle
Page 8786. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 6 SAFETY FUNCTIONS To immediately stop the machine for safety, press the Emergency stop button. To prevent the tool from exceeding the stroke ends, Overtravel check and Stroke check are available. This chapter describes emergency stop., overtravel check, an
Page 879B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.1 If you press Emergency Stop button on the machine operator’s panel, the machine movement stops in a moment. EMERGENCY STOP Red EMERGENCY STOP Fig. 6.1 Emergency stop This button is locked when it is pressed. Although it varies with the machine tool buil
Page 8806. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 6.2 When the tool tries to move beyond the stroke end set by the machine tool limit switch, the tool decelerates and stops because of working the limit OVERTRAVEL switch and an OVER TRAVEL is displayed. Deceleration and stop Y X Stroke end Limit switch Fig.
Page 881B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.3 Three areas which the tool cannot enter can be specified with stored stroke check 1, stored stroke check 2, and stored stroke check 3. STORED STROKE CHECK ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ Ç (X,Y,Z) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (I,J,K) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (1)For
Page 8826. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 G 22X_Y_Z_I_J_K_; ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (X,Y,Z) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ (I,J,K) ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ X>I, Y>J, Z>K X–I >ζ (In least command increment) Y–J >ζ (In least command increment) Z–K >ζ ((In least command increment) F ζ (mm)= 7500 F=Rapid traverse speed (mm/min) Fig. 6.3 (b) Crea
Page 883B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS D Checkpoint for the Confirm the checking position (the top of the tool or the tool chuck) before forbidden area programming the forbidden area. If point A (The top of the tool) is checked in Fig. 6.3 (d) , the distance “a” should be set as the data for the
Page 8846. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Releasing the alarms If the enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated, the tool can be moved only in the backward direction. To cancel the alarm, move the tool backward until it is outside the forbidden area and reset the system. When the alarm is
Page 885B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS 6.4 During automatic operation, before the movement specified by a given block is started, whether the tool enters the inhibited area defined by STROKE LIMIT stored stroke limit 1, 2, or 3 is checked by determining the position of the CHECK PRIOR TO end poi
Page 8866. SAFETY FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Example 2) End point Inhibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2 a The tool is stopped at point a according Start point to stored stroke limit 1 or 2. Inhibited area defined by stored stroke limit 1 or 2 End point Immediately upon movement commenci
Page 887B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 6. SAFETY FUNCTIONS D Cyrindrical interpolation In cylindrical interpolation mode, no check is made. mode D Polar coordinate In polar coordinate interpolation mode, no check is made. interpolation mode D Angular axis control When the angulalr axis control option is selected, n
Page 8887. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 7 ALARM AND SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS When an alarm occurs, the corresponding alarm screen appears to indicate the cause of the alarm. The causes of alarms are classified by error codes. Up to 25 previous alarms can be stored and displayed
Page 8897. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS B–63534EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS 7.1 ALARM DISPLAY Explanations D Alarm screen When an alarm occurs, the alarm screen appears. ALARM MESSAGE 0000 00000 100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE 510 OVER TR1AVEL :+X 520 OVER TRAVEL :+2 530 OVER TRAVEL :+3 S 0 T0000 MDI **** *** *** ALM 1
Page 8907. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Reset of the alarm Error codes and messages indicate the cause of an alarm. To recover from an alarm, eliminate the cause and press the reset key. D Error codes The error codes are classified as follows: No. 000 to 255 : P/S alarm (Progr
Page 8917. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS B–63534EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS 7.2 Up to 25 of the most recent CNC alarms are stored and displayed on the screen. ALARM HISTORY Display the alarm history as follows: DISPLAY Procedure for Alarm History Display Procedure 1 Press the function key MESSAGE . 2 Press the cha
Page 8927. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 7.3 The system may sometimes seem to be at a halt, although no alarm has occurred. In this case, the system may be performing some processing. CHECKING BY The state of the system can be checked by displaying the self–diagnostic SELF–DIAGNO
Page 8937. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS B–63534EN/02 OPERATION FUNCTIONS Explanations Diagnostic numbers 000 to 015 indicate states when a command is being specified but appears as if it were not being executed. The table below lists the internal states when 1 is displayed at the right end of each line on the s
Page 8947. ALARM AND SELF–DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 The table below shows the signals and states which are enabled when each diagnostic data item is 1. Each combination of the values of the diagnostic data indicates a unique state. 020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0
Page 895B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NC data is transferred between the NC and external input/output devices such as the Handy File. The memory card interface located to the left of the display can be used to read information on a memory card in the CNC or write it to the
Page 8968. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.1 Of the external input/output devices, the FANUC Handy File use floppy disks as their input/output medium. FILES In this manual, these input/output medium is generally referred to as a floppy. Unlike an NC tape, a floppy allows the user to freely choose
Page 897B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT D Protect switch The floppy is provided with the write protect switch. Set the switch to the write enable state. Then, start output operation. Write protect switch of a cassette (1) Write–protected (2) Write–enabled (Only reading is (Reading, writing, poss
Page 8988. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.2 When the program is input from the floppy, the file to be input first must be searched. FILE SEARCH For this purpose, proceed as follows: File 1 File 2 File 3 File n Blank File searching of the file n File heading Procedure 1 Press the EDIT or MEMORY s
Page 899B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Alarm Alarm No. Description The ready signal (DR) of an input/output device is off. An alarm is not immediately indicated in the CNC even when an alarm occurs during head searching (when a file is not found, or 86 the like). An alarm is given when the inpu
Page 9008. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.3 Files stored on a floppy can be deleted file by file as required. FILE DELETION File deletion Procedure 1 Insert the floppy into the input/output device so that it is ready for writing. 2 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 3 Press f
Page 901B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.4 PROGRAM INPUT/OUTPUT 8.4.1 This section describes how to load a program into the CNC from a floppy or NC tape. Inputting a Program Inputting a program Procedure 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading. For the two–path control, select the too
Page 9028. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Program numbers on a • When a program is entered without specifying a program number. NC tape ⋅ The O–number of the program on the NC tape is assigned to the program. If the program has no O–number, the N–number in the first block is assigned to the prog
Page 903B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT S Pressing the [CHAIN] soft key positions the cursor to the end of the registered program. Once a program has been input, the cursor is positioned to the start of the new program. S Additional input is possible only when a program has already been register
Page 9048. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.4.2 A program stored in the memory of the CNC unit is output to a floppy or Outputting a Program NC tape. Outputting a program Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a program
Page 905B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT D On the memo record Head searching with a file No. is necessary when a file output from the CNC to the floppy is again input to the CNC memory or compared with the content of the CNC memory. Therefore, immediately after a file is output from the CNC to th
Page 9068. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.5 OFFSET DATA INPUT AND OUTPUT 8.5.1 Offset data is loaded into the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC Inputting Offset Data tape. The input format is the same as for offset value output. See III– 8.5.2. When an offset value is loaded which has the sa
Page 907B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.5.2 All offset data is output in a output format from the memory of the CNC Outputting Offset Data to a floppy or NC tape. Outputting offset data Procedure 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output. For the two–path control, select the tool post
Page 9088. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.6 Parameters and pitch error compensation data are input and output from INPUTTING AND different screens, respectively. This chapter describes how to enter them. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS AND PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION DATA 8.6.1 Parameters are loaded into the
Page 909B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 15 Turn the power to the CNC back on. 16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s panel. 8.6.2 All parameters are output in the defined format from the memory of the CNC to a floppy or NC tape. Outputting Parameters Outputting parameters
Page 9108. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Output file name When the floppy disk directory display function is used, the name of the output file is PARAMETER. Once all parameters have been output, the output file is named ALL PARAMETER. Once only parameters which are set to other than 0 have been
Page 911B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 15 Turn the power to the CNC back on. 16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s panel. Explanations D Pitch error Parameters 3620 to 3624 and pitch error compensation data must be set compensation correctly to apply pitch error compens
Page 9128. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.7 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING CUSTOM MACRO COMMON VARIABLES 8.7.1 The value of a custom macro common variable (#500 to #999) is loaded into the memory of the CNC from a floppy or NC tape. The same format Inputting Custom used to output custom macro common vari
Page 913B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.7.2 Custom macro common variables (#500 to #999) stored in the memory Outputting Custom of the CNC can be output in the defined format to a floppy or NC tape. Macro Common Variable Outputting custom macro common variable Procedure 1 Make sure the output
Page 9148. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.8 On the floppy directory display screen, a directory of the FANUC Handy File, FANUC Floppy Cassette, or FANUC FA Card files can be displayed. DISPLAYING In addition, those files can be loaded, output, and deleted. DIRECTORY OF FLOPPY CASSETTE DIRECTORY
Page 915B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.8.1 Displaying the Directory Displaying the directory of floppy cassette files Procedure 1 Use the following procedure to display a directory of all the files stored in a floppy: 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function k
Page 9168. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Procedure 2 Use the following procedure to display a directory of files starting with a specified file number : 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press sof
Page 917B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Explanations D Screen fields and their NO :Displays the file number meanings FILE NAME: Displays the file name. (METER) : Converts and prints out the file capacity to paper tape length.You can also produce H (FEET) I by setting the INPUT UNIT to INCH of th
Page 9188. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.8.2 The contents of the specified file number are read to the memory of NC. Reading Files Reading files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a file is to be input in m
Page 919B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.8.3 Any program in the memory of the CNC unit can be output to a floppy Outputting Programs as a file. Outputting programs Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. For the two–path control, select the tool post for which a file
Page 9208. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.8.4 The file with the specified file number is deleted. Deleting Files Deleting files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [FLOPPY]
Page 921B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Restrictions D Inputting file numbers If [F SET] or [O SET] is pressed without key inputting file number and and program numbers program number, file number or program number shows blank. When with keys 0 is entered for file numbers or program numbers, 1 i
Page 9228. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.9 CNC programs stored in memory can be grouped according to their names, thus enabling the output of CNC programs in group units. Section OUTPUTTING A III–11.3.2 explains the display of a program listing for a specified group. PROGRAM LIST FOR A SPECIFIE
Page 923B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.10 To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program ON THE ALL IO s
Page 9248. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.10.1 Input/output–related parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen. Setting Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode. Input/Output–Related Parameters Setting input/output–related parameters Procedure 1 Press function key SYSTEM . 2 Press the right
Page 925B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.10.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify the input file containing the program (file search). Outputting Programs File search Procedure 1 Press s
Page 9268. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC]. CAN EXEC The specified file is found. Explanations D Difference between N0 When a file already exists in a cassette or card, specifying N0 or N1 has and N1 the same effect. If N1 is specified when there is no file on t
Page 927B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Inputting a program Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program director
Page 9288. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Outputting programs Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program director
Page 929B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Deleting files Procedure 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. ⋅ A program directory is
Page 9308. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.10.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and Outputting Parameters Inputting parameters Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]
Page 931B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Outputting parameters Procedure 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. READ/PUNCH (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345 I/O CHANNEL 3 TV
Page 9328. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.10.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen. Inputting and Outputting Offset Data Inputting offset data Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPR
Page 933B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Outputting offset data Procedure 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDIT mode. 3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys change as shown below. READ/PUNCH (OFFSET) O1234 N12345 I/O CHANNEL 3 TV
Page 9348. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.10.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen. Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables Outputting custom macro common variables Procedure 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Select EDI
Page 935B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 8.10.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files. Outputting Floppy Files Displaying a file directory Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the
Page 9368. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345 No. FILE NAME (Meter) VOL 0001 PARAMETER 46.1 0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3 0003 O0001 11.9 0004 O0002 11.9 0005 O0003 11.9 0006 O0004 0007 O0005 11.9 0008 O0010 11.9 0009 O0020 11.9 11.9 F SRH File No.=2 >2_ EDIT * * * * * * * ***
Page 937B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Inputting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft key
Page 9388. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Outputting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft ke
Page 939B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Deleting a file Procedure 1 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key) on the ALL IO screen, described in Section 8.10.1. 2 Press soft key [FLOPPY] . 3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed. 4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] . The screen and soft keys
Page 9408. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.11 By setting the I/O channel (parameter No. 0020) to 4, files on a memory card inserted into the memory card interface located to the left of the DATA INPUT/OUTPUT display can be referenced. Different types of data such as part programs, USING A MEMORY
Page 941B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Displaying a directory of stored files Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. Using page k
Page 9428. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Searching for a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N0004
Page 943B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Reading a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG. 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. Then, the screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045
Page 9448. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8 To specify a file with its file name, press soft key [N READ] in step 6 above. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0001 N00010 No. FILE NAME COMMENT 0012 O0050 (MAIN PROGRAM) 0013 TESTPRO (SUB PROGRAM–1) 0014 O0060 (MACRO PROGRAM) ~
Page 945B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Writing a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045 No.
Page 9468. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Registering the same file When a file having the same name is already registered in the memory name card, the existing file will be overwritten. D Writing all programs To write all programs, set program number = –9999. If no file name is spe
Page 947B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Deleting a file Procedure 1 Press the EDIT switch on the machine operator’s panel. 2 Press function key PROG . 3 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). 4 Press soft key [CARD]. The screen shown below is displayed. DIRECTORY (M–CARD) O0034 N00045 No.
Page 9488. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Batch input/output with a memory card On the ALL IO screen, different types of data including part programs, parameters, offset data, pitch error data, custom macros, and workpiece coordinate system data can be input and output using a memory card; the scr
Page 949B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Explanations D Each data item When this screen is displayed, the program data item is selected. The soft keys for other screens are displayed by pressing the rightmost soft key (next–menu key). MACRO PITCH WORK (OPRT) When a data item other than program is
Page 9508. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 File format and error messages Format All files that are read from and written to a memory card are of text format. The format is described below. A file starts with % or LF, followed by the actual data. A file always ends with %. In a read operation, data
Page 951B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Memory Card Error Codes Code Meaning 99 A part preceding the FAT area on the memory card is destroyed. 102 The memory card does not have sufficient free space. 105 No memory card is mounted. 106 A memory card is already mounted. 110 The specified directory
Page 9528. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.12 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT BY EMBEDDED ETHERNET 8.12.1 The operation of the FTP file transfer function is described below. FTP File Transfer Function 8.12.1.1 A list of the files held on the hard disk embedded to the host computer is Host file list display dis
Page 953B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NOTE Depending on the FTP server software, the number of displayed programs may differ between the host file list screen above and the host file list (detail) screen described below. 5 When a list of files is larger than one page, the screen display can be
Page 9548. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 NOTE The host file list (detail) screen shown above is an example of screen display, and information displayed may vary according to the specification of the FTP server used with the host computer. Display items D Number of registered The number of files r
Page 955B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT D PUNCH This operation outputs a file held in the CNC part program storage to the hard disk embedded to the host computer. This soft key is displayed only when 9 is set as the input/output device number of the CNC, and the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode. 8
Page 9568. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.12.1.4 A file (NC program) on the host computer can be read to the CNC NC program input memory. For the host file list screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the host file list screen. 3 Press the [READ] soft key. 4 Type the file nu
Page 957B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT For the program screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key PROG . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press the [PRGRM] soft key. The program screen appears. 5 Press the [(OPRT)] soft
Page 9588. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8.12.1.5 A file (NC program) in the CNC memory can be output to the host NC program output computer. For the host file list screen Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Display the host file list screen. 3 Press the [PUNCH] soft key. 4 Type the O n
Page 959B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT 9 Press the [EXEC] soft key. 10 During output, “OUTPUT” blinks in the lower–right corner of the screen. NOTE An outputted file name is Oxxxx. 8.12.1.6 With the FTP file transfer function, the types of data listed below can be Input/output of various input/
Page 9608. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Parameter output The file (NC parameter) in the CNC memory can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Press t
Page 961B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Tool offset value output The file (tool offset value) in the CNC memory can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key OFFSET SETTING . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft k
Page 9628. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Workpiece origin offset value output The file (workpiece origin offset value) in the CNC memory can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key OFFSET SETTING . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the
Page 963B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Pitch error compensation output The file (pitch error compensation) in the CNC memory can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the
Page 9648. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 M code group output The file (M code group) in the CNC memory can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft key display. 4 Pres
Page 965B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT Operation history data output The file (operation history data) in the CNC memory can be output to the host computer. Procedure 1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode. 2 Press the function key SYSTEM . 3 Press the continuous menu key at the right end of the soft
Page 9668. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION B–63534EN/02 The upper row displays the usable embedded Ethernet function device. The embedded port or PCMCIA card is displayed. The lower row displays the usable Ethernet option boards. When no option board is installed, no information is displayed. 4 When you press t
Page 967B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 8. DATA INPUT/OUTPUT NOTE The title of the host computer that is the current communication destination of the data server board is displayed in reverse video. 5 The connected host can be changed by pressing the [CON–1], [CON–2], or [CON–3] soft key. Display items D Port number
Page 9689. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9 EDITING PROGRAMS General This chapter describes how to edit programs registered in the CNC. Editing includes the insertion, modification, deletion, and replacement of words. Editing also includes deletion of the entire program and automatic insertion of s
Page 969B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.1 This section outlines the procedure for inserting, modifying, and deleting a word in a program registered in memory. INSERTING, ALTERING AND DELETING A WORD Procedure for inserting, altering and deleting a word 1 Select EDIT mode. 2 Press PROG . 3 Selec
Page 9709. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.1.1 A word can be searched for by merely moving the cursor through the text Word Search (scanning), by word search, or by address search. Procedure for scanning a program 1 Press the cursor key . The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen; the cu
Page 971B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS Procedure for searching a word Example) of Searching for S12 PROGRAM O0050 N01234 N01234 is being O0050 ; searched for/ N01234 X100.0 Z1250.0 ; scanned currently. S12 ; S12 is searched N56789 M03 ; for. M02 ; % 1 Key in address S . 2 Key in 1 2 . ⋅ S12 cann
Page 9729. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.1.2 The cursor can be jumped to the top of a program. This function is called Heading a Program heading the program pointer. This section describes the three methods for heading the program pointer. Procedure for Heading a Program Method 1 1 Press RESET w
Page 973B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.1.3 Inserting a Word Procedure for inserting a word 1 Search for or scan the word immediately before a word to be inserted. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the INSERT key. Example of Inserting T15 Procedure 1 Search for or scan
Page 9749. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.1.4 Altering a Word Procedure for altering a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be altered. 2 Key in an address to be inserted. 3 Key in data. 4 Press the ALTER key. Example of changing T15 to M15 Procedure 1 Search for or scan T15. Program O0050 N01234
Page 975B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.1.5 Deleting a Word Procedure for deleting a word 1 Search for or scan a word to be deleted. 2 Press the DELETE key. Example of deleting X100.0 Procedure 1 Search for or scan X100.0. Program O0050 N01234 O0050 ; X100.0 is N01234 X100.0 Z1250.0 M15 ; searc
Page 9769. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.2 A block or blocks can be deleted in a program. DELETING BLOCKS 9.2.1 The procedure below deletes a block up to its EOB code; the cursor Deleting a Block advances to the address of the next word. Procedure for deleting a block 1 Search for or scan addres
Page 977B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.2.2 The blocks from the currently displayed word to the block with a specified Deleting Multiple sequence number can be deleted. Blocks Procedure for deleting multiple blocks 1 Search for or scan a word in the first block of a portion to be deleted. 2 Key
Page 9789. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.3 When memory holds multiple programs, a program can be searched for. There are three methods as follows. PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH Procedure for program number search Method 1 1 Select EDIT or MEMORY mode. 2 Press PROG to display the program screen. 3 Key in
Page 979B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.4 Sequence number search operation is usually used to search for a sequence number in the middle of a program so that execution can be SEQUENCE NUMBER started or restarted at the block of the sequence number. SEARCH Example) Sequence number 02346 in a pro
Page 9809. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Operation during Search Those blocks that are skipped do not affect the CNC. This means that the data in the skipped blocks such as coordinates and M, S, and T codes does not alter the CNC coordinates and modal values. So, in the first block
Page 981B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.5 Programs registered in memory can be deleted,either one program by one program or all at once. Also, More than one program can be deleted by DELETING specifying a range. PROGRAMS 9.5.1 A program registered in memory can be deleted. Deleting One Program
Page 9829. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.5.3 Programs within a specified range in memory are deleted. Deleting More than One Program by Specifying a Range Procedure for deleting more than one program by specifying a range 1 Select the EDIT mode. 2 Press PROG to display the program screen. 3 Ente
Page 983B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6 With the extended part program editing function, the operations described below can be performed using soft keys for programs that have been EXTENDED PART registered in memory. PROGRAM EDITING Following editing operations are available : FUNCTION ⋅ All
Page 9849. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.6.1 A new program can be created by copying a program. Copying an Entire Program Before copy After copy Oxxxx Oxxxx Oyyyy A Copy A A Fig. 9.6.1 Copying an Entire Program In Fig. 9.6.1, the program with program number xxxx is copied to a newly created prog
Page 985B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6.2 A new program can be created by copying part of a program. Copying Part of a Before copy After copy Program Oxxxx Oxxxx Oyyyy A Copy A B B B C C Fig. 9.6.2 Copying Part of a Program In Fig. 9.6.2, part B of the program with program number xxxx is copi
Page 9869. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.6.3 A new program can be created by moving part of a program. Moving Part of a Program Before copy After copy Oxxxx Oxxxx Oyyyy A Copy A B B C C Fig. 9.6.3 Moving Part of a Program In Fig. 9.6.3, part B of the program with program number xxxx is moved to
Page 987B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.6.4 Another program can be inserted at an arbitrary position in the current Merging a Program program. Before merge After merge Oxxxx Oyyyy Oxxxx Oyyyy A B Merge A B C B Merge location C Fig. 9.6.4 Merging a program at a specified location In Fig. 9.6.4,
Page 9889. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.6.5 Supplementary Explanation for Copying, Moving and Merging Explanations D Setting an editing range The setting of an editing range start point with [CRSR] can be changed freely until an editing range end point is set with [CRSR] or [BTTM] . If an ed
Page 989B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS Alarm Alarm no. Contents Memory became insufficient while copying or inserting 70 a program. Copy or insertion is terminated. The power was interrupted during copying, moving, or inserting a program and memory used for editing must be cleared. When this ala
Page 9909. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.6.6 Replace one or more specified words. Replacement of Replacement can be applied to all occurrences or just one occurrence of specified words or addresses in the program. Words and Addresses Procedure for hange of words or addresses 1 Perform steps 1 to
Page 991B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS Explanation D Replacing custom The following custom macro words are replaceable: macros IF, WHILE, GOTO, END, DO, BPRNT, DPRINT, POPEN, PCLOS The abbreviations of custom macro words can be specified. When abbreviations are used, however, the screen displays
Page 9929. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.7 Unlike ordinary programs, custom macro programs are modified, inserted, or deleted based on editing units. EDITING OF Custom macro words can be entered in abbreviated form. CUSTOM MACROS Comments can be entered in a program. Refer to the III–10.1 for th
Page 993B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 9.8 Editing a program while executing another program is called background editing. The method of editing is the same as for ordinary editing BACKGROUND (foreground editing). EDITING A program edited in the background should be registered in foreground prog
Page 9949. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.9 The password function (bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202) can be locked using parameter No. 3210 (PASSWD) and parameter No. 3211 PASSWORD (KEYWD) to protect program Nos. 9000 to 9999. In the locked state, FUNCTION parameter NE9 cannot be set to 0. In th
Page 995B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS D Setting 0 in parameter When 0 is set in the parameter PASSWD, the number 0 is displayed, and PASSWD the password function is disabled. In other words, the password function can be disabled by either not setting parameter PASSWD at all, or by setting 0 in
Page 9969. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9.10 For a 2–path control CNC, setting bit 0 (PCP) of parameter No. 3206 to 1 enables the copying of a specified machining program from one path to COPYING A another. Single–program copy and specified–range copy are supported. PROGRAM BETWEEN TWO PATHS Proc
Page 997B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS 6 Select one or more programs to be copied. ⋅ Single–program copy (1) Enter the number of the program to be copied. → ” ” (2) Press soft key [SOURCE] to set the number. → SOURCE:PATH?=” ” ⋅ Specified–range copy (1) Enter the range of the programs to be copi
Page 9989. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Operation flow Program screen Edit mode/BG edit mode Set the data protection key to ON (enable editing) Soft key for starting setting for copy between paths [P COPY] Copy source selection soft key [PATH1] or [PATH2] Not set (selected O number
Page 999B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 9. EDITING PROGRAMS D Major related alarms Major related alarm numbers Alarm number Description Relevant path P/S 70,70 BP/S0 Insufficient free memory Copy destination P/S 71,71 BP/S Specified program not found Copy source P/S 72,72 BP/S Too many programs Copy destination P/S
Page 10009. EDITING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Replacement Even if replacement is enabled, the program is not replaced if the part program storage for the copy destination path does not have sufficient free space. During background editing, copying by replacing the currently running program is not all
Page 1001B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 10 CREATING PROGRAMS Programs can be created using any of the following methods: ⋅ MDI keyboard ⋅ PROGRAMMING IN TEACH IN MODE ⋅ CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING INPUT WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION ⋅ CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION ⋅ AUTOMATIC PROGRAM PRE
Page 100210. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 10.1 Programs can be created in the EDIT mode using the program editing functions described in III–9. CREATING PROGRAMS USING THE MDI PANEL Procedure for Creating Programs Using the MDI Panel Procedure 1 Enter the EDIT mode. 2 Press the PROG key. 3 Press
Page 1003B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 10.2 Sequence numbers can be automatically inserted in each block when a program is created using the MDI keys in the EDIT mode. AUTOMATIC Set the increment for sequence numbers in parameter 3216. INSERTION OF SEQUENCE NUMBERS Procedure for automatic inse
Page 100410. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 9 Press INSERT . The EOB is registered in memory and sequence numbers are automatically inserted. For example, if the initial value of N is 10 and the parameter for the increment is set to 2, N12 inserted and displayed below the line where a new block is
Page 1005B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 10.3 When the playback option is selected, the TEACH IN JOG mode and TEACH IN HANDLE mode are added. In these modes, a machine position CREATING along the X, Y, and Z axes obtained by manual operation is stored in PROGRAMS IN memory as a program position
Page 100610. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 1 Set the setting data SEQUENCE NO. to 1 (on). (The incremental value parameter (No. 3216) is assumed to be “1”.) 2 Select the TEACH IN HANDLE mode. 3 Make positioning at position P0 by the manual pulse generator. 4 Select the program screen. 5 Enter prog
Page 1007B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS Explanations D Checking contents of the The contents of memory can be checked in the TEACH IN mode by using memory the same procedure as in EDIT mode. PROGRAM O1234 N00004 (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) X –6.975 X 3.025 Y 23.723 Y 23.723 Z –10.325 Z –0.325 O1234 ;
Page 100810. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 10.4 Programs can be created block after block on the conversational screen while displaying the G code menu. CONVERSATIONAL Blocks in a program can be modified, inserted, or deleted using the G code PROGRAMMING menu and conversational screen. WITH GRAPHI
Page 1009B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 4 Press the [C.A.P] soft key. The following G code menu is displayed on the screen. If soft keys different from those shown in step 2 are displayed, press the menu return key to display the correct soft keys. PROGRAM O1234 N00004 G00 : POSITIONING G01 : L
Page 101010. CREATING PROGRAMS OPERATION B–63534EN/02 PROGRAM O0010 N00000 G G G G X Y Z H F R M S T B I J K P Q L : EDIT * * * * *** *** 14 : 41 : 10 PRGRM G.MENU BLOCK (OPRT) 7 Move the cursor to the block to be modified on the program screen. At this time, a data address with the cursor blinks. 8 Enter nu
Page 1011B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 10. CREATING PROGRAMS 4 After data is changed completely, press the ALTER key. This operation replaces an entire block of a program. Procedure 3 1 On the conversational screen, display the block immediately before a Inserting a block new block is to be inserted, by using the p
Page 101211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11 SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA General To operate a CNC machine tool, various data must be set on the MDI panel for the CNC. The operator can monitor the state of operation with data displayed during operation. This chapter describes how to disp
Page 1013B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA POSITION DISPLAY SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key POS POS Current position screen ABS REL ALL HNDL (OPRT) Position display of Position displays Total position display Manual handle workpiece coordiĆ relative coordinate of e
Page 101411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Screen transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the MEMORY or MDI mode PROG *: Displayed in MDI mode Program screen * MEM MDI PRGRM CHECK CURRNT NEXT (OPRT) Display of proĆ Display of current Display of current gram conten
Page 1015B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Screen transition triggered by the function key PROG PROGRAM SCREEN in the EDIT mode PROG Program screen EDIT PRGRM LIB C.A.P. (OPRT) Program editing Program memory Conversational screen and program diĆ programming ⇒ See III-9 rectory screen ⇒ S
Page 101611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key OFFSET SETTING OFFSET SETTING Tool offset value OFFSET SETTING WORK (OPRT) Display of tool Display of setĆ Display of workĆ offset value ting data piece coordinate ⇒ See III-1
Page 1017B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA SYSTEM SCREEN Screen transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM SYSTEM Parameter screen PARAM DGNOS PMC SYSTEM (OPRT) Display of Display of parameter screen diagnosis ⇒ See III-11.5.1 screen ⇒ See III-7.3 Setting of parameter ⇒ See III-11.5
Page 101811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Setting screens The table below lists the data set on each screen. Table. 11 Setting screens and data on them Reference No. Setting screen Contents of setting item 1 Tool offset value Tool offset value III–11.4.1 Tool length offset value Cutte
Page 1019B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1 Press function key POS to display the current position of the tool. SCREENS The following three screens are used to display the current position of the DISPLAYED BY tool: FUNCTION KEY POS ⋅Position display screen for the work coordinate sys
Page 102011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.1.1 Displays the current position of the tool in the workpiece coordinate Position Display in the system. The current position changes as the tool moves. The least input increment is used as the unit for numeric values. The title at the top o
Page 1021B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Display with two–path control (12 soft keys display unit) ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010 O2000 N20010 (ACTUAL) (ACTUAL) X1 100.000 X2 400.000 Y1 200.000 Y2 500.000 Z1 300.000 Z2 600.000 (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN S: 0R
Page 102211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.1.2 Displays the current position of the tool in a relative coordinate system Position Display in the based on the coordinates set by the operator. The current position changes as the tool moves. The increment system is used as the unit for n
Page 1023B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Display with two–path control) (12 soft keys display unit) ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010 O2000 N20010 (RELATIVE) (RELATIVE) X1 100.000 X2 400.000 Y1 200.000 Y2 500.000 Z1 300.000 Z2 600.000 (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN (ACTUAL SPEED) F : 0MM/MIN
Page 102411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Display including Bits 6 and 7 of parameter 3104 (DRL, DRC) can be used to select whether compensation values the displayed values include tool length offset and cutter compensation. D Presetting by setting a Bit 3 of parameter 3104 (PPD) is u
Page 1025B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.3 Displays the following positions on a screen : Current positions of the tool in the workpiece coordinate system, relative coordinate system, and Overall Position machine coordinate system, and the remaining distance. The relative Display
Page 102611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Display with two–path control (12 soft keys display unit) ACTUAL POSITION O1000 N10010 O2000 N20010 (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) (RELATIVE) (ABSOLUTE) X1 100.000 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 X1 100.000 Y1 100.000 Y1 100.000 Y1 200.000 Y1 200.000 Z1 300.000
Page 1027B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.4 A workpiece coordinate system shifted by an operation such as manual Presetting the intervention can be preset using MDI operations to a pre–shift workpiece coordinate system. The latter coordinate system is displaced from the Workpiece C
Page 102811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.1.5 The actual feedrate on the machine (per minute) can be displayed on a Actual Feedrate current position display screen or program check screen by setting bit 0 (DPF) of parameter 3105. On the 12 soft keys display unit, the actual Display f
Page 1029B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Actual feedrate display In the case of movement of rotary axis, the speed is displayed in units of of rotary axis deg/min but is displayed on the screen in units of input system at that time. For example, when the rotary axis moves at 50 deg/m
Page 103011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.1.6 The run time, cycle time, and the number of machined parts are displayed Display of Run Time on the current position display screens. and Parts Count Procedure for displaying run time and parts count on the current position display screen
Page 1031B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.1.7 To perform floating reference position return with a G30.1 command, the Setting the Floating floating reference position must be set beforehand. Reference Position Procedure for setting the floating reference position Procedure 1 Press fu
Page 103211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.1.8 The reading on the load meter can be displayed for each servo axis and Operating Monitor the serial spindle by setting bit 5 (OPM) of parameter 3111 to 1. The reading on the speedometer can also be displayed for the serial spindle. Displa
Page 1033B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Speedometer Although the speedometer normally indicates the speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6 (OPS) of parameter 3111 to 1. The spindle speed to be displayed during operation
Page 103411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.2 This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key SCREENS PROG in MEMORY or MDI mode.The first four of the following screens DISPLAYED BY display the execution state for the program currently being executed in MEMORY or
Page 1035B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2.1 Displays the program currently being executed in MEMORY or MDI Program Contents mode. Display Procedure for displaying the program contents 1 Press function key PROG to display the program screen. 2 Press chapter selection soft key [PRGRM
Page 103611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.2.2 Displays the block currently being executed and modal data in the Current Block Display MEMORY or MDI mode. Screen Procedure for displaying the current block display screen Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapter selection s
Page 1037B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2.3 Displays the block currently being executed and the block to be executed Next Block Display next in the MEMORY or MDI mode. Screen Procedure for displaying the next block display screen Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapte
Page 103811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.2.4 Displays the program currently being executed, current position of the Program Check Screen tool, and modal data in the MEMORY mode. Procedure for displaying the program check screen Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapter s
Page 1039B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Display with two–path control (12 soft keys display unit) PROGRAM CHECK O1000 N01010 PROGRAM CHECK O2000 N02010 O0010 ; O0020 ; G92 G90 X100.0 Y200. Z50. ; G28 X10. Y10. Z10. ; G00 X0 Y0 Z0 ; G00 X50. Y20. Z–50. ; G01 Z250. F1000 ; X100. ; X50
Page 104011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D 12 soft keys display unit The program check screen is not provided for 12 soft keys display unit. Press soft key [PRGRM] to display the contents of the program on the right half of the screen. The block currently being executed is indicated by
Page 1041B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.2.5 Displays the program input from the MDI and modal data in the MDI Program Screen for mode. MDI Operation Procedure for displaying the program screen for MDI operation Procedure 1 Press function key PROG . 2 Press chapter selection soft ke
Page 104211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.2.6 When a machining program is executed, the machining time of the main Stamping the program is displayed on the program machining time display screen. The machining times of up to ten main programs are displayed in Machining Time hours/minu
Page 1043B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 5 To calculate the machining times of additional programs, repeat the above procedure. The machining time display screen displays the executed main program numbers and their machining times sequentially. Note, that machining time data cannot be
Page 104411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Procedure 2 1 To insert the calculated machining time of a program in a program as a Stamping machining comment, the machining time of the program must be displayed on time the machining time display screen. Before stamping the machining time of
Page 1045B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 4 If a comment already exists in the block containing the program number of a program whose machining time is to be inserted, the machining time is inserted after the existing comment. PROGRAM O0100 0N0000 O0100 (SHAFT XSF001) ; N10 G92 X100. Z1
Page 104611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Machining time Machining time is counted from the initial start after a reset in memory operation mode to the next reset. If a reset does not occur during operation, machining time is counted from the start to M03 (or M30). Howeve
Page 1047B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Program directory When the machining time inserted into a program is displayed on the program directory screen and the comment after the program number consists of only machining time data, the machining time is displayed in both the program n
Page 104811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Example 2: Program directory screen when two or more machining times are stamped. PROGRAM O0260 N00000 O0260 (SHAFT XSF302) (001H15M59S) (001H20M01S) ; N10 G92 X100. Z10. ; N20 S1500 M03 ; N30 G00 X20.5 Z5. T0101 ; N40 G01 Z–10. F25. ; N50 G02 X
Page 1049B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Example 3: Program directory screen when inserted machining time data does not conform to the format hhhHmmMssS (3–digit number followed by H, 2–digit number followed by M, and 2–digit number followed by S, in this order) PROGRAM O0280 N00000 O0
Page 105011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.3 This section describes the screens displayed by pressing function key SCREENS PROG in the EDIT mode. Function key PROG in the EDIT mode can DISPLAYED BY display the program editing screen and the program list screen (displays FUNCTION KEY #
Page 1051B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanations D Details of memory used PROGRAM NO. USED PROGRAM NO. USED : The number of the programs registered (including the subprograms) FREE : The number of programs which can be registered additionally. MEMORY AREA USED MEMORY AREA USED : T
Page 105211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Order in which programs When no program has been deleted from the list, each program is are registered registered at the end of the list. If some programs in the list were deleted, then a new program is registered, the new program is inserted
Page 1053B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.3.2 In addition to the normal listing of the numbers and names of CNC Displaying a Program programs stored in memory, programs can be listed in units of groups, according to the product to be machined, for example. List for a Specified Group
Page 105411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 8 Pressing the [EXEC] operation soft key displays the group–unit EXEC program list screen, listing all those programs whose name includes the specified character string. PROGRAM DIRECTORY (GROUP) O0001 N00010 PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.) USED:
Page 1055B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA [Example of using wild cards] (Entered character string) (Group for which the search will be made) (a) “*” CNC programs having any name (b) “*ABC” CNC programs having names which end with “ABC” (c) “ABC*” CNC programs having names which start wi
Page 105611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4 Press function key OFFSET SETTING to display or set tool compensation values and SCREENS other data. DISPLAYED BY This section describes how to display or set the following data: FUNCTION KEY OFFSET SETTING 1. Tool offset value #OFFSETSETTI
Page 1057B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.1 Tool offset values, tool length offset values, and cutter compensation Setting and Displaying values are specified by D codes or H codes in a program. Compensation values corresponding to D codes or H codes are displayed or set on the the
Page 105811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 3 Move the cursor to the compensation value to be set or changed using page keys and cursor keys, or enter the compensation number for the compensation value to be set or changed and press soft key [NO.SRH]. 4 To set a compensation value, enter
Page 1059B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D 12 soft keys display unit OFFSET O0000 N00000 NO. DATA NO. DATA ACTUAL POSITION (RELATIVE) 001 0.000 017 0.000 002 003 0.000 0.000 018 019 0.000 0.000 X–12345.678 004 005 0.000 0.000 020 021 0.000 0.000 Y–12345.678 006 007 0.000 0.000 022 023
Page 106011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.2 The length of the tool can be measured and registered as the tool length Tool Length offset value by moving the reference tool and the tool to be measured until they touch the specified position on the machine. Measurement The tool length
Page 1061B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 8 Press the soft key [INP.C.]. The Z axis relative coordinate value is input and displayed as an tool length offset value. INP.C. ÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇ ÇÇÇ Reference ÇÇ ÇÇÇ tool ÇÇ The difference is set as a tool length offset value A prefixed position 1035
Page 106211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.3 Data such as the TV check flag and punch code is set on the setting data Displaying and screen. On this screen, the operator can also enable/disable parameter writing, enable/disable the automatic insertion of sequence numbers in Entering
Page 1063B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 4 Move the cursor to the item to be changed by pressing cursor keys , , , or . 5 Enter a new value and press soft key [INPUT]. Contents of settings D PARAMETER WRITE Setting whether parameter writing is enabled or disabled. 0 : Disabled 1 : Enab
Page 106411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.4 If a block containing a specified sequence number appears in the program Sequence Number being executed, operation enters single block mode after the block is executed. Comparison and Stop Procedure for sequence number comparison and stop
Page 1065B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Explanations D Sequence number after After the specified sequence number is found during the execution of the the program is executed program, the sequence number set for sequence number compensation and stop is decremented by one. When the powe
Page 106611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.5 Various run times, the total number of machined parts, number of parts Displaying and Setting required, and number of machined parts can be displayed. This data can be set by parameters or on this screen (except for the total number of Ru
Page 1067B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D PARTS COUNT This value is incremented by one when M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter 6710 is executed. The value can also be set by parameter 6711. In general, this value is reset when it reaches the number of parts required. Refer
Page 106811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.6 Displays the workpiece origin offset for each workpiece coordinate Displaying and Setting system (G54 to G59, G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P48 and G54.1 P1 to G54.1 P300) and external workpiece origin offset. The workpiece origin offset the Workpiec
Page 1069B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.7 This function is used to compensate for the difference between the Direct Input of programmed workpiece coordinate system and the actual workpiece coordinate system. The measured offset for the origin of the workpiece Measured Workpiece c
Page 107011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 5 To display the workpiece origin offset setting screen, press the chapter selection soft key [WORK]. WORK COORDINATES O1234 N56789 (G54) NO. DATA NO. DATA 00 X 0.000 02 X 0.000 (EXT) Y 0.000 (G55) Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 01 X 0.000 03 X 0.000 (
Page 1071B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.8 Displays common variables (#100 to #149 or #100 to #199, and #500 to Displaying and Setting #531 or #500 to #999) on the CRT. When the absolute value for a common variable exceeds 99999999, ******** is displayed. The values for Custom Mac
Page 107211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.9 This subsection uses an example to describe how to display or set Displaying Pattern machining menus (pattern menus) created by the machine tool builder. Refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder for the actual Data and Patte
Page 1073B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 4 Enter necessary pattern data and press INPUT . 5 After entering all necessary data, enter the MEMORY mode and press the cycle start button to start machining. Explanations D Explanation of the HOLE PATTERN : Menu title pattern menu screen An o
Page 107411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.10 With this function, functions of the switches on the machine operator’s Displaying and Setting panel can be controlled from the CRT/MDI panel. Jog feed can be performed using numeric keys. the Software Operator’s Panel Procedure for disp
Page 1075B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 4 Move the cursor to the desired switch by pressing cursor key or . 5 Push the cursor move key or to match the mark J to an arbitrary position and set the desired condition. 6 Press one of the following arrow keys to perform jog feed. Press the
Page 107611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.11 Tool life data can be displayed to inform the operator of the current state Displaying and Setting of tool life management. Groups which require tool changes are also displayed.The tool life counter for each group can be preset to an arb
Page 1077B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 5 To display the page containing the data for a group, enter the group number and press soft key [NO.SRH]. The cursor can be moved to an arbitrary group by pressing cursor key or . 6 To change the value in the life counter for a group, move the
Page 107811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Display contents TOOL LIFE DATA : O3000 N00060 SELECTED GROUP 000 GROUP 001 : LIFE 0150 COUNT 0007 * 0034 # 0078 @ 0012 0056 0090 0035 0026 0061 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 GROUP 002 : LIFE 1400 COUNT 0000 0062 0024 00
Page 1079B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.4.12 The extended tool life management function provides more detailed data Displaying and Setting display and more data editing functions than the ordinary tool life management function. Extended Tool Life Moreover, if the tool life is speci
Page 108011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 ⋅ Deleting a tool group : 7–4 ⋅ Deleting tool data (T, H, or D code) : 7–5 ⋅ Skipping a tool : 7–6 ⋅ Clearing the life count (resetting the life) : 7–7 7–1 Setting the life count type, life value, current life count, and tool data (T, H, or D co
Page 1081B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 7–4 Deleting a tool group (1) In step 3, position the cusor on a group to be deleted and display the editing screen. (2) Press soft key [DELETE]. (3) Press soft key [GROUP]. (4) Press soft key [EXEC]. 7–5 Deleting tool data (T, H, or D code) (1)
Page 108211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Displays LIFE DATA EDIT GROUP : 001 O0010 N00001 TYPE : 1 (1:C 2:M) NEXT GROUP: *** LIFE : 9800 USE GROUP : *** COUNT : 6501 SELECTED GROUP : 001 NO. STATE T–CODE H–CODE D–CODE 01 * 0034 011 005 02 # 0078 000 033 03 @ 0012 004 018
Page 1083B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Tool life management When the extended tool life management function is provided, the screen following items are added to the tool life management screen: S NEXT: Tool group to be used next S USE: Tool group in use S Life counter type for each
Page 108411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.4.13 Chopping data, including the reference point (R point), upper dead point, Displaying and Setting lower dead point, and chopping feedrate, can be displayed and set by using the chopping screen. Chopping Data Procedure for displaying and s
Page 1085B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Limitations D Chopping feedrate If bit 7 (CHPX) of parameter No. 8360 is set to 1, the chopping feedrate cannot be set by using the chopping screen. D Data setting conditions The chopping screen can be used to set chopping data regardless of the
Page 108611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 OFFSET 01234 N12345 No. GEOMETRY (MACHINE) 001 100.000 X–12345.678 002 200.000 Y–12345.678 003 300.000 Z–12345.678 004 400.000 A–12345.678 005 500.000 B–12345.678 006 600.000 C–12345.678 007 700.000 U–12345.678 008 800.000 V–12345.678 009 900.00
Page 1087B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA NOTE Pressing the RESET key resets the displayed T and M addresses to 0. Once MEM or MDI mode has been selected, however, the modal T and M codes are displayed. 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the distance from the base measurement surface to th
Page 108811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Explanations D Definition of tool length In general, the tool length offset value can be defined in either of the offset value following two ways. Both methods are based on the same concept: The difference between the tip position of the tool an
Page 1089B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Machine zero point (Reference tool OFSL Tool OFSL Tool tip position) 01 T01 Zm Zt Zm L Measurement surface Measurement Workpiece !Hm surface Reference block Hm Base measure- ment surface Machine table Machine table L : Distance from the referenc
Page 109011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (2) Definition 2 In the second definition method, the tool length offset is the distance from the tool tip position to the workpiece coordinate system origin when the machine is positioned to the Z–axis zero point. A tool length offset defined i
Page 1091B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA The base measurement surface for this definition is located at the workpiece coordinate system origin. Because the tip of the reference tool is also located at the workpiece coordinate system origin, distance L from the reference tool tip positi
Page 109211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 The reference tool for definition 2 has a tip at the workpiece coordinate system origin when the machine is positioned to the Z–axis zero point. Whenever the workpiece is changed, therefore, the tool length offset must be remeasured. Remeasuring
Page 1093B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA Procedure for measuring the workpiece origin offset In addition to the workpiece origin offset along the tool lengthwise axis, that is, the Z–axis, the workpiece origin offsets along the X– and Y–axes, on a plane perpendicular to the Z–axis, can
Page 109411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 To set the workpiece origin on other than the workpiece top surface (for example, when the origin is shifted from the workpiece top surface by an amount equal to the cutting allowance), enter the amount of shift (S in the following figure) using
Page 1095B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 6 As soon as the sensor detects contact with the circumference, input a skip signal to the machine, thus stopping the axial movement of manual handle feed or jog feed. Simultaneously, the position at which feed stopped is stored as the first mea
Page 109611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Machine zero point Tool OFSL OFSWG54 ZmG54 OFSWG55! ZmG55 Workpiece origin (G55) Workpiece origin Workpiece (G55) (G54) Workpiece (G54) OFSL : Tool length offset for the tool used to measure the workpiece origin offset ZmG54 : Amount of movement
Page 1097B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA (2) Definition 2 The tool length offset in definition 2 equals the Z–axis workpiece origin offset, as described above. Usually in this case, therefore, the workpiece origin offset need not be set. If, however, the workpiece is changed after its
Page 109811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D X–/Y–axis workpiece The X– and Y–axis workpiece origin offsets can be measured regardless origin offset of whether the workpiece origin is located on a surface of the workpiece or at the center of a hole to be machined. (1) When the workpiece
Page 1099B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA +Z +X Tool Workpiece OFSR Xm OFSW Machine Workpiece zero point origin OFSR : Cutter compensation value for the tool used to measure the workpiece origin offset Xm : Amount of movement from the machine zero point to the workpiece origin when meas
Page 110011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (2) When the workpiece origin is located at the center of a hole. +Y +X Workpiece origin Y–axis workpiece origin offset Machine zero point X–axis workpiece origin offset In the above case, the workpiece origin is located at the center of a hole
Page 1101B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Using a skip signal A measurement probe, fitted with a sensor, can also be used to measure the Z–axis workpiece origin offset or measure the X–/Y–axis workpiece origin offset based on a surface, in the same way as when measuring the X–/Y–axis
Page 110211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Procedure for displaying the fixture offset screen and setting data on the screen Procedure 1 Press function key OFFSET SETTING . F OFFSET 2 Press continuous menu key several times until [F–OFS] appears. Continuous menu key 3 Press soft key [F–O
Page 1103B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.5 When the CNC and machine are connected, parameters must be set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine in order to fully SCREENS utilize the characteristics of the servo motor or other parts. DISPLAYED BY This chapter d
Page 110411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 S Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys, PAGE PAGE and , and cursor keys, , , , and . 5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value and the
Page 1105B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Parameters that require Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on turning off the power again after they are set. Setting such parameters causes P/S alarm 000. In this case, turn off the power, then turn it on agai
Page 110611. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Number of the pitch error compensation point having the largest value (for each axis): Parameter 3622 D Pitch error compensation magnification (for each axis): Parameter 3623 D Interval of the pitch error compensation points (for each axis): P
Page 1107B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Number of the pitch error compensation point at the positive end (for travel in the positive direction, for each axis): Parameter 3621 D Number of the pitch error compensation point at the negative end (for travel in the negative direction, fo
Page 110811. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.6 The program number, sequence number, and current CNC status are always displayed on the screen except when the power is turned on, a DISPLAYING THE system alarm occurs, or the PMC screen is displayed. PROGRAM NUMBER, If data setting or the
Page 1109B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.6.2 The current mode, automatic operation state, alarm state, and program Displaying the Status editing state are displayed on the next to last line on the screen allowing the operator to readily understand the operation condition of the syst
Page 111011. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 (5) Emergency stop or ––EMG–– : : Indicates emergency stop.(Blinks in reversed display.) reset status ––RESET–– : Indicates that the reset signal is being received. (6) Alarm status ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. (Blinks in reversed di
Page 1111B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.7 By pressing the function key MESSAGE , data such as alarms, alarm history SCREENS data, and external messages can be displayed. DISPLAYED BY For information relating to alarm display, see Section III.7.1. For FUNCTION KEY MESSAGE informatio
Page 111211. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Clearing external To clear external operator message history data, press the [CLEAR] soft operator message key. This clears all external operator message history data. (Set MSGCR history data (bit 0 of parameter No. 3113) to 1.) Note that when
Page 1113B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA 11.8 When screen indication isn’t necessary, the life of the back light for LCD can be put off by turning off the back light. CLEARING THE The screen can be cleared by pressing specific keys. It is also possible to SCREEN specify the automatic c
Page 111411. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11.8.2 The CNC screen is automatically cleared if no keys are pressed during the Automatic Erase period (in minutes) specified with a parameter. The screen is restored by pressing any key. Screen Display Procedure for automatic erase screen disp
Page 1115B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 11. SETTING AND DISPLAYING DATA D Limitations Automatic erase screen display function can not be used with the 160i/180i/160is/180is. 1089
Page 111612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 12 GRAPHICS FUNCTION Two graphic functions are available. One is a graphic display function, and the other is a dynamic graphic display function. The graphic display function can draw the tool path specified by a program being executed on a screen. The gr
Page 1117B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 12.1 It is possible to draw the programmed tool path on the screen, which makes it possible to check the progress of machining, while observing the GRAPHICS DISPLAY path on the screen. In addition, it is also possible to enlarge/reduce the screen. Before
Page 111812. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 6 Automatic operation is started and machine movement is drawn on the screen. 0001 00012 X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z X Y S 0T MEM * * * * *** *** 14 : 23 : 03 PARAM GRAPH Explanation D RANGE The size of the graphic screen will be as follows: (Actual graphic
Page 1119B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 1. Setting the center Set the center of the graphic range to the center of the screen. If the coordinate of the drawing range in the program can be contained in the above actual graphics range and graphics range, set the magnification to 1 (actual value s
Page 112012. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 2. Setting the maximum When the actual tool path is not near the center of the screen, method 1 and minimum will cause the tool path to be drawn out of the geaphics range if graphics coordinates for the magnification is not set properly. drawing range in
Page 1121B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D Graphics parameter ⋅ AXES Specify the plane to use for drawing. The user can choose from the following six coordinate systems. With two–path control, a different drawing coordinate system can be selected for each tool post. Y Z Y =0 : Select (1) =1 : Se
Page 112212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 ⋅ GRAPHIC CENTER X= Y= Z= Set the coordinate value on the workpiece coordinate system at graphic center. NOTE 1 When MAX. and MIN. of RANGE are set, the values will be set automatically once drawing is executed 2 When setting the graphics range with the g
Page 1123B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 12.2 There are the following two functions in Dynamic Graphics. DYNAMIC GRAPHIC Path graphic This is used to draw the path of tool center com- manded by the part program. DISPLAY Solid graphic This is used to draw the workpiece figure machined by tool mov
Page 112412. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 11. Displaying Coordinate axes and actual size dimension lines are displayed together coordinate axes and with the drawing so that actual size can be referenced. actual size dimensions lines The first six functions above (1. to 6.) are available by settin
Page 1125B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 2 There are two screens for setting drawing parameters. Press the page key according to the setting items for selecting screens. 3 Set the cursor to an item to be set by cursor keys. 4 Input numerics by numeric keys. 5 Press the INPUT key. The input numer
Page 112612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Partial enlargement 11 For partial drawing enlargement, display the PATH GRAPHIC (SCALE) screen by pressing the soft key [ZOOM] on the PATH GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen of step 1 above. The tool path is displayed. Next, press soft key [(OPRT)]. PATH GRAPHIC
Page 1127B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION Mark display 15 To display a mark at the current tool position, display the PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION) screen by pressing soft key [POS] on the PATH GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) screen of step 1 above. This mark blinks at the current tool center position on the tool
Page 112812. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Isometric projection Projector view by isometric can be drawn. (XYZ,ZXY) Z Y P=4 P=5 X Y Z X XYZ ZXY Fig. 12.2.1 (a) Coordinate systems for the isometric projection D Biplane view Y Z P=6 X X Fig. 12.2.1 (b) Coordinate systems for the biplane view Bipla
Page 1129B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D TILTING The tilting angle of the vertical axis is set in the range of –90°to +90°in reference to the horizontal axis crossing the vertical axis at a right angle. When a positive value is set, the vertical axis slants to the other side of the graphic scr
Page 113012. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D TOOL COMP. It is possible to set whether the tool path is drawn by making the tool length offset or cutter compensation valid or invalid. Setting value Tool length offset or cutter compensation 0 Perform drawing by making tool compensation valid (An act
Page 1131B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D Graphic program No part program which has not been registered in memory can be drawn. Also, it is necessary that the M02 or M30 should be commanded at the end of the part program. D Mark for the tool current The period of mark blinking is short when the
Page 113212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 12.2.2 The solid graphics draws the figure of a workpieces machined by the movement of a tool. Solid Graphics The following graphic functions are provided : 1. Solid model graphic Solid model graphic is drawn by surfaces so that the machined figure can be
Page 1133B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION Solid graphics drawing procedure Procedure 1 To draw a machining profile, necessary data must be set beforehand. So press the function key GRAPH ( CUSTOM GRAPH for the small MDI). The screen of ”SOLID GRAPHIC (PARAMETER) ” is displayed. SOLID GRAPHIC (PAR
Page 113412. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 6 Press soft key [ANEW]. This allows the blank figure drawing to be performed based on the blank figure data set. 7 Press soft keys [+ROT] [–ROT] [+TILT], and [–TILT], when performing drawing by changing the drawing directions. Parameters P and Q for the
Page 1135B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION 10 Press soft key [(OPRT)] and press either soft key [A.ST] or [F.ST]. When [A.ST] is pressed, the status of machining in progress is drawn by simulation. When [F.ST] is pressed, the profile during machining is not drawn. Only the finished profile produce
Page 113612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 15 To redraw the figure in a different mode, press soft key [+ROT], [–ROT], [+TILT], or [–TILT]. Parameters P and Q for the drawing direction are changed and the figure is redrawn with the new paramaters. D Triplane view drawing 16 The machined figure can
Page 1137B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION Explanations GRAPHICS PARAMETER D BLANK FORM ♦ BLANK FORM (P) Set the type of blank figure under P. The relationship between the setting value and figure is as follows: P Blank figure 0 Rectangular parallelepiped (Cubed) 1 Column or cylinder (parallel to
Page 113812. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D TOOL FORM ♦ Machining tool Set the machining direction of tools. orientation (P) P Machining direction of tools 0,1 Parallel to the Z–axis (perform machining from the + direction) ♦ Dimensions of tools Set the dimensions of tool. The relationship betwee
Page 1139B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D INTENSITY Specify the intensity of the drawing screen when performing drawing on the monochrome, and the color of the drawing screen when performing drawing on the color screen. The relationship between the setting, intensity, and color is as shown belo
Page 114012. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D START SEQ. NO. and Specify the start sequence number and end sequence number of each END SEQ. NO. drawing in a five–digit numeric. The subject part program is executed from the head. But only the part enclosed by the start sequence number and end sequen
Page 1141B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D TOOL COMP. In solid graphics, parameter 6501 (TLC, bit 1) is used to specify whether to apply tool length offset. D Graphic method Parameter 6501 (3PL, bit 2) is used to select whether to draw a triplane view with the third–angle or first–angle projecti
Page 114212. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Examples D Side view selection in triplane drawing Example) The side views of the figure below are illustrated. Rear view Top view Left side view Right side view Front view In the above figure, the side views displayed are switched as follows. Right view
Page 1143B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D Cross section position Some examples of cross–sectional views are given below for the left view selection in triplane and front view shown on the previous page. drawing Sectional view 1 Sectional view 2 Õ ÕÕÕ Õ Õ ÕÕÕ Õ ÕÕ Õ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ Õ ÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕÕÕÕÕÕ ÕÕÕ
Page 114412. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 12.3 The background drawing function enables the drawing of a figure for one program while machining a workpiece under the control of another BACKGROUND program. DRAWING Procedure for Background Drawing Procedure 1 Press the GRAPH function key ( CUSTOM fo
Page 1145B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 12. GRAPHICS FUNCTION D Tool offsets Separate tool offsets are internally provided for machining and background drawing. Upon starting drawing or when selecting a program for drawing, the tool offset data for machining is copied to the tool offset data for background drawing.
Page 114612. GRAPHICS FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 D Displaying the Bit 5 (DPO) of parameter No. 6500 can be used to specify whether the coordinates coordinates of the current position are to be displayed on the tool path drawing. In background drawing mode, modal information F, S, and T is displayed, tog
Page 1147B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION 13 HELP FUNCTION The help function displays on the screen detailed information about alarms issued in the CNC and about CNC operations. The following information is displayed. D Detailed information of When the CNC is operated incorrectly or an erroneous mach
Page 114813. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 ALARM DETAIL screen 2 Press soft key [ALM] on the HELP (INITIAL MENU) screen to display detailed information about an alarm currently being raised.. HELP (ALARM DETAIL) O0010 N00001 NUMBER : 027 Alarm No. M‘SAGE : NO AXES COMMANDED IN G43/G44 Normal explana–
Page 1149B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION 3 To get details on another alarm number, first enter the alarm number, then press soft key [SELECT]. This operation is useful for investigating alarms not currently being raised. >100 S 0 T0000 MEM **** *** *** 10:12:25 [ ][ ][ ][ ][ SELECT ] Fig. 13 (d) How
Page 115013. HELP FUNCTION OPERATION B–63534EN/02 >1 S 0 T0000 MEM **** *** *** 10:12:25 [ ][ ][ ][ ][ SELECT ] Fig. 13 (g) How to select each OPERATION METHOD screen When “1. PROGRAM EDIT” is selected, for example, the screen in Figure 13 (g) is displayed. On each OPERATION METHOD screen, it is possible to
Page 1151B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 13. HELP FUNCTION HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) 01234 N00001 1/4 * SETTEING (No. 0000∼) * READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (No. 0100∼) * AXIS CONTROL /SETTING UNIT (No. 1000∼) * COORDINATE SYSTEM (No. 1200∼) * STROKE LIMIT (No. 1300∼) * FEED RATE (No. 1400∼) * ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (No. 16
Page 115214. SCREEN HARDCOPY OPERATION B–63534EN/02 14 SCREEN HARDCOPY The screen hardcopy function outputs the information displayed on the CNC screen as 640*480–dot bitmap data. This function makes it possible to produce a hard copy of a still image displayed on the CNC. The created bitmap data can be disp
Page 1153B–63534EN/02 OPERATION 14. SCREEN HARDCOPY NOTE 1 During the screen hardcopy operation, key input is disabled for several tens of seconds. Until the screen hardcopy operation ends, the screen image lies still. During this period, the hardcopy in progress signal is tied to 1. No other signal
Page 115414. SCREEN HARDCOPY OPERATION B–63534EN/02 Colors of data The number of colors used in created bitmap data depend on the display control card, the LCD hardware, and the display mode of the CNC screen. Table 14 (a) indicates the relationships. Table 14 (a) Colors of BMP data created by the screen har
Page 1155IV. MAINTENANC
Page 1156
Page 1157B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1 METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY This chapter describes how to replace the CNC backup battery and absolute pulse coder battery. This chapter consists of the following sections: 1.1 REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES 1.2 REPLACING THE
Page 11581. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 1.1 REPLACING BATTERY FOR LCD–MOUNTED TYPE i SERIES D Replacement procedure When a lithium battery is used Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering code: A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC specification: A98L–0031–0012)). 1) Turn on the power to the CNC. Aft
Page 1159B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY CAUTION Steps 1) to 3) should be completed within 30 minutes. Do not leave the control unit without a battery for any longer than the specified period. Otherwise, the contents of memory may be lost. If steps 1) to 3) may not be completed within
Page 11601. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 Replacing 1) Prepare two alkaline dry cells (size D) commercially available. commercial alkaline dry 2) Turn on the power to the Series 16i/18i/160i/180i. cells (size D) 3) Remove the battery case cover. 4) Replace the cells, paying careful att
Page 1161B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1.2 REPLACING THE BATTERY FOR STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES D Replacing the battery If a lithium battery is used, have A02B–0200–K102 (FANUC internal code: A98L–0031–0012) handy. (1) Turn the CNC on. About 30 seconds later, turn the CNC off. (2) Re
Page 11621. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 CAUTION Complete steps (1) to (3) within 30 minutes. If the battery is left removed for a long time, the memory would lose the contents. If there is a danger that the replacement cannot be completed within 30 minutes, save the whole contents of
Page 1163B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY When using commercial D–size alkaline dry cells D Replacing the battery (1) Have commercial D–size alkaline dry cells handy. (2) Turn the CNC on. (3) Remove the lid from the battery case. (4) Replace the old dry cells with new ones. Mount the d
Page 11641. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 1.3 A lithium battery is used to back up BIOS data in the CNC display unit with PC functions. This battery is factory–set in the CNC display unit BATTERY IN THE with PC functions. This battery has sufficient capacity to retain BIOS CNC DISPLAY
Page 1165B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY Battery holder Lithium battery A02B–0200–K102 Connector (BAT1) Fig. 1.3 Lithium battery connection for CNC display unit with PC functions 1139
Page 11661. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 1.4 One battery unit can maintain current position data for six absolute pulse coders for a year. BATTERY FOR When the voltage of the battery becomes low, APC alarms 306 to 308 (+ SEPARATE axis name) are displayed on the CRT display. When APC a
Page 1167B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1.5 When the battery voltage falls, APC alarms 306 to 308 are displayed on the screen. When APC alarm 307 is displayed, replace the battery as soon BATTERY FOR as possible. In general, the battery should be replaced within one or two BUILT–IN A
Page 11681. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 – The service life of the batteries is about two years if they are used in a six–axis configuration with ai series servo motors and one year if they are used in a six–axis configuration with a series servo motors. FANUC recommends that you repl
Page 1169B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY – The absolute pulse coder of the ai series servo motor is incorporated with a backup capacitor as standard. This backup capacitor enables an absolute position detection to be continued for about 10 minutes. Therefore, no zero point return need
Page 11701. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 [Installation procedure for the battery] (1) Remove the battery cover from the SVM. (2) Install the battery in the SVM as shown in the figure below. (3) Install the battery cover. (4) Attach the battery connector to CX5X of the SVM. SVM Inserti
Page 1171B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY WARNING 1 When replacing the battery, be careful not to touch bare metal parts in the panel. In particular, be careful not to touch any high–voltage circuits due to the electric shock hazard. 2 Before replacing the battery, check that the DC li
Page 11721. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 (2) Detaching the connector Hold both the sides of the cable insulator and the cable, and pull them horizontally. <1> Pull out the cable side while raising it slightly. <2> 10 degrees or less Here, the angle of the cable to the horizontal must
Page 1173B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY 1.5.2 The battery is connected in either of 2 ways as follows. Method of Replacing Method 1: Use the battery case (A06B–6050–K060). Battery for Servo Use the battery: A06B–6050–K061 or D–size alkaline battery. Amplifier b series Method 2: Attac
Page 11741. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY MAINTENANCE B–63534EN/02 (5) Remove the battery from the servo unit. (6) Replace the battery and connect the battery cable with the connector CX5X or CX5Y of the servo unit. (7) Mount the battery cover. SVU–12, SVU–20 Battery Battery cover Pass the battery cable to thi
Page 1175B–63534EN/02 MAINTENANCE 1. METHOD OF REPLACING BATTERY Used batteries Old batteries should be disposed as “INDUSTRIAL WASTES” according to the regulations of the country or autonomy where your machine has been installed. 1149
Page 1176
Page 1177APPENDI
Page 1178
Page 1179B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE LIST A TAPE CODE LIST ISO code EIA code Meaning Without With Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CUSTOM CUSTOM MACURO B MACRO B 0 ff f 0 f f Number 0 1 f ff f f 1 f f Number 1 2 f ff f f 2 f f Number 2 3 ff f ff 3 f f f f Number 3 4 f ff f f 4 f f N
Page 1180A. TAPE CODE LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 ISO code EIA code Meaning Without With CUSTOM CUSTOM Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MACRO MACRO B B DEL fffff f fff Del ffff f f f f Delete × × (deleting a mispunch) NUL f Blank f No punch. With EIA × × code, this code cannot be used in a
Page 1181B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX A. TAPE CODE LIST NOTE 1 The symbols used in the remark column have the following meanings. (Space) : The character will be registered in memory and has a specific meaning. It it is used incorrectly in a statement other than a comment, an alarm occurs. × : The character will no
Page 1182B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 B LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT Some functions cannot be added as options depending on the model. In the tables below, IP :presents a combination of arbitrary axis addresses using X,Y,Z,A,B and C (such as X_Y_Z_A_). x = 1st basic axis (X
Page 1183B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX TAPE FORMAT Functions Illustration Tape format Dwell (G04) X_ ; G04 P_ High–speed cycle See II 19.1 G05 P10_L_; machining (G05) P10_:Number of the machining cycle to be called first: (P10001 to P10999) L_ :Repetition count of the machining cycle (L1 to
Page 1184B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Functions Illustration Tape format AI nano contour control See II 19.7 G05.1 Q1; AI nano contour control (G05.1) mode on G05.1 Q0; AI nano contour control mode off (Note) For both of the AI contour control and AI nano contour control func- t
Page 1185B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX TAPE FORMAT Functions Illustration Tape format Plane section G17 ; (G17, G18, G19) G18 ; G19 ; Inch/millimeter G20 ; Inch input conversion (G20, G21) G21 ; Millimeter input Stored stroke check (XYZ) G22 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_; (G22, G23) G23 Cancel; (IJK) Spindle
Page 1186B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Functions Illustration Tape format Skip function (G31) IP G31 IP_ F_; Skip signal Start point F Thread cutting (G33) G33 IP_ F_; !F : Lead ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ G41 G17 Cutter compensation C G41 (G40 – G42) G18 D_ ; ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ G40 G42 G19 ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ D : Too
Page 1187B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX TAPE FORMAT Functions Illustration Tape format P4 P3 P_ Scaling (G50, G51) G51 X_ Y_ Z_ P4’ P3’ I_ J_ K_ IP P, I, J, K : Scaling magnification X, Y, Z : Control position of scaling P1’ P2’ G50 ; Cancel P1 P2 Mirror Programmable mirror G51.1 IP _ ; image
Page 1188B. LIST OF FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Functions Illustration Tape format Coordinate system Y G17 X_ Y_ rotation (G68, G69) G68 G18 Z_ X_ Rα; a G19 Y_ Z_ (x y) G69 ; Cancel X (In case of X–Y plane) Refer to II.14. FUNCTIONS TO G80 ; Cancel Canned cycles (G73, G74, G80 – G89) SIMP
Page 1189B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE C RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Linear axis D In case of millimeter Increment system input, feed screw is IS–B IS–C millimeter Least input increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Least command increment 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 mm ±9999.
Page 1190C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 D In case of inch input, Increment system feed screw is inch IS–B IS–C Least input increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch Least command increment 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch Max. programmable dimension ±9999.9999 inch ±9999.9999 inch Max. rapid traverse Note
Page 1191B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX C. RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE Rotation axis Increment system IS–B IS–C Least input increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg Least command increment 0.001 deg 0.0001 deg Max. programmable dimension ±99999.999 deg ±9999.9999 deg Max. rapid traverse Note 240000 deg/min 100000 deg/min Feedrate r
Page 1192D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 D NOMOGRAPHS 1166
Page 1193B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D.1 The leads of a thread are generally incorrect in δ1 and δ2, as shown in Fig. D.1 (a), due to automatic acceleration and deceleration. INCORRECT Thus distance allowances must be made to the extent of δ1 and δ2 in the THREADED LENGTH program. δ2 δ1 Fig. D.1 (a)
Page 1194D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 D How to use nomograph First specify the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy, α, will be obtained at (1), and depending on the time constant of cutting feed acceleration/ deceleration, the δ1 value when V = 10mm / s will be obtained at (2). Then, d
Page 1195B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D.2 SIMPLE CALCULATION OF INCORRECT THREAD LENGTH δ2 δ1 Fig. D.2 (a) Incorrect threaded portion Explanations D How to determine δ2 d 2 + LR 1800 * (mm) R : Spindle speed (min–1) * When time constant T of the L : Thread lead (mm) servo system is 0.033 s. D How to d
Page 1196D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 D Reference Fig. D.2 (b) Nomograph for obtaining approach distance δ1 1170
Page 1197B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D.3 When servo system delay (by exponential acceleration/deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning system when a servo motor is used) TOOL PATH AT is accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the CORNER tool path (tool center path
Page 1198D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Analysis The tool path shown in Fig. D.3 (b) is analyzed based on the following conditions: Feedrate is constant at both blocks before and after cornering. The controller has a buffer register. (The error differs with the reading speed of the tape reader, number o
Page 1199B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX D. NOMOGRAPHS D Initial value calculation 0 Y0 V X0 Fig. D.3 (c) Initial value The initial value when cornering begins, that is, the X and Y coordinates at the end of command distribution by the controller, is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant
Page 1200D. NOMOGRAPHS APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 D.4 When a servo motor is used, the positioning system causes an error between input commands and output results. Since the tool advances RADIUS DIRECTION along the specified segment, an error is not produced in linear ERROR AT CIRCLE interpolation. In circular in
Page 1201E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET E STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET Parameter CLR (No. 3402#6) is used to select whether resetting the CNC places it in the cleared state or in the reset state (0: reset state/1: cleared state). Th
Page 1202E. STATUS WHEN TURNING POWER ON, WHEN CLEAR AND WHEN RESET APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Item When turning power on Cleared Reset Action in Movement × × × opera- Dwell × × × tion Issuance of M, S and × × × T codes Tool length compensa- × Depending on f : MDI mode tion parameter Other modes depend LVK(No.500
Page 1203F. CHARACTER–TO–CODES B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX CORRESPONDENCE TABLE F CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE Char- Char- Code Comment Code Comment acter acter A 065 6 054 B 066 7 055 C 067 8 056 D 068 9 057 E 069 032 Space F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark H 072 # 035 Hash sign I
Page 1204G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 G ALARM LIST 1) Program errors (P/S alarm) Number Message Contents 000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power. 001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input). Correct the tape. 002 TV PA
Page 1205B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 029 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H code is too large. Modify the program. 030 ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset values specified by D/H code for tool length offset, cutter com- pensation or 3–dimensional cutter compens
Page 1206G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COM- For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting, MANDS a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was fol- lowed by something other than R or C Correct the program. 055 MISS
Page 1207B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface, an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in
Page 1208G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 109 FORMAT ERROR IN G08 A value other than 0 or 1 was specified after P in the G08 code, or no value was specified. 110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the al- lowable range. Modify the program.
Page 1209B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message. MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause. 132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear. C
Page 1210G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set. Correct the program. 157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable value. See paramet
Page 1211B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 185 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT G81 was instructed without performing reference position return after power on or emergency stop. (hobbing machine) Perform reference (gear hobbing machine) position return. 186 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR Paramete
Page 1212G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN SYN- Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is CHRO–MODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program. 222 DNC OP. NOT ALLOWED IN BG.– Input and output are executed at a time in th
Page 1213B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 251 ATC ERROR An error occurs in the following cases (Only for the ROBODRILL) : When unusable T code is specified in M06 T_ When the M06 code is specified when the Z coordinate is positive in the machine coordinate system. When parame
Page 1214G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR The G68 block contains a format error. This alarm occurs in the fol- lowing cases: 1 One of I, J, and K is not specified in the G68 block (missing option for coordinate conversion). 2 I, J, and K are 0 in the G68 block
Page 1215B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5063 IS NOT PRESET AFTER REF. This message is output when the position counter has not been preset before the start of plate thickness measurement. This alarm is issued in one of the cases below. 1) When an attempt was made to perform measu
Page 1216G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 5115 SPL : ERROR There is an error in the specification of the rank. No knot is specified. The knot specification has an error. The number of axes exceeds the limits. Other program errors 5116 SPL : ERROR There is a program error in a block
Page 1217B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5156 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In simple high–precision contour control (SHPCC) mode, the controlled (SHPCC) axis selection signal (PMC axis control) changes. In SHPCC mode, the simple synchronous axis selection signal changes. 5157 PARAMETER
Page 1218G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 5227 FILE NOT FOUND A specified file is not found during communication with the built–in Handy File. 5228 SAME NAME USED There are duplicate file names in the built–in Handy File. 5229 WRITE PROTECTED A floppy disk in the built–in Handy Fil
Page 1219B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5307 INTERNAL DATA OVER FLOW In the following function, internal data exceeds the allowable range. 1) Improvement of the rotation axis feedrate 5311 FSSB:ILLEGAL CONNECTION A connection related to FSSB is illegal. This alarm is issued when
Page 1220G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 5413 NURBS:ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND An axis not specified with controlled points is specified in the first block. 5414 NURBS:ILLEGAL KNOT The number of blocks containing knots only is insufficient. 5415 NURBS:ILLEGAL CANCEL Although NURBS inter
Page 1221B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 5452 IMPROPER G–CODE (5AXIS A G code that cannot be specified is found. (5–axis mode) MODE) This alarm is issued when: 1) Three–dimensional cutter compensation (side–face offset and lead- ing–edge offset) is applied during cutter compensati
Page 1222G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm Number Message Contents 300 nth–axis origin return Manual reference position return is required for the nth–axis (n=1 to 8). 301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication nth–axis (n=1 to 8) APC communication error. Failure in data tran
Page 1223B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST No. Message Description 368 n AXIS : SERIAL DATA ERROR Communication data from the built–in pulse coder cannot be re- (INT) ceived. 369 n AXIS : DATA TRANS. ERROR A CRC or stop bit error occurred in the communication data being (INT) received from the built–in pul
Page 1224G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 6) Servo alarms (1/2) Number Message Contents 401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY The n–th axis (axis 1–8) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off. OFF Refer to procedure of trouble shooting. 402 SERVO ALARM: SV CARD NOT EX- The axis control card is not provided.
Page 1225B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – PA- This alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis 1–8) is in one of the condi- RAMETER INCORRECT tions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm) 1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the sp
Page 1226G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Number Message Contents 439 n AXIS : CNV. OVERVOLT POWER 1) PSM: The DC link voltage is too high. 2) PSMR: The DC link voltage is too high. 3) α series SVU: The C link voltage is too high. 4) β series SVU: The link voltage is too high. 440 n AXIS : CNV. EX DECELER
Page 1227B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 460 n AXIS : FSSB DISCONNECT FSSB communication was disconnected suddenly. The possible causes are as follows: 1) The FSSB communication cable was disconnected or broken. 2) The power to the amplifier was turned off suddenly. 3) A low–volta
Page 1228G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 ALD EXP Alarm details 1 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware) 1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection (hardware) 0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 204 OFS MCC LDA PMS #6 (OFS) : A current conversion erro
Page 1229B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST 8) Servo alarms (2/2) Number Message Contents 600 n AXIS : INV. DC LINK OVER CUR- DC link current is too large. RENT 601 n AXIS : INV. RADIATOR FAN FAIL- The external dissipator stirring fan failed. URE 602 n AXIS : INV. OVERHEAT The servo amplifier was overheated
Page 1230G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 11) Serial spindle alarms Number Message Contents 749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power supply on. Following reasons can be considered. 1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable
Page 1231B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST Number Message Contents 782 SPINDLE–4 MODE CHANGE ER- Same as alarm number 752 (for the fourth spindle) ROR 784 SPINDLE–4 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm number 754 (for the fourth spindle) ALM D The details of spindle alarm No.750 D 1st and 2nd spindles #7 #6 #5 #4
Page 1232G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 Alarm List (Serial Spindle) When a serial spindle alarm occurs, the following number is displayed on the CNC. n is a number corresponding to the spindle on which an alarm occurs. (n = 1: First spindle; n = 2: Second spindle; etc.) NOTE*1 Note that the meanings of
Page 1233B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED 07 Check for a sequence error. (For ex- The motor speed has exceeded ample, check whether spindle syn- 115% of its rated speed. chronization was specified when the Wh
Page 1234G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL 24 1 Place the CNC–to–spindle cable The CNC power is turned off (normal TRANSFER away from the power cable. power–off or broken cable). ERROR 2 Replace the cable. An err
Page 1235B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER 34 Correct a parameter value according Parameter data exceeding the allow- SETTING ER- to the manual. able limit is set. ROR If the parameter number is unknown, conne
Page 1236G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n47 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER 47 1 Replace the cable. 1 The A/B phase signal of the SIGNAL AB- 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector NORMAL 3 Correct the cable layout
Page 1237B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN 58 1 Check the PSM cooling status. The temperature of the radiator of the PSM 2 Replace the PSM unit. PSM has increased abnormally. (PSM alarm indication: 3) 7n59 S
Page 1238G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 7n97 SPN_n_ : OTHER 97 Replace the SPM. Another irregularity was detected. SPINDLE ALARM 7n98 SPN_n_ : OTHER CON- 98 Check the PSM alarm display. A PSM alarm was detected. VERTER ALARM 9n01
Page 1239B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9n11 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT 11 1 Check the selected PSM. Overvoltage of the DC link section of POW CIRCUIT 2 Check the input power voltage and the PSM was detected. (PSM alarm change in power dur
Page 1240G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9n29 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME 29 Check and correct the load status. Excessive load has been applied OVERLOAD continuously for a certain period of time. (This alarm is issued also when the motor sh
Page 1241B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9n42 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT. 42 1 Replace the cable. 1 The 1–rotation signal of the POS–CODER 2 Re–adjust the BZ sensor signal. spindle position coder (connector DETECT JY4) is disconnected. 2 Th
Page 1242G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9n56 SPN_n_ : INNER COOL- 56 Replace the SPM unit. The cooling fan in the SPM control cir- ING FAN STOP cuit stopped. 9n57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- 57 1 Decrease the acceleration/decel- An overloa
Page 1243B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM in- No. Message dica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 9n87 SPN_n_ : SPNDL SEN- 87 The one–rotation signal of the spindle An irregularity was detected in a SOR SIGNAL sensor is not generated. spindle sensor feedback signal. ERROR 9n88 SPN_n_ : C
Page 1244G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 ERROR CODES (SERIAL SPINDLE) NOTE*1 Note that the meanings of the SPM indications differ depending on which LED, the red or yellow LED, is on. When the yellow LED is on, an error code is indicated with a 2–digit number. The error code is not displayed on the CNC s
Page 1245B–63534EN/02 APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST SPM indica- Faulty location and remedy Description tion(*1) 12 During execution of the spindle synchronization com- Although spindle synchronization is being performed, mand, do not specify another operation mode. Before another operation mode (Cs contour control,
Page 1246G. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–63534EN/02 12) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.) Number Message Contents 900 ROM PARITY A parity error occurred in the CNC, macro, or servo ROM. Correct the contents of the flash ROM having the displayed number. 910 SRAM PARITY : (BYTE 0) A RAM par
Page 1247B–63534EN/02 Index [Numbers] [B] 3–Dimensional Circular Interpolation, 693 Back Boring Cycle (G87), 212 3–Dimensional Cutter Compensation, 668 Background Drawing, 1118 7.2″/8.4″ LCD–Mounted Type CNC Control Unit, 719 Background Editing, 967 Battery for Built–In Absolute Pulse Coders (DC6V), 8–Digit
Page 1248Index B–63534EN/02 Coordinate System on Part Drawing and Coordinate Deleting Multiple Blocks, 951 System Specified by CNC – Coordinate System, 18 Deleting One Program, 955 Coordinate System Rotation (G68, G69), 367 Deleting Programs, 955 Coordinate Value and Dimension, 136 Details of Cutter Compensa
Page 1249B–63534EN/02 Index DNC Operation, 797, 838 DNC Operation with Memory Card, 837 Drilling Cycle Counter Boring Cycle (G82), 198 [G] Drilling Cycle, Spot Drilling (G81), 196 G53, G28, G30, and G30.1 Commands in Tool Length Dry Run, 849 Offset Mode, 270 Dwell (G04), 114 G53, G28, G30, G30.1 and G29 Comm
Page 1250Index B–63534EN/02 Index Table Indexing Function, 261 [M] Input Command from MDI, 334 M Code Group Check Function, 165 Inputting a Program, 875 Machine Coordinate System, 123 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files, 909 Machine Lock and Auxiliary Function Lock, 845 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data
Page 1251B–63534EN/02 Index Operational Devices, 717 Program Components other than Program Sections, 169 Operations, 838 Program Configuration, 25, 167 Optional Angle Chamfering and Corner Rounding, 243 Program Contents Display, 1009 Outputting a Program, 878 Program Display, 713 Outputting a Program List fo
Page 1252Index B–63534EN/02 Scaling (G50, G51), 362 Specification Method, 441 Scheduling Function, 809 Specification Number, 841 Screen Displayed at Power–on, 750 Specifying the Spindle Speed Value Directly (S5–Dig- it Command), 144 Screen Hardcopy, 1126 Specifying the Spindle Speed with a Code, 144 Screens
Page 1253B–63534EN/02 Index Tool Axis Direction Handle Feed/Tool Axis Direction Tool Path at Corner, 1171 Handle Feed B, 766 Tool Selection Function, 152 Tool Axis Normal Direction Handle Feed, 769 Tool Side Compensation, 668 Tool Center Point Control, 643 Tool Withdrawal and Return, 821 Tool Compensation Va
Page 1254
Page 1255Revision Record FANUCĄSeriesĄ16i/160i/160is–MB, 18i/180i/180is–MB5, 18i/180i/180is–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–63534EN) Addition of Series 160is–MB, 18i–MB5, 180i–MB5, 02 Oct., 2001 180is–MB5, and 180is–MB Addition of functions 01 Jun., 2001 Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents
Page 1256
Page 1257FANUC Series 16i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB5 Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis Machining Specifications FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05 Jan.26.2004 T.Mochida Correction and addition of 5) E.Genma Draw 04 Mar.12.2003 M.Tanaka All re
Page 1258- Contents - 1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................................................................3 2 FORMAT ..................................................................................................................
Page 12591 General On a 5-axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool or table, this function performs tool length compensation constantly, even in the middle of a block, and exerts control so that the tool center point moves along the specified path. (See Fig.1 (a).) There are three different typ
Page 1260A Y' Z' B X' Y' Z' X' Y' Z' X' Tool center point path Fig. 1 (b) Path of the tool center point FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05 Jan.26.2004 T.Mochida Correction and addition of 5) E.Genma Draw 04 Mar.12.2003 M.Tanaka All revision H
Page 1261When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system, programming can be performed without worrying about the rotation of the table because the programming coordinate system does not move with respect to the table, although the position and direction of the workpi
Page 1262Example) Machine configuration: The A-axis is the rotation axis for controlling the tool. The B-axis is the rotation axis for controlling the table. Program: Created using the programming coordinate system. A Specified Workpiece coordinate start point system used when tool center point control start
Page 1263<1> Tool rotation type machine Z C B X Y <2> Table rotation type machine Z X Y C B <3> Mixed type machine Z B X C Y Fig. 1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine Even if the rotation axes that control the tool or the table don't intersect each other, this function can still be used. FANUC Series 16i –MB,
Page 1264As for the way to command rotary axes, there are two types, as described below, one of which is used depending on how the direction of the tool axis is specified. (1) Type 1 The block end point of the rotation axes is specified (e.g. A, B, C). The CNC performs tool length compensation by the specifi
Page 1265- Allowed functions When the tool center point control for 5-axis machining is executed, the following functions are allowed: (1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (2) Deceleration function based on feedrate difference
Page 12662 Format - Positioning and linear interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP α β H; Starts tool center point control (type 1). IP α β; : IP : In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool tip movement In the case of an incremental command, t
Page 1267- Positioning and linear interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP H Q; Starts tool center point control (type 2). IP I J K; : IP : In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool tip movement In the case of an incremental command, the amount
Page 1268- Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP H; Starts tool center point control (type 1). G02 I J K G17 IP α β F ; G03 R G02 I J K G18 IP α β F ; G03 R G02 I J K G19 IP α β F ; G03 R : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate
Page 1269executed in G00 or G01 mode. FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05 Jan.26.2004 T.Mochida Correction and addition of 5) E.Genma Draw 04 Mar.12.2003 M.Tanaka All revision H.kouzai A-78709E No. 03 Dec.27.2002 T.MochidaWorkpiece coordinate
Page 1270- Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP H Q_; Starts tool center point control (type 2). G02 G17 IP I J K R F ; G03 G02 G18 IP I J K R F ; G03 G02 G19 IP I J K R F ; G03 : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate system G
Page 1271While the rotation axes are moving, the CNC controls the control points so that the tool center point moves along an arc with respect to the table (workpiece). The end of the tool center point comes to the point specified on the programming coordinate system. CAUTION 1 Only arc radius R can be speci
Page 1272- Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP H; Starts tool center point control (type 1). G02 I J K G17 IP α β γ F ; G03 R G02 I J K G18 IP α β γ F ; G03 R G02 I J K G19 IP α β γ F ; G03 R : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coord
Page 1273Movement to the position specified by the G43.4 block does not constitute tool center point control. Only tool length compensation is performed along the tool axis direction. Because the specified speed is usually the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed of the straight line axis, wh
Page 1274- Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP H Q_; Starts tool center point control (type 2). G02 G17 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 G02 G18 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 G02 G19 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate sys
Page 1275Because the specified speed is the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed of the straight line axis, when seen from the table coordinate system, is: Length of the straight line axis F× . Length of the arc Depending on parameter RHT (No.1407#4), the specified speed varies as shown in th
Page 1276- Tool center point control cancellation command G49 IP α β; Cancels tool center point control. IP : In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool control point movement In the case of an incremental command, the amount of the tool control point movement α, β
Page 1277- Inclination angle of the tool In the case of tool center point control of type 2, the inclination angle of the tool can be specified using address Q of G43.5. The inclination angle of the tool represents how inclined the tool direction is toward the proceeding direction from the direction specifie
Page 12783 Description - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system The programming coordinate system is used for tool center point control. When the G43.4 or G43.5 command is specified with parameter WKP (No.19696#5) set to 0, the workpiece coordinate system tha
Page 1279- When the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system When the G43.4 command is specified with parameter WKP (No.19696#5) set to 1, the workpiece coordinate system that is in use at that point of time becomes the programming coordinate system. In this case, the programm
Page 1280- Notes on circular interpolation and helical interpolation, when the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system • The start point, end point, and center of an arc change as the rotation axis rotates. • In case of Type 1 , I, J, K commands the vector from the start poin
Page 1281When the G17 (X-Y plane) command is executed After the G43.4 command, the X-Y plane is selected using the G17 command and circular interpolation is performed with rotating the C-axis (table rotation axis) and B-axis (tool rotation axis) (including those cases where the C-axis moves before the G43.4
Page 1282After the G43.4 command, the Z-X plane is selected using the G18 command and circular interpolation is commanded after rotating the C-axis. → Alarm (violation of <2>) The same is also true when the G19 command is used. Example) … G43.4 H1 ; G01 C10. G18 G02 IP R20. ; … • In the case of a table rotat
Page 1283The master axis (A-axis) moves before the G43.4 command and, after the G43.4 command, circular interpolation is performed using the G17 (X-Y plane) command after rotating the C-axis, or the C-axis is rotated during circular interpolation. → Alarm (violation of <2>) (Note that C-axis center is not pe
Page 1284After the G43.4 command, the C-axis is rotated and circular interpolation is performed using the G19 (Y-Z plane) command. → Alarm (violation of <2>) Example) … G43.4 H1 ; G01 C10. ; G19 G02 IP R20. ; … When the G18 (Z-X plane) command is executed The G43.4 command is executed after moving the A- and
Page 1285- Tool center point control command During tool center point control, the command specifies the location of each block end point as seen from the programming coordinate system. The program specifies the tool center point. As for the rotation axis, the command specifies the coordinate values of each
Page 1286- Commands that can be specified during tool center point control The commands that can be specified during tool center point control are linear interpolation (G01), positioning (G00), circular interpolation (G02, G03), and helical interpolation (G02, G03). When linear interpolation (G01) is specifi
Page 1287- The moving distance of the rotation axis is large compared to that of the linear axis If the moving distance of the rotation axis is large compared to that of the linear axis, the rotation axis moves faster so that the tool center point moves at the specified speed, possibly resulting in the tool
Page 1288- Tool offset In tool life management mode, tool center point control is carried out using the tool length compensation value for a tool in use. - Attitude of tool In the case of tool center point control for 5-axis machinig a tool center point moves on the specified line or circle. But attitude of
Page 1289- Angle of the rotation axis for type 2 (when the movement range is not specified) When the direction of the tool is specified by I, J, K, Q for type 2, CNC calculates rotation axes angle from I,J,K,Q. Then, more than two pairs of "computed angles" of the rotation axes usually are gotten. The "compu
Page 1290"Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> When master axis (first rotation axis) moving angle of a pair is smaller than those of other pairs, the pair of computed angles whose master axis moving angle is smallest is the pair of output angles. ↓ ↓ When the mas
Page 1291The process of judging whether the moving angle is smaller or larger as the output judgement condition is called "movement judgement." When parameter PRI (No.19608#5) is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotation axis and second rotation axis are made in reverse order. The "movement judgement
Page 1292When the PA angle is (*1): The output angle is: (A θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees; B φ2 degrees). Namely, θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees is adopted because it is nearer to PA than θ2 - 360 × N, and φ2, which is the same pair with θ2, is adopted as the output angle of B. When the PA angle is (*2): The output
Page 1293The following two pairs of "computed basic angles" exist that direct the tool axis toward the + X axis direction. (B 90 degrees; C 180 degrees) (B 270 degrees; C 0 degree) <1> When the current rotation axis angles are (B -70 degrees; C 30 degrees) The "output angles" are (B -90 degrees; C 0 degree).
Page 1294Z C Y X Fig. 3 (i) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotation axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees). FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05 Jan.26.2004 T.Mochida Correction an
Page 1295• Angle of the rotation axis for type 2 (when the movement range is specified) If the upper and lower limits of the movement range of the rotation axis is specified using parameters No.19741 to No.19744, the rotation axis will move only within the specified range when the direction is specified usin
Page 1296"Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> Of the angle pairs whose master and slave axis angles are both within the specified movement range, when master axis (first rotation axis) moving angle of a pair is smaller than those of other pairs, the pair of compu
Page 1297When parameter PRI (No.19608#5) is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotation axis and second rotation axis are made in reverse order. CAUTION 1 If the lower limit of the movement range is larger than the upper limit, alarm PS5459 occurs when G43.5 is specified. 2 If no "computed angle" is fo
Page 1298• Computed angle A θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) 360 × N degrees 360 × (N + 1) degrees Current position A Movement range A "Computed angle of rotation axis A and its current position and movement range" • Computed angle B φ1 + 360 × (N - 1) φ2 + 360 × N φ1 + 360 × N
Page 1299By contrast, when the movement range is set to 0 to 360 degrees, the output angles are (A θ2 degrees; B φ2 degrees). Neither rotation axis A nor B moves in a way that it exceeds 0 degree (360 degrees). FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications
Page 13004 Operation examples 4.1 In the case of a tool rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration in which a tool rotation axis that turns around the Y-axis is located beneath another tool rotation axis that turns around the Z-axis. (See Fig.4 (j).) If linear interpo
Page 1301C B Z' Y' X' Z' Y' X' Z' Y' X' Control point path (of the machine coordinate system) Tool center point path (of the programming coordinate system) Fig. 4 (j) Example for a tool rotation type machine FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05
Page 13024.2 In the case of a table rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration (trunnion) in which a rotation table that turns around the Y-axis is located above another table rotation axis that turns around the X-axis. (See Fig.4 (k).) If linear interpolation is spec
Page 1303When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system ([Parameter WKP (No.19696#5) = 1): O200 (Sample Program2) ; N1 G00 G90 A0 B0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N3 G43.4 H01 ; Starts tool center point control. H01 is the too
Page 1304Tool center point path taken when the programming coordinate system does not move X’,Y’,Z’ : The coordinate system fixed on the tabel X”,Y”,Z” : Workpiece coordinate system A Y' Y Z' Z" B X' X Y Z X Y X Z" Z' Y' X' Y Z X Y X Z" Z' Y' X' Y Z X Control point path (of the machine coordinate system) Too
Page 13054.3 In the case of a mixed type machine Explanations are given below assuming a mixed type machine configuration that has one table rotation axis (which turns around the X-axis) and one tool rotation axis (which turns around the Y-axis). (See Fig.4 (l).) If linear interpolation is specified for the
Page 1306When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system (Parameter WKP (No.19696#5) = 1): O300 (Sample Program3) ; N1 G00 G90 A0 B0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N3 G43.4 H01 ; Starts tool center point control. H01 is the tool
Page 1307Tool center point path taken when the programming coordinate system does not move B X’,Y’,Z’ : The coordinate system fixed on the tabel X”,Y”,Z” : Workpiece coordinate system Z' Z" Y' Y” X' X” Z A Y X Z" Z' Y” Y' X” X' Z Y X Z" Z' Y” Y' X” Z X' Y Control point path (of the X machine coordinate syste
Page 13084.4 When linear interpolation is performed during tool center point control Examples are given below in which each 100-mm-long side of an equilateral triangle is cut at B-axis angles of 0, 30 to 60, and 60 degrees, respectively. Example) When type 1 is selected and the table-fixed coordinate system
Page 1309When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system (Note that the values of N60 to N90 are different from those specified in the preceding example.): O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-7
Page 1310When type 2 is selected and the table-fixed coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system: O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-70.0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Moves to the initial position. N30 G01 G43.5 H01 Z20.0 F500. ; Starts tool ce
Page 1311• Mixed type machine (tool rotation axis = B-axis; table rotation axis = C-axis; tool axis = Z direction) Center of the B-axis B rotation Center of the Z C-axis rotation G55 workpiece coordinate system X Y C Machine configuration for the example FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point
Page 1312The following figure illustrates the position of the workpiece, as well as the position of the tool head (relative to the workpiece), as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system from the +Z direction. • Behavior as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system (X 28.868, Y -
Page 1313• Detailed diagram of each block (B 0) Behavior of the control point (machine coordinate value) (B 30.0) (B 30.0) X' X" (C 0) Behavior of the tool Y' center point Y" C-axis rotates, with C B-axis rotates, with (B 45.0) being 120 degrees. B being 45 degrees. N60 block X" Y' (C 120.0) (B 30.0) Y" X' (
Page 1314C-axis rotates, with C (B 60.0) being 240 degrees. (B 60.0) N80 block X" (C 240.0) Y" X' Y' (C 120.0) (B 60.0) (B 60.0) N90 block X" (C 240.0) Y" Y' X' (B 0) (C-axis rotates, with C being 360 degrees.) N100 block (C 360.0) X' X" Y' Y" Detailed diagram of each block (2) FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5
Page 13154.5 When circular interpolation is performed during tool center point control In this example, one of the three sides of an equilateral triangle, each being 100 mm long side, is specified as a straight line and the other two are specified as arcs, and each side is cut at B-axis angles of -60, -45 to
Page 1316Center of the B-axis rotation X G54 workpiece Tool center coordinate system point C-axis Z B-axis Y X-axis Center of the C- axis rotation Z-axis Y-axis Machine configuration for the circular interpolation example The following figure illustrates the relative positional relationship between the workp
Page 1317Behavior of the control point (machine B -90 coordinate system) [Up to N031] [N032] B -45 B -60 X B -60 Behavior of the tool Y center point C 90 Y X B -30 Apparent head path B -30 B -30 [N033] [N034] Head path relative to the workpiece C 150 Y C 210 Y B -45 X X Apparent head path [N041 and later] [N
Page 13185 Restrictions - Deceleration at a corner In tool center point control mode, the controlled point may move on a curved line even if a straight-line command is issued. Some commands may cause the tool center point to make a sharp turn. The tool may be decelerated if a low value is set as a allowable
Page 1319- Programmable mirror image Note the following points when making a programmable mirror image: • In the case of tool center point control of type 1 Mirroring the linear axis alone does not create a mirror image for the rotation axis. To make the direction of the tool symmetrical, it is necessary to
Page 1320- Unusable functions Do not use the following functions in tool center point control mode. - Custom macro B - Macro executor (Execution macro) - The following group 01 G functions Conical interpolation -G02,G03 Exponential interpolation -G02.3,G03.3 Spiral interpolation -G02, G03 Involute interpolat
Page 1321- Small hole peck drilling cycle -G83 - Workpiece coordinate system setting -G92 - Workpiece coordinate preset -G92.1 - Feed per revolution -G95 - Constant surface speed control -G96, G97 - Infeed control -G160, G161 - M,S,T and B functions with motion command - Unavailable functions In tool center
Page 1322- Other Restrictions When the following function is used, tool center point control cannot be used. ・Angular axis control ・Arbitary angular axis control Occasionaly the limitation about the combination of the NC instructions may be attached . Refer to the description of the each functions. CAUTION I
Page 13236 Parameters 6.1 About the machine configuration When parameters are set, it is important to determine the target machine configuration for parameter setting. The following explains machine configuration. - Master and slave When there are two rotation axes for controlling the orientation of a tool o
Page 1324- When the rotation axes of the table do not intersect Explained below is a mechanism in which the table rotation centers do not intersect. In the mechanism shown in the following example, the master and slave do not intersect each other. (Fig.6 (n)) When both the master and slave are at 0 degrees,
Page 1325- When the first rotation axis of the tool and the tool axis do not intersect Explained below is a mechanism in which the tool axis (spindle rotation center axis) and the first rotation axis of the tool does not intersect each other. When both the master and slave are at 0 degrees, a vector from a p
Page 1326- Tool length offset value and setting in parameter No. 19666 A sum of the tool length offset value (to be set on the offset setting screen) and the setting in parameter No. 19666 (including the positive or negative sign) is assumed to be the distance between the tool center point and controlled poi
Page 1327CAUTION In a machine having a rotating tool, if the intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the tool rotation axis (parameter No. 19709 to 19714) is not 0, the point indicated as the controlled point in the above figure is not the controlled point but is the start point of the intersect
Page 13286.2 Examples of setting parameters - Example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine . Rotation axis C is a tool rotation axis (master) on the Z-axis. Rotation axis B is a tool rotation axis (slave) on th
Page 1329Parameter Setting value No. (IS-B) 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2000 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Controlled-point shift vector Y0 Z0 19680 2 Mechanical unit type 19681 6(C) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis
Page 1330- Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine. Rotation axis A is a table rotation axis (master) on the X-axis. Rotation axis B is a table rotation axis (slave) on the Y-axis. Table rotation type ma
Page 1331Parameter Setting value No. (IS-B) 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2000 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Controlled-point shift vector Y0 Z0 19680 12 Mechanical unit type 19681 4(A) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis
Page 1332- Example of setting parameters for a mixed-type machine In the machine explained in this example, the first aixs is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a mixed-type mach
Page 1333Parameter Setting value No. (IS-B) 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19667 X0 Controlled-point shift vector Y0 Z0 19666 2000 Tool holder offset value 19680 21 Mechanical unit type 19681 5(B) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis
Page 13346.3 Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 RHT 1407 RHT [Data type] Bit #4 RHT The feedrate of helical interpolation is: 0: Specified as the feedrate tangent to the arc. 1: Specified as the tangent feedrate including a linear axis. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19608 HEL MIR PRI DET [Data type] Bit #2 DET In
Page 1335#7 HEL In type 2 of tool center point control for 5-axis machining, when the tool is tilted in the proceeding direction by the Q command, a helical interpolation block is executed as follows: 0: The tool is tilted in a direction tangent to the arc (at the end of the block). 1: The tool is tilted in
Page 1336#5 SVC The controlled point is: 0: Not shifted. 1: Shifted. The method of shifting is specified by bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665. NOTE When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type), the controlled point is
Page 1337NOTE Set a radius value. 19680 Mechanical unit type [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. Mechanical unit Controlled rotation PRM19680 Master and slave type axis Mechanism having no 0 rotation axis The first rotation axis is the master, Tool rotation Tw
Page 1338an ordinary roatry axis or a hypothetical axis. FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05 Jan.26.2004 T.Mochida Correction and addition of 5) E.Genma Draw 04 Mar.12.2003 M.Tanaka All revision H.kouzai A-78709E No. 03 Dec.27.2002 T.MochidaWo
Page 133919681 Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Specify the controlled axis number for the first rotary axis. For a hypothetical axis (when bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0. 19682 Axis direction for the first ro
Page 134019683 Angular angle when the first rotary axis is a angular axis [Data type] ２Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Data unit 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] -99999999 - +99999999 When a value 1 to 3 is set in parameter No. 19682, set 0 degrees. When a value 4 to 6 is set in parame
Page 134119685 Rotation angle when the first rotary axis is a hypothetical axis [Data type] 2 Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Data unit 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] -99999999 - +99999999 When the first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis (bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is 1),
Page 134219689 Retraction direction for the second rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the direction in which the second rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a positive move command is issued. 0: Clockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the
Page 1343#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 SUP RFC WKP IA2 IA1 [Data type] Bit #0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis (parameter No. 19681). Also, set parameter
Page 134419697 Reference tool axis direction [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees. Also, set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system in a mechanism in which
Page 134519698 Angle when the standard tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RA) 19699 Angle when the standard tool axis direction is tilted (reference angle RB) [Data type] 2 Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Data unit 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] -99999999 - +99999999 When
Page 134619700 Rotary table position (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (YX-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis, one of the basic three axes) [Data type] 2Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm I
Page 134719703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the table (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the table (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19705 Intersection offset vector between the first
Page 134819709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of the tool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of the tool (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersection offset vector betwe
Page 134919712 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19714 Intersection offset vector between the first a
Page 135019741 The upper limit value of the movement range of the first rotary axis [Data type] 2 Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999 In tool center point control for 5-axis machining
Page 135119744 The lower limit value of the movement range of the second rotary axis [Data type] 2 Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999 In tool center point control for 5-axis machinin
Page 13525) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19746 CRS SAC [Data type] Bit #0 SAC The angle check of rotation axes at mode start is 0: invalid. 1: valid. #6 CRS In tool center point control for 5-axis machining, when a movement at a specified feedrate causes the deviation of the path to exceed the permissible level (
Page 13535) 19751 Permissible level of the deviation of the path for rapid traverse [Data type] 2 Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999 In tool center point control for 5-axis machining
Page 13545) NOTE The path error might become smaller than the value of this parameter because of calculation errors. FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB5 Title Tool Center Point Control For 5-Axis machining Specifications 05 Jan.26.2004 T.Mochida Correction and addition of 5) E.Genma Draw 04 Mar.12.2003 M.Tanaka A
Page 13557 Alarm And message Number Message Contents P/S5420 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G43.4/ The parameter related to tool center point control is not correct. G43.5 P/S5421 By the G43.4/G43.5,illegal command Illegal command was done by the tool center point control ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G43.4/G43. Command of the r
Page 1356FANUC Series 16i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB/MB5 TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND Specifications - Contents - 1. GENERAL..............................................................................................................................................................2 2. FORMAT....................
Page 13571. General Programming for creating holes, pockets, and other figures in a datum plane tilted with respect to the workpiece would be easy if commands can be specified in a coordinate system fixed to this plane (called a feature coordinate system, hereinafter). This function enables commands to be sp
Page 1358Z The tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction. Y The tool axis direction is the +Y-axis direction. The tool axis direction is the +X-axis direction. X Fig.1 (b) Tool axis direction FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB/MB5 Title TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND Specifications Draw 04 Mar.25.2003 All revisi
Page 1359This function regards the direction normal to the machining plane as the +Z-axis direction of the feature coordinate system. At the G53.1 command, the rotary axes are controlled so that the tool direction is perpendicular to the machining plane. • Only G68.2 is specified Z Zc Yc Xc Feature coordinat
Page 1360This function is applicable to the following machine configurations. (See Fig.1 (d).) <1> Tool rotation type machine controlled with two tool rotation axes <2> Table rotation type machine controlled with two table rotation axes <3> Mixed-type machine controlled with one tool rotation axis and one ro
Page 13612. Format - Feature coordinate system setting (G68.2) G68.2 X x0 Y y0 Z z0 Iα Jβ Kγ ; Feature coordinate system setting G69 ; Cancels the feature coordinate system setting. X, Y, Z : Feature coordinate system origin I, J, K : Euler's angle for determining the orientation of the feature coordinate sy
Page 1362(4) Determing the feedrate with the cutting load (5) Up to 200-block multi-buffer function Note) At the time of using Risc board for high speed processing, Up to 600-block With AI High Precision Countour Control or AI NANO High Precision Countour Control option ordered, the following functions are a
Page 13633. Description - Coordinate conversion using an Euler's angle Coordinate conversion by rotation is assumed to be performed around the workpiece coordinate system origin. Let the coordinate system obtained by rotating the workpiece coordinate system around the Z-axis by an angle of α degrees be coord
Page 1364- Rapid traverse rate in canned cycle In the tilted working plane command mode, the rapid traverse rate in canned cycle becomes the maximum cutting feedrate. Also, it is possible to operate at the specified feedrate by setting the value in parameter No.5412. - Custom macro system variables Coordinat
Page 1365FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB/MB5 Title TILTED WORKING PLANE COMMAND Specifications Draw 04 Mar.25.2003 All revision A-78712E No. 03 Nov.15.2002 M.Tanaka ③ part changed H.Kouzai 02 Mar.22.2002 T.Motida All revision H.Kouzai Edit Date Design Description Sheet 10/62 Date Jul.01.2001 Desig. T.Mochida A
Page 1366Tool rotation type machine - Operation description 1: When G43 (tool length compensation) is specified for a machine with its axes crossing one another The G53.1 command, when specified after the G68.2 command, automatically controls the rotation axis in such a way that the tool axis will be oriente
Page 1367Block N3 : Defines a feature coordinate system in the workpiece coordinate system. Block N4 : Shifts the control point to point Z30.0 in the feature coordinate system. Block N5 : Exerts automatic control over the rotation axes. Block N6 : Performs tool length compensation in the feature coordinate s
Page 1368• Sample program 1 (with axes crossing one another) Z N3 command Zc Yc Control point Xc Y Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc N4 command Workpiece coordinate system X Zc X-Y-Z Yc Xc N5 command Zc Yc Xc N6 command Zc Yc Xc Fig. 3 (f) Tool axis direction control 1 FANUC Series 16i –MB, 18i –MB/MB5 Titl
Page 1369- Operation description 2: When G43 (tool length compensation) is specified for a machine with no axis crossing Here is the case where no axis of the machine crosses any other axis. It is assumed that sample program 1 is used. In this example, the "BC type tool axis Z-axis" is used as the machine co
Page 1370• Sample program 1 (no axis crossing) Z N3 command Zc Yc Control point Xc Y Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Workpiece N4 command coordinate system X-Y-Z X Zc Yc Xc N5 command Zc Yc Xc Zc 30.0 An intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the B- axis with tool axis direction N6 command c
Page 1371- Operation description 3: When no G43 (tool length compensation) command is specified or if no G53.1 (tool axis direction control) command is specified Sample program 2 of O200 is equivalent to sample program 1 except that sample program 2 has no tool length compensation command (G43). Example) O20
Page 1372• Sample program 2 (with axes crossing one another) Z N3 command Control Zc Yc point Xc Y Feature coordinate system Workpiece Xc-Yc-Zc coordinate system X X-Y-Z N4 command Zc Yc Xc • Sample program 2 (no axis crossing) Z N3 command Control Zc Yc point Y Xc Feature coordinate system Workpiece Xc-Yc-Z
Page 1373Sample program 3 of O300 is equivalent to sample program 1 except that sample program 3 has no tool axis direction control command (G53.1). Example) O300 (Sample Program3) ; N1 G55 ; N2 G90 G01 X0 Y0 Z30.0 F1000 ; N3 G68.2 X100.0 Y100.0 Z50.0 I30.0 J15.0 K20.0 ; N4 G01 X0 Y0 Z0 F1000 ; N5 G43 H01 ;
Page 1374• Sample program 3 (with axes crossing one another) Z N3 command Zc Yc Control point Xc Y Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Workpiece coordinate system X X-Y-Z N4 command Zc Yc Xc • Sample program 3 (no axis crossing) Z N3 command Zc Yc Control point Xc Y Feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Workpiec
Page 1375Mixed-type machine - Basic operation This function is also available for a mixed-type machine in which the tool head rotates on the tool rotation axis and the table rotates on the table rotation axis. The feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc is set in the workpiece coordinate system based on the coord
Page 1376Tool axis direction control in a mixed-type machine Zc First feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc B Yc Xc Z (xo,yo,zo) Y A X G53.1 command Zc’ Second feature coordinate system Xc’-Yc’-Zc’ Z Yc’ Y Xc’ A X G01 Y10.0 F1000 command after G53.1 is issued. Zc’ Second feature coordinate system Xc’-Yc’-Zc’ Z
Page 1377- Rotation direction of the table rotary axis The mixed-type machine shown in Fig.3 (j) is explained as an example. Set parameter No.19689 to 1 if the rotation direction of the rotation table corresponding to the positive-direction move command is counterclockwise when viewed from the negative to po
Page 1378Table rotation type machine - Basic operation This function is also usable for a table rotation type machine with two table rotation axes. The feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc is set in the workpiece coordinate system based on the coordinate system origin shift (xo, yo, zo) and the Euler's angle.
Page 1379Tool axis direction control in a rotary table rotation type Zc First feature coordinate system Xc-Yc-Zc Yc Z Xc Y C A X G53.1 command Second feature coordinate system Xc’-Yc’-Zc’ Zc’ Xc’ Z C Y Yc’ A X G01 X10.0 F1000 command after G53.1 is issued. Second feature coordinate system Zc’ Xc’-Yc’-Zc’ Xc’
Page 1380Angle of rotation axis When tool axis direction control (G53.1) has been performed, more than two pairs of "computed angles" of the rotation axes usually exist. The "computed angle" is the candidate angle at which the rotation axis is to be controlled in the tool axis direction specified by G53.1. T
Page 1381The process of judging whether the moving angle is smaller or larger as the output judgement condition is called "movement judgement." The current position of the rotation axis to be compared refers to an absolute coordinate value. The "movement judgement" process is explained below. When the "compu
Page 1382When the PA angle is (*1): The output angle is: (A θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees; B φ2 degrees). Namely, θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees is adopted because it is nearer to PA than θ2 - 360 × N, and φ2, which is the same pair with θ2, is adopted as the output angle of B. When the PA angle is (*2): The output
Page 1383The "output angle" is explained below using a tool rotation type machine as an example. This example illustrates a machine having a "BC type tool axis Z." • BC type tool axis Z Z C-axis: First rotation axis (master) B-axis: Second rotation axis (slave) Y X Fig.3 (m) BC type tool axis Z The following
Page 1384<4> When the current rotation axis angles are (B 180 degrees; C 90 degrees) The "output angles" are (B 270 degrees; C 0 degree). : Since the two candidates are equally near to the current position (90 degrees) of the C-axis that is the master axis, a judgement is made based on the current position o
Page 13854. Restrictions - Basic restrictions The restrictions for the tilted working plane commands are similar to those for three-dimensional coordinate conversion. Following are the restrictions that require special attention. - Increment system The same increment system must be used for the basic three a
Page 1386- External mirror image If an attempt is made to use this function and an external mirror image function simultaneously, this function takes effect before the external mirror image function. Y Yc Actual path Programmed path Xc Feature coordinate system X Workpiece coordinate system Positioning where
Page 1387traverse of Cs axis before starting tilted working plane command in order to finish reference point return for Cs axis. (6) When the manual intervention & return or the tool retract & recover function is specified in the tilted working plane command mode, alarm (P/S5219) is generated. (7) The block
Page 1388・ Reference position return check -G27 ・ Reference point return -G28 ・ 2nd. Reference point return -G30 ・ 3rd/4th reference point return -G30 ・ Skip -G31 ・ Thread cutting -G33 ・ Automatic tool length measurement -G37 ・ Normal direction control -G40.1,G41.1,G42.1 ・ Cutter compensation B -G41,G42,G39
Page 1389- Unavailable functions In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The warning message is displayed on the screen when the following functions are used. : ・MDI operation In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The alarm (P/S5196) is issued w
Page 13905. Signals Change of three-dimensional coordinate conversion manual intervention signal D3M [Classification] Input signal [Function] Manual intervention during the three-dimensional coordinate conversion or the tilted working plane command, it changed work coordinate or feature coordinate. [
Page 13916. About parameters 6.1 Machine configuration - Master and slave When there are two rotation axes for controlling the orientation of a tool or two rotation axes for controlling the orientation of a table, a typical structure is such that a rotation mechanism is on the tip of another rotation mechani
Page 1392- When the rotation axes of the table do not intersect (Table rotation type machine) Explained below is a mechanism in which the table rotation centers do not intersect. In the mechanism shown in the following example, the master and slave do not intersect each other. (Fig.6 (p)) When both the maste
Page 1393- When the rotation axis of the tool and the tool axis do not intersect (Mixed-type machine) Explained below is a mechanism in which the tool axis (spindle rotation center axis) and the rotation axis of the tool do not intersect. When the rotation axis of the tool is at 0 degrees, a vector from a po
Page 13946.2 Examples of setting parameters <1> Example of setting parameters for a mixed-type machine In the machine explained in this example, the first axis is X, the second axis is Y, the third axis is Z, the fourth axis is A, the fifth axis is B, and the sixth axis is C. Shown below is an example of set
Page 1395Parameter Setting value No. (IS-B) 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2000 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Controlled-point shift vector Y0 Z0 19680 21 Mechanical unit type 19681 5(B) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis
Page 1396<2> Example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine. Rotation axis C is a tool rotation axis (master) on the Z-axis. Rotation axis B is a tool rotation axis (slave) on the Y-axis. Tool rotation type machi
Page 1397Parameter Setting value No. (IS-B) 19665#4 0 Automatic calculation for controlled-point shifting 19665#5 0 Controlled-point shift 19666 2000 Tool holder offset value 19667 X0 Controlled-point shift vector Y0 Z0 19680 2 Mechanical unit type 19681 6(C) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis
Page 1398<3> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine. Rotation axis A is a table rotation axis (master) on the X-axis. Rotation axis B is a table rotation axis (slave) on the Y-axis. Table rotation type
Page 1399Parameter Setting value No. (IS-B) 19680 12 Mechanical unit type 19681 4(A) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis 19682 1(X) Axis direction for the first rotary axis 19684 1 Rotation direction of the first rotary axis 19685 0.0 Rotation angle for the first rotary axis when it is a hypothe
Page 14006.3 Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 1401 LRP [Data type] Bit #1 LRP Positioning (G00) 0: Positioning is performed with non–linear type positioning so that the tool moves along each axis independently at rapid traverse. 1: Positioning is performed with linear interpolation so that the tool moves i
Page 1401#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3104 DAC DAL DRC DRL [Data type] Bit #4 DRL Relative position 0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset. 1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset. #5 DRC Relative position 0: The actual position displayed
Page 1402#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5400 VL3 D3C D3R [Data type] Bit #2 D3R The three–dimensional coordinate conversion or the tilted working plane command mode can be cancelled by: 0: The G69 command, a reset operation, or a CNC reset by signal input from the PMC. 1: The G69 command only. CAUTION When this par
Page 14035412 Rapid traverse rate for a hole machining cycle in the three–dimensional coordinate conversion or the tilted working plane command mode [Data type] 2Word [Unit of data, valid of range] Valid of range increment system unit IS-B IS-C Millimeter machine 1mm/min 30 to 240000 6 to 100000 Inch machine
Page 1404#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19501 FRP [Data type] Bit #5 FRP Acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse in AI high precision contour control or AI nano high precision contour control mode is: 0: Acceleration/deceleration after interpolation 1: Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation CAUTION In
Page 1405#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 ETH SVC SPR [Data type] Bit #4 SPR The controlled point is shifted by: 0: Automatic calculation. 1: Using parameter No. 19667. SVC (bit 5 of SPR (bit 4 of parameter parameter Shift of controlled point No. 19665) No. 19665) 0 － Shift is not performed as not done conventi
Page 1406#5 SVC The controlled point is: 0: Not shifted. 1: Shifted. The method of shifting is specified by bit 4 (SPR) of parameter No. 19665. NOTE When the machine has no rotation axis for rotating the tool (when parameter No. 19680 is set to 12 to specify the table rotation type), the controlled point is
Page 140719667 Controlled-point shift vector [Data type] 2 Word axis [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Valid data range] -99999999 to +99999999 Set the shift vector for the controlled point. This value becomes valid when bit 5
Page 140819680 Mechanical unit type [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of the mechanical unit. Mechanical unit Controlled rotation PRM19680 Master and slave type axis Mechanism having no 0 rotation axis The first rotation axis is the master, Tool rotation Two rotation axes of 2 and
Page 140919681 Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Specify the controlled axis number for the first rotary axis. For a hypothetical axis (when bit 0 (IA1) of parameter No. 19696 is 1), set 0. 19682 Axis direction for the first ro
Page 141019684 Retraction direction for the first rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 1 Set the direction in which the first rotation axis rotates as a mechanical motion when a positive move command is issued. 0: Clockwise direction as viewed from the negative to positive direction of the ax
Page 141119687 Axis direction for the second rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 6 Specify the axis direction of the second rotation axis. 1: On X-axis 2: On Y-axis 3: On Z-axis 4: On an axis tilted a certain angle from the positive X-axis to positive Y-axis 5: On an axis tilted a certain an
Page 1412#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19696 IA2 IA1 [Data type] Bit #0 IA1 0: The first rotation axis is an ordinary rotation axis. 1: The first rotation axis is a hypothetical axis. If IA1 is 1, set 0 as the controlled-axis number for the first rotation axis (parameter No. 19681). Also, set parameter No.19682 to
Page 141319697 Reference tool axis direction [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system when the rotation axes for controlling the tool are all at 0 degrees.Also, set the tool axis direction in the machine coordinate system in a mechanism in which
Page 141419700 Rotary table position (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (YX-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19702 Rotary table position (Z-axis, one of the basic three axes) [Data type] 2Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm I
Page 141519703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the table (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the table (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19705 Intersection offset vector between the first
Page 141619709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of the tool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of the tool (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersection offset vector betwe
Page 141719712 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19714 Intersection offset vector between the first a
Page 14187. Alarm And Message Number Message Contents P/S5456 TOO MANY G68.2 NESTING A feature coordinate system set command was issued more than once. To newly set a feature coordinate system, cancel the previous commands, then newly issue a feature coordinate system command. P/S5457 G68.2 FORMAT ERROR In a
Page 1419FANUC Series 16i - MB/TB, 18i - MB5 Manual feed for 5-axis machining Specifications Contents 1 OVERVIEW.....................................................................................................................2 2 SPECIFICATION...............................................................
Page 14201 Overview By this function, the following functions can be used. • Manual feed for 5-axis machining 5) Tool axis direction handle/JOG/incremental feed Tool axis right-angle direction handle/JOG/incremental feed Tool tip center rotation handle/JOG/incremental feed Table vertical direction handle/JOG
Page 14212 Specification 5) 2.1 Tool axis direction handle/JOG/incremental feed Overview In the tool axis direction handle/JOG/incremental feed, the tool is moved in the tool axis direction. Tool axis direction The tool axis direction is a direction which is specified in parameter No.19697 when the rotary ax
Page 1422Tool axis direction JOG feed The tool axis direction JOG feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: (1) JOG mode is selected. (2) The tool axis direction feed mode signal (ALNGH) is set to "1". And the table base signal (TB_BASE) is set to "0". (3) A feed axis and direction s
Page 14235) 2.2 Tool axis right-angle direction handle/JOG/incremental feed Overview In the tool axis right-angle direction handle/JOG/incremental feed, the tool is moved in the tool axis right-angle direction. Tool axis right-angle direction There are two tool axis right-angle directions, which are perpendi
Page 1424Tool axis right-angle direction handle feed The tool axis right-angle direction handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: (1) Handle mode is selected. (2) The tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (RGHTH) is set to "1". And the table base signal TB_BASE is s
Page 1425Tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed 5) The tool axis right-angle direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: (1) Incremental mode is selected. (2) The tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (ALNGH) is set to "1". And the table base
Page 14265) 2.3 Tool tip center rotation handle/JOG/incremental feed Overview In the tool tip center rotation handle/JOG/incremental feed, when a rotary axis is rotated by manual feed, the linear axes (X, Y and Z axes) are moved so that the rotary axis movement does not change the relative relation between t
Page 1427Tool tip center rotation handle feed The tool tip center rotation handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: (1) Handle mode is selected. (2) The tool tip center rotation feed mode signal (RNDH) is set to "1". (3) The state of the first manual handle feed axis selection
Page 1428Tool tip center rotation incremental feed 5) The tool tip center rotation incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: (1) Incremental mode is selected. (2) The tool tip center rotation incremental feed mode signal (RNDH) is set to "1". (3) A feed axis and direction
Page 14295) 2.4 Table vertical direction handle/JOG/incremental feed Overview In the table vertical direction handle/JOG/incremental feed, the tool is moved in the table vertical direction. Table vertical direction The table vertical direction is a vertical direction to the table. It is equal to the tool axi
Page 1430Table vertical direction JOG feed The table vertical direction JOG feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: (1) JOG mode is selected. (2) Both the tool axis direction feed mode signal (ALNGH) and the table base signal (TB_BASE) are set to "1". (3) A feed axis and direction
Page 14315) 2.5 Table horizontal direction handle/JOG/incremental feed Overview In the table horizontal direction handle/JOG/incremental feed, the tool is moved in table horizontal direction. Table horizontal direction The table horizontal directions are perpendicular to the table vertical direction (refer t
Page 1432Table horizontal direction handle feed The table horizontal direction handle feed is enabled when the following four conditions are satisfied: (1) Handle mode is selected. (2) Both the tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (RGHTH) and the table base signal (TB_BASE) are set to 1. (3) The
Page 1433Table horizontal direction incremental feed 5) The table horizontal direction incremental feed is enabled when the following three conditions are satisfied: (1) Incremental mode is selected. (2) Both the tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (RGHTH) and the table base signal (TB_BASE) are
Page 14342.6 Displaying the coordinate value of the tool tip, pulse values, and amount of machine axes movement Overview The coordinate value of the tool tip, the amount of movement in the tool axis direction and tool axis right-angle direction and the amount of machine axes movement are displayed. 5-AXIS MA
Page 1435TD 5) The amount of movement in the tool axis direction handle/JOG/incremental feed is indicated in units of the least input increment of the axis of the tool axis direction (parameter No.19697). R1 The amount of movement of the 1st axis of the tool right-angle direction handle /JOG/incremental feed
Page 1436Operation The displayed pulse values can be cleared using the following soft keys. 1. Push the soft key (OPRT). 2. Select the soft key of the function for which displayed values are to be cleared. When the right edge soft key is pushed, the second page is displayed. 3. To clear the displayed values
Page 14373 Signal Tool axis direction feed mode signal ALNGH [Classification] Input signal [Function] Select the tool axis direction handle/JOG/incremental feed mode or the table 5) vertical direction handle/JOG/incremental feed mode. 5) [Operation] If this signal is set to "1" and TB_BASE is set to
Page 1438Caution The tool axis direction feed mode signal (ALNGH), the tool axis right-angle direction feed mode signal (RGHTH) and the tool tip center rotation feed mode signal (RNDH) can be set to "1" at the same time. In this case, effective mode is selected by the first manual handle feed axis selection
Page 14394 Parameter 12310 Value of the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator for tool axis direction or table vertical direction handle feed [Data type] byte [Data range] 1 to 8 Set the status of the manual handle feed axis selection signals (HS1A to HS1D) for
Page 1440Tool axis First axis Second axis direction direction direction Z X Y X Y Z Y Z X 12312 Value of the manual handle feed axis selection signals for the first manual handle pulse generator for the second axis direction in tool axis right-angle direction or in table horizontal direction handle feed [Dat
Page 144112318 Distance from the center of tool rotation to the tool tip (Tool length) [Data type] 2-word [Unit of Data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machine 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch machine 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Data range] -99999999 to 99999999 For the tool tip center rotation handle/JOG/increment
Page 144219680 Type of a mechanical unit [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 21 Specify the type of a mechanical unit. PRM19680 Rotary axis to be Master and slave controlled 0 Mechanical unit with no rotary axis 2 Two tool rotary axes Use the first and second rotary axes, respectively, as the master and
Page 144319681 Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes Specify the controlled axis number for the first rotary axis. 19682 Axis direction for the first rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Specify the axis direction
Page 144419685 Rotation angle when the first rotary axis is a hypothetical axis [Data type] 2Word axis [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Data unit 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] -99999999 - +99999999 Specify a rotation angle for the first rotary axis if it is a hypothetical axis (IA1 (param
Page 144519690 Rotation angle when the second rotary axis is a hypothetical axis [Data type] 2Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Data unit 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] -99999999 - +99999999 Specify a rotation angle for the second rotary axis if it is a hypothetical axis (IA2 (paramete
Page 1446Z Tool axis direction The tool axis direction is the +Z-axis direction. Y The tool axis direction is the +X-axis direction. The tool axis direction is the +Y-axis direction. X 19700 Rotary table position (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19701 Rotary table position (YX-axis, one of the basic thr
Page 144719703 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the table (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19704 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the table (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19705 Intersection offset vector between the first
Page 144819709 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of the tool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19710 Intersection offset vector between the tool axis and the first rotary axis of the tool (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19711 Intersection offset vector betwe
Page 144919712 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool (X-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19713 Intersection offset vector between the first and second rotary axes of the tool (Y-axis, one of the basic three axes) 19714 Intersection offset vector between the first a
Page 1450#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 19665 SVC SPR [Data type] Bit SPR Specify a method for shifting a controlled point as follows: 0: Automatic calculation 1: Use parameter No.19667. SVC Specify whether the controlled point is to shift as follows: 0: Not to shift 1: To shift To specify a method for shifting a c
Page 1451Controlled-point shift First rotary axis of the tool = PRM19681 Controlled point F Controlled-point shift vector = PRM19667 E Second rotary axis of the tool D = PRM19686 Tool center point 19666 Tool holder offset value [Data type] 2Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C unit Millimeter machi
Page 14525 Alarm and message Number Message Contents PS5459 MACHINE PARAMETER A parameter (No.19680 to No.19714 INCORRECT or No.19665 to No.19667) for configuring the machine is incorrect. FANUC Series 16i-MB/TB,18i-MB5 Title Manual feed for 5-axis machining Specifications Draw A-78713EN 05 2004.02.26 Add in
Page 14536 Caution (1) The manual handle feed option is necessary for the handle feed for 5-axes machining (2) In case that the tool direction handle feed option or the tool direction handle feed B option exists, the manual feed for 5-axes machining is not available. (3) When the manual reference position re
Page 1454TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No. TMN 03/003E Date : 27-Dec-2002 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB5 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL 1. Communicate this report to: Your information only ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool build
Page 1455FANUC Series 16i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB5 Inclined Rotary Axis Control Specifications FANUC Series 16i –MB,18i –MB5 Title Inclined Rotary Axis Control Draw No. A-78927E 02 Dec.27.2002 T.Horie All revision Edit Date Design Description Sheet 1/27 Date Sep.13.2002 Desig. T.Horie Apprv. H.Kouzai
Page 1456- Contents - 1.1 INCLINED ROTARY AXIS CONTROL.............................................................................................................3 General.........................................................................................................................................
Page 14571.1 Inclined Rotary Axis Control General The conventional tilted working plane command, the tool center point control for 5- axis machining, manual feed for 5 axis machining could use only for the machine whose tool rotary axis or table rotary axis is parallel to the basic axis of the basic coordina
Page 1458The tool rotation type machine is taken for example. (See Fig.2.) The machine of the Fig.2 is composed of the rotary axis B (master) on the Y-axis, and the rotary axis C (slave) on the axis which the Y-axis is inclined at 45 degrees in the Y-Z plane. As for the machine configuration of the Fig.2 as
Page 1459The table rotation type machine is taken for example. (See Fig.3.) The machine of the Fig.3 is the machine composed of the rotary axis B (master) on the axis which the Y-axis is inclined at -45 degrees in the Y-Z plane, and the rotary axis C (slave) on the Z-axis. As for the machine configuration of
Page 1460The mixed-type machine is taken for example. (See Fig.4.) The machine of the Fig.4 is the machine composed on the table rotary axis B on the axis which the Y-axis is inclined at -45 degrees in the Y-Z plane, and the tool rotary axis A on the X-axis. As for the machine configuration of the Fig.4 as w
Page 1461Format and description of the operation The operation for the tilted working plane command, the tool center point control for 5-axis machining, manual feed for 5 axis machining during the inclined rotary axis control is similar to the operation when the inclined rotary axis control is not being used
Page 14621.1.1 Restrictions 1.1.1.1 Restrictions for tilted working plane command (1) Restrictions - Basic restrictions The restrictions for incline cutting commands are similar to those for three- dimensional coordinate conversion. Following are the restrictions that require special attention. - Increment s
Page 1463- External mirror image If an attempt is made to use this function and an external mirror image function simultaneously, this function takes effect before the external mirror image function. Y Yc Actual path Programmed path Xc Feature coordinate system X Workpiece coordinate system Positioning where
Page 1464(5) When specified in Cs-contour axis at the same time by rapid traverse in the tilted working plane command mode, please finish the Reference point return of Cs- contour axis. Moreover, when parameter NRF(No.3700#1)=0), please do not this Reference point return specified in the tilted working plane
Page 1465・ Polar coordinate command -G15,G16 ・ Reference position return check -G27 ・ Reference point return -G28 ・ 2nd. Reference point return -G30 ・ 3rd/4th reference point return -G30 ・ Skip -G31 ・ Thread cutting -G33 ・ Automatic tool length measurement -G37 ・ Normal direction control -G40.1,G41.1,G42.1 ・
Page 1466- Unavailable functions In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The warning message is displayed on the screen when the following functions are used. : ・MDI operation In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The alarm (P/S5196) is issued w
Page 14671.1.1.2 Restrictions for tool center point control for 5-axis machining (1) Common restrictions - Deceleration at a corner When tool center point control is in use, the controlled point may move on a curved line even if a straight-line command is issued. Some commands may cause the tool center point
Page 1468- Polar coordinate interpolation -G12.1, G13.1 - Polar coordinate command -G15, G16 - Reference position return check -G27 - Automatic reference position return check command -G28,G29,G30 - Skip function -G31 - Threading -G33 - Automatic tool length measurement -G37 - Normal-direction control -G40.1
Page 1469- Unavailable functions In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The warning message is displayed on the screen when the following functions are used. : ・MDI operation In the mode for this function, the following functions cannot be used, The alarm(P/S5196) is issued wh
Page 1470Spiral interpolation, Conical interpolation -G02, G03 Involute interpolation -G2.2, G3.2 Three-dimensional circular interpolation -G2.4, G3.4 -Inverse time feed -G93 - Unusable functions In tool center point control mode, the functions listed below cannot be used. If these functions are used, the co
Page 14711.1.2 About parameters 1.1.2.1 Examples of setting parameters Some examples of setting parameters are shown below. <1> Example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a tool rotation type machine. Rotary axis B is the tool rotary axi
Page 1472Parameter Description of parameter No. 19680 2 Mechanical unit type 19681 5(B) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis 19682 2 Axis direction for the first rotary axis 19683 0 Inclined angle when the first rotary axis is an inclined axis 19684 0 Rotation direction of the first rotary axis 1
Page 1473<2> Example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a table rotation type machine. Rotary axis B is the table rotary axis (master) on the axis which the Y-axis is inclined at -45 degrees in the Y-Z plane. Rotary axis C is the table
Page 1474Parameter Description of parameter No. 19680 12 Mechanical unit type 19681 5(B) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis 19682 5 Axis direction for the first rotary axis 19683 -45000 Inclined angle when the first rotary axis is an inclined axis 19684 1 Rotation direction of the first rotary
Page 1475<3> Example of setting parameters for a mixed-type machine In the machine explained in this example, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth axes are, respectively, X, Y, Z, A, B, and C. Shown below is an example of setting parameters for a mixed-type machine. Rotary axis A is the tool ro
Page 1476Parameter Description of parameter No. 19680 21 Mechanical unit type 19681 4(A) Controlled axis number for the first rotary axis 19682 1 Axis direction for the first rotary axis 19683 0 Inclined angle when the first rotary axis is an inclined axis 19684 0 Rotation direction of the first rotary axis
Page 14771.1.2.2 Parameters Explained below is the only parameters which have relation to the operation of the inclined rotary axis. Refer to the description of the tilted working plane command, the tool center point control for 5-axis machining, manual feed for 5 axis machining about the parameters except f
Page 147819683 Inclined angle when the first rotary axis is an inclined axis [Input type] Parameter input [Data type] 2 Word [Unit of data] increment system IS-B IS-C Unit Data unit 0.001 0.0001 deg [Valid data range] -99999999 - +99999999 When the value of the parameter No.19682 is 1-3, set the parameter to
Page 147919687 Axis direction for the second rotary axis [Data type] Byte [Valid data range] 0 to 3 Specify the axis direction for the second rotary axis. 1: X-axis 2: Y-axis 3: Z-axis 4: Axis which X-axis is tilting appropriate angle from the positive X-axis to the positive Y-axis 5: Axis which Y-axis is ti
Page 14801.1.2.3 Parameter list Shown below a parameter list of the tilted working plane command, tool center point control for 5-axis machining. Refer to the description of the tilted working plane command, the tool center point control for 5-axis machining for the details. Parameter Description of paramete
Page 14811.1.3 Alarm And Message Number Message Contents P/S5420 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN G43.4/ The parameter related to tool center point control is not correct. G43.5 P/S5422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN G43.4/G43.5 Tool center point control resulted in an axis trying to move faster than the maximum cutting feed rate.
Page 1482TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) No.TMN 03/004 Date : 27-Dec-2002 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB/MB5 NANO SMOOTHING 1. Communicate this report to: Your information only ○ GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics MILACRON ○ Machine tool builder Sales agen
Page 1483FANUC Series 16i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB FANUC Series 18i-MB5 Nano Smoothing Specifications FANUC Series 16i–MB, 18i–MB, 18i–MB5 Title Nano Smoothing Specification Draw No. A-78975E Edit Date Design Description Sheet 1/14 Date Dec.27.2001 Desig. T.Horie Apprv.
Page 1484- Contents - 1.1 NANO SMOOTHING ........................................................................................................................................3 Outline ..........................................................................................................................
Page 14851.1 Nano Smoothing Outline When the sculptured surfaces approximated by minute line segment is processed, Nano Smoothing function judge the figure from command segment. And, it is a function to generate and to interpolate a smooth curve. Nano Smoothing function presumes the curve profile from the pr
Page 1486Nano Smoothing is canceled once in the block where valid condition is not met . Nano Smoothing mode is canceled by the command of G5.1 Q0. Moreover, when reset is done, Nano Smoothing mode is canceled. Conditions for performing smooth interpolation Nano Smoothing is performed when all the following
Page 1487Explanation A part program approximated by the sculptured surfaces with minute line segments is normally approximated using line segments with a tolerance of about 10um. In this case, the program specified point is often in the vicinity of the boundary of the torelance. And, the command point has th
Page 1488- Specification of a tolerance The tolerance of the program which does the Nano Smoothing is set in the parameter (No.19581). The compensation of the interpolation point is done in the range of the tolerance. And, the curve profile is presumed. When the setting value of the parameter is 0, the least
Page 1489The judgment of the corner part is not done by the parameter (No.19582) in a very minute block. Restrictions - Single block operation When the single block operation in the Nano Smoothing mode is done, it does not stop with the command point of the block. It stops on the compensated interpolate poin
Page 1490- Manual intervention The manual intervention with manual absolute ON can not do in Nano smoothing. It becomes a PS alarm (No.5441) at the cycle start after the manual intervention. - Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset Please cancel Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset (G54.2) before the Nano Smooth
Page 1491- Automatic reference position return check command -G28,G29,G30 - Skip function -G31 - Threading -G33 - Automatic tool length measurement -G37 - Cutter compensation B -G41, G42, G39 - 3-dimensional tool compensation -G41 - Wheel wear compensation -G41 - Tool offset -G45 to G48 - Local coordinate sy
Page 1492・Tool life management Tool life value is counted in tool center point control mode. However , do not use the command related to the tool life management function. ・Macro Executer(Execution macro) ・Manual handle interruption ・Angular axis control ・Arbitary angular axis control FANUC Series 16i–MB, 18
Page 1493Alarm And Message Number Message Contents ILLEGAL RESTART(NANO P/S5441 After the manual intervention had been done in the state of the SMOOTHING) manual absolute on, the drive was restarted by the Nano smoothing The active program exceeded the number of blocks which was P/S5442 TOO MANY COMMAND BLOC
Page 1494Parameters 19581 Tolerance of Nano Smoothing [Input type] Parameter Input [Data type] 2 Word type [Unit of Data] Increment System IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Mm input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Minimum Data Unit] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis [Valid Dat
Page 14958490 Minimum travel of a block executed with Nano Smoothing [Input Type] Parameter Input [Data Type] 2 Word Type [Unit of Data] Increment System IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Mm input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Minimum Data Unit] Depend on the increment system of the reference
Page 149619582 Minimum moved distance of block judged according to the angle difference between blocks of Nano Smoothing [Input Type] Parameter Input [Data Type] 2 Word Type [Unit of Data] Increment System IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit Mm input 0.01 0.001 0.0001 mm Inch input 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 inch [Minimum Data Un
Page 1497TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL) NO. TMN 02/022E Date 2002. General Manager of Software Laboratory Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR βseries I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is – MB,18i/180i/180is – MB5,18i/180i/180is – MB OPERATOR’S MA
Page 1498Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option (FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL) (FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is – MB,18i/180i/180is – MB5,18i/180i/180is – MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL) １．Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is – MA
Page 1499Please add the following description in ”APPENDIX G. ALARM LIST” . 12) ALARM FOR FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option Alarm for FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series I/O Link Option can be confirmed by Power Mate CNC Manager function. Number Alarm type 000 to 299 Program or setting alarm 300 to 399, 401
Page 1500No. LED display Description Countermeasure Input data 2 is invalid. Check input data 2, specified with a function 251 code. A function code or mode is invalid. Check the command code, specified with a 254 function code. Check the mode. Operation cannot be activated because an Check the mode. Check w
Page 1501No. LED display Description Countermeasure A soft phase alarm (SPHAL) was detected. Turn the power off. This alarm may be caused 308 by noise. When the absolute pulse coder is used, the Rotate the motor through more than one turn 319 motor has not yet rotated through more than in jog feed mode, then
Page 1502No. LED display Description Countermeasure The servo position error in the stop state is Determine the mechanical cause of the large 410 larger than the value specified in parameter position error. If no mechanical cause is found, No.110. specify a larger value for the parameter. The servo position
Page 1503No. LED display Description Countermeasure [SVU-40, SVU-80] This alarm is issued in the following cases: An overcurrent alarm or IPM alarm is issued. • This alarm is issued when an excessively large current flows in the main circuit. • This alarm is issued when an error (overcurrent, overheat, low I
Page 1504No. LED display Description Countermeasure A DC link low voltage alarm is issued. This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power is too low. (1) 190 ms or longer may pass from the time when both the *ESP of the built-in DI and the *ESP of the I/O link interface signal are cancele
Page 1505System alarms No. LED display Description Countermeasure An error was detected in the RAM write/read Replace the servo amplifier unit. - test at power-up. An error was detected in the data collation Turn the power off then back on. Then, - check for the non-volatile memory. re-enter the parameters.
Page 1506TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 02/081E Date Aug. 21, 2002 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16/18-MA/MB/MC FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MA/MB,18i-MB5 FANUC Series 0-M/0i-MA/21-MB/20i-FA Concerning the correction of Rigid tapping (G84) / Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (G74) 1. Communi
Page 1507FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB,18i/180i/180is-MB/MB5 OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i-MB OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 0i-MA OPERATOR'S MANUAL FANUC Series 20i-FA OPERATOR'S MANUA
Page 1508Outline Descriptions are changed as follows. 1. The description of "Thread lead" on "13.2.1 Rigid tapping (G84)" is replaced. 2. The description of "Thread lead" on "13.2.2 Left-Handed Rigid tapping Cycle (G74)" is replaced. Details 1. The description of "Thread lead" on "13.2.1 Rigid tapping (G84)"
Page 1509TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/011E Date : Feb.06.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 18i/180i/180is - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 21i/210i/210is - MA
Page 1510FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning addition of the Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA OPERATOR’S MANUAL Nam
Page 1511• Adding “FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA / MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78535E)” to this description (Attached papers) FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA / MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move (A-78535E) 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is - MA 16i/18i/160i/180i - MB OPERA
Page 1512FANUC Series 16i /18i /21i – MA/MB Changing Active Offset Value with Manual Move Index 1. Outline ........................................................................................................................... 2 2. Explanation..............................................................
Page 15131. Outline If you want to perform roughing or semi-finishing with a single tool, you may fine-adjust the tool length compensation or cutter compensation. Moreover, you may want to fine-adjust the setting of the workpiece origin offset that was already set up. This function can change the offset (suc
Page 1514Example The compensation value set at Z-axis of the offset number 10 becomes 54.700 + (-2.583) = 52.117 mm under the following conditions: • Specified H code: H10 • Value set at Z-axis of the offset number 10: 54.700 mm • Amount of movement caused by manual feed along the Z-axis: -2.583 mm 2.4 Chang
Page 1515Example Assume the following conditions: • Specified workpiece coordinate system: G56 • G56 workpiece origin offset (X-axis): 50.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Y-axis): -60.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (Z-axis): 5.000 • G56 workpiece origin offset (C-axis): 180.000 • Amount of manual feed-b
Page 15162.7 Presetting the relative position indicator Setting parameter APL (No. 3115#5) to 1 can preset the relative position indicator (counter) to 0 automatically when active offset change mode is selected. In this case, performing manual feed until the relative position indicator (counter) becomes 0 ca
Page 15173. Signal Active offset change mode signal CHGAO [Classification] Input signal [Function] This signal selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. [Operation] Setting this signal to "1" selects the manual feed-based active offset change mode. • Automatic operation is at pause or
Page 1518Signal addresses • Parameter No.5040#2(MOP)=0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0297 AOFS2 AOFS1 CHGAO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0297 MCHAO • Parameter No.5040#2(MOP)=1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 G0203 AOFS2 AOFS1 CHGAO #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 F0199 MCHAO The following timing chart shows how the input and signal
Page 15194. Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3115 APL [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit axis APL Specifies whether to preset the relative position indicator automatically when the manual feed-based active offset change mode is selected, as follows: 0: Do not preset. 1: Preset. This signal is
Page 1520#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 5041 AOF [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit AOF When the manual feed-based active offset change mode is selected in a reset state or a cleared state, the tool compensation: 0: Can be changed 1: Cannot be changed However, even if “1” is set in parameter CLR(No.34
Page 1521#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3409 CFH [ Input type ] Parameter input [ Data type ] Bit CFH When bit 6(CLR) of parameter No.3402 is 1, the reset button on the MDI panel, the external reset signal, the reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop will, 0: Clear F codes, H codes, D codes. 1: Not clear F codes
Page 1522TECHNICAL REPORT NO.TMN 03/086E Date : Oct.27.’03 General Manager of Software Development Center FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB, 18i/180i/180is-MB5, 18i/180i/180is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning the addition of TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING 1. Communicate this report to : Your info
Page 1523FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB, 18i/180i/180is-MB5, 18i/180i/180is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning the addition of TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING 1.Type of applied technical documents FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB, 18i/180i/180is-MB5, 18i/180i/180is-MB Name OPERATOR’S MANUAL Spec.No
Page 1524TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING General On a 5-axis machine having two rotation axes that turn a tool or table, this function performs tool length compensation constantly, even in the middle of a block, and exerts control so that the tool center point moves along the specified path. (
Page 1525A Y' Z' B X' Y' Z' X' Y' Z' X' Tool center point path Fig. 1 (b) Path of the tool center point FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB,18i/180i/180is-MB5, Title 18i/180i/180is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning the addition of TOOL CENTER POINT CONTROL FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING Draw No. B-63534EN/02-05 Edit Date Des
Page 1526When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system, programming can be performed without worrying about the rotation of the table because the programming coordinate system does not move with respect to the table, although the position and direction of the workpi
Page 1527Example) Machine configuration: The A-axis is the rotation axis for controlling the tool. The B-axis is the rotation axis for controlling the table. Program: Created using the programming coordinate system. A Specified Workpiece coordinate start point system used when tool center point control start
Page 1528<1> Tool rotation type machine Z C B X Y <2> Table rotation type machine Z X Y C B <3> Mixed type machine Z B X C Y Fig. 1 (d) Three types of 5-axis machine Even if the rotation axes that control the tool or the table don't intersect each other, this function can still be used. FANUC Series 16i/160i
Page 1529As for the way to command rotary axes, there are two types, as described below, one of which is used depending on how the direction of the tool axis is specified. (1) Type 1 The block end point of the rotation axes is specified (e.g. A, B, C). The CNC performs tool length compensation by the specifi
Page 1530- Allowed functions When the tool center point control for 5-axis machining is executed, the following functions are allowed: (1) Linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation (2) Deceleration function based on feedrate difference
Page 1531Format - Positioning and linear interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP α β H; Starts tool center point control (type 1). IP α β; : IP : In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool tip movement In the case of an incremental command, the
Page 1532- Positioning and linear interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP H Q; Starts tool center point control (type 2). IP I J K; : IP : In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool tip movement In the case of an incremental command, the amount
Page 1533- Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP H; Starts tool center point control (type 1). G02 I J K G17 IP α β F ; G03 R G02 I J K G18 IP α β F ; G03 R G02 I J K G19 IP α β F ; G03 R : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate
Page 1534- Circular interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP H Q_; Starts tool center point control (type 2). G02 G17 IP I J K R F ; G03 G02 G18 IP I J K R F ; G03 G02 G19 IP I J K R F ; G03 : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate system G
Page 1535While the rotation axes are moving, the CNC controls the control points so that the tool center point moves along an arc with respect to the table (workpiece). The end of the tool center point comes to the point specified on the programming coordinate system. CAUTION 1 Only arc radius R can be speci
Page 1536- Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 1) G43.4 IP H; Starts tool center point control (type 1). G02 I J K G17 IP α β γ F ; G03 R G02 I J K G18 IP α β γ F ; G03 R G02 I J K G19 IP α β γ F ; G03 R : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coord
Page 1537Movement to the position specified by the G43.4 block does not constitute tool center point control. Only tool length compensation is performed along the tool axis direction. Because the specified speed is usually the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed of the straight line axis, wh
Page 1538- Helical interpolation for tool center point control (type 2) G43.5 IP H Q_; Starts tool center point control (type 2). G02 G17 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 G02 G18 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 G02 G19 IP I J K R γ F ; G03 : G17 : X-Y plane of the table coordinate system G18 : Z-X plane of the table coordinate sys
Page 1539Because the specified speed is the speed in the tangent direction of the arc, the speed of the straight line axis, when seen from the table coordinate system, is: Length of the straight line axis F× . Length of the arc Depending on parameter RHT (No.1407#4), the specified speed varies as shown in th
Page 1540- Tool center point control cancellation command G49 IP α β; Cancels tool center point control. IP : In the case of an absolute command, the coordinate value of the end point of the tool control point movement In the case of an incremental command, the amount of the tool control point movement α, β
Page 1541- Inclination angle of the tool In the case of tool center point control of type 2, the inclination angle of the tool can be specified using address Q of G43.5. The inclination angle of the tool represents how inclined the tool direction is toward the proceeding direction from the direction specifie
Page 1542Description - When a coordinate system fixed on the table is used as the programming coordinate system The programming coordinate system is used for tool center point control. When the G43.4 or G43.5 command is specified with parameter WKP (No.19696#5) set to 0, the workpiece coordinate system that
Page 1543- When the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system When the G43.4 command is specified with parameter WKP (No.19696#5) set to 1, the workpiece coordinate system that is in use at that point of time becomes the programming coordinate system. In this case, the programm
Page 1544- Notes on circular interpolation and helical interpolation, when the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system • The start point, end point, and center of an arc change as the rotation axis rotates. • In case of Type 1 , I, J, K commands the vector from the start poin
Page 1545When the G17 (X-Y plane) command is executed After the G43.4 command, the X-Y plane is selected using the G17 command and circular interpolation is performed with rotating the C-axis (table rotation axis) and B-axis (tool rotation axis) (including those cases where the C-axis moves before the G43.4
Page 1546After the G43.4 command, the Z-X plane is selected using the G18 command and circular interpolation is commanded after rotating the C-axis. → Alarm (violation of <2>) The same is also true when the G19 command is used. Example) … G43.4 H1 ; G01 C10. G18 G02 IP R20. ; … • In the case of a table rotat
Page 1547The master axis (A-axis) moves before the G43.4 command and, after the G43.4 command, circular interpolation is performed using the G17 (X-Y plane) command after rotating the C-axis, or the C-axis is rotated during circular interpolation. → Alarm (violation of <2>) (Note that C-axis center is not pe
Page 1548After the G43.4 command, the C-axis is rotated and circular interpolation is performed using the G19 (Y-Z plane) command. → Alarm (violation of <2>) Example) … G43.4 H1 ; G01 C10. ; G19 G02 IP R20. ; … When the G18 (Z-X plane) command is executed The G43.4 command is executed after moving the A- and
Page 1549- Tool center point control command During tool center point control, the command specifies the location of each block end point as seen from the programming coordinate system. The program specifies the tool center point. As for the rotation axis, the command specifies the coordinate values of each
Page 1550- Commands that can be specified during tool center point control The commands that can be specified during tool center point control are linear interpolation (G01), positioning (G00), circular interpolation (G02, G03), and helical interpolation (G02, G03). When linear interpolation (G01) is specifi
Page 1551- The moving distance of the rotation axis is large compared to that of the linear axis If the moving distance of the rotation axis is large compared to that of the linear axis, the rotation axis moves faster so that the tool center point moves at the specified speed, possibly resulting in the tool
Page 1552- Attitude of tool In the case of tool center point control for 5-axis machinig a tool center point moves on the specified line or circle. But attitude of tool is not controled. So for example, in the case of linear interpolation, a side of tool does not become flat plane but a curved tool axis vect
Page 1553- Angle of the rotation axis for type 2 (when the movement range is not specified) When the direction of the tool is specified by I, J, K, Q for type 2, CNC calculates rotation axes angle from I,J,K,Q. Then, more than two pairs of "computed angles" of the rotation axes usually are gotten. The "compu
Page 1554"Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> When master axis (first rotation axis) moving angle of a pair is smaller than those of other pairs, the pair of computed angles whose master axis moving angle is smallest is the pair of output angles. ↓ ↓ When the mas
Page 1555The process of judging whether the moving angle is smaller or larger as the output judgement condition is called "movement judgement." When parameter PRI (No.19608#5) is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotation axis and second rotation axis are made in reverse order. The "movement judgement
Page 1556When the PA angle is (*1): The output angle is: (A θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees; B φ2 degrees). Namely, θ2 - 360 × (N + 1) degrees is adopted because it is nearer to PA than θ2 - 360 × N, and φ2, which is the same pair with θ2, is adopted as the output angle of B. When the PA angle is (*2): The output
Page 1557The following two pairs of "computed basic angles" exist that direct the tool axis toward the + X axis direction. (B 90 degrees; C 180 degrees) (B 270 degrees; C 0 degree) <1> When the current rotation axis angles are (B -70 degrees; C 30 degrees) The "output angles" are (B -90 degrees; C 0 degree).
Page 1558Z C Y X Fig. 3 (i) BC type tool axis Z When the current rotation axis angles are (B 45 degrees; C 90 degrees), the "output angles" are (B 0 degree; C 90 degrees). FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB,18i/180i/180is-MB5, Title 18i/180i/180is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerning the addition of TOOL CENTER POINT
Page 1559• Angle of the rotation axis for type 2 (when the movement range is specified) If the upper and lower limits of the movement range of the rotation axis is specified using parameters No.19741 to No.19744, the rotation axis will move only within the specified range when the direction is specified usin
Page 1560"Output judgment conditions" Tool rotation type or table rotation type machine <1> Of the angle pairs whose master and slave axis angles are both within the specified movement range, when master axis (first rotation axis) moving angle of a pair is smaller than those of other pairs, the pair of compu
Page 1561When parameter PRI (No.19608#5) is 1, the movement judgements for the first rotation axis and second rotation axis are made in reverse order. CAUTION 1 If the lower limit of the movement range is larger than the upper limit, alarm PS5459 occurs when G43.5 is specified. 2 If no "computed angle" is fo
Page 1562• Computed angle A θ2 + 360 × (N - 1) θ1 + 360 × N θ2 + 360 × N θ1 + 360 × (N + 1) 360 × N degrees 360 × (N + 1) degrees Current position A Movement range A "Computed angle of rotation axis A and its current position and movement range" • Computed angle B φ1 + 360 × (N - 1) φ2 + 360 × N φ1 + 360 × N
Page 1563By contrast, when the movement range is set to 0 to 360 degrees, the output angles are (A θ2 degrees; B φ2 degrees). Neither rotation axis A nor B moves in a way that it exceeds 0 degree (360 degrees). Operation examples - In the case of a tool rotation type machine Explanations are given below assu
Page 1564For type 2: O100 (Sample Program1) ; N1 G00 G90 B0 C0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N3 G43.4 H01 ; Starts tool center point control. H01 is the tool compensation number. N4 G00 X200.0 Y150.0 Z20.0 ; Moves to the start point. N5 G01 X5.0 Y5.0 Z5.0 I1.0 J1.732 K2.0 F500 ; Line
Page 1565C B Z' Y' X' Z' Y' X' Z' Y' X' Control point path (of the machine coordinate system) Tool center point path (of the programming coordinate system) Fig. 4 (j) Example for a tool rotation type machine FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB,18i/180i/180is-MB5, Title 18i/180i/180is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL Concerni
Page 1566- In the case of a table rotation type machine Explanations are given below assuming a machine configuration (trunnion) in which a rotation table that turns around the Y-axis is located above another table rotation axis that turns around the X-axis. (See Fig.4 (k).) If linear interpolation is specif
Page 1567When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system ([Parameter WKP (No.19696#5) = 1): O200 (Sample Program2) ; N1 G00 G90 A0 B0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N3 G43.4 H01 ; Starts tool center point control. H01 is the too
Page 1568Tool center point path taken when the programming coordinate system does not move X’,Y’,Z’ : The coordinate system fixed on the tabel X”,Y”,Z” : Workpiece coordinate system A Y' Y Z' Z" B X' X Y Z X Y X Z" Z' Y' X' Y Z X Y X Z" Z' Y' X' Y Z X Control point path (of the machine coordinate system) Too
Page 1569- In the case of a mixed type machine Explanations are given below assuming a mixed type machine configuration that has one table rotation axis (which turns around the X-axis) and one tool rotation axis (which turns around the Y-axis). (See Fig.4 (l).) If linear interpolation is specified for the X-
Page 1570When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system (Parameter WKP (No.19696#5) = 1): O300 (Sample Program3) ; N1 G00 G90 A0 B0 ; N2 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N3 G43.4 H01 ; Starts tool center point control. H01 is the tool
Page 1571Tool center point path taken when the programming coordinate system does not move B X’,Y’,Z’ : The coordinate system fixed on the tabel X”,Y”,Z” : Workpiece coordinate system Z' Z" Y' Y” X' X” Z A Y X Z" Z' Y” Y' X” X' Z Y X Z" Z' Y” Y' X” Z X' Y Control point path (of the X machine coordinate syste
Page 1572- When linear interpolation is performed during tool center point control Examples are given below in which each 100-mm-long side of an equilateral triangle is cut at B-axis angles of 0, 30 to 60, and 60 degrees, respectively. Example) When type 1 is selected and the table-fixed coordinate system is
Page 1573When type 1 is selected and the workpiece coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system (Note that the values of N60 to N90 are different from those specified in the preceding example.): O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-7
Page 1574When type 2 is selected and the table-fixed coordinate system is used as the programming coordinate system: O400 (Sample Program4) ; N10 G55 ; Prepares the programming coordinate system. N20 G90 X50.0 Y-70.0 Z300.0 B0 C0 ; Moves to the initial position. N30 G01 G43.5 H01 Z20.0 F500. ; Starts tool ce
Page 1575• Mixed type machine (tool rotation axis = B-axis; table rotation axis = C-axis; tool axis = Z direction) Center of the B-axis B rotation Center of the Z C-axis rotation G55 workpiece coordinate system X Y C Machine configuration for the example FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB,18i/180i/180is-MB5, Tit
Page 1576The following figure illustrates the position of the workpiece, as well as the position of the tool head (relative to the workpiece), as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system from the +Z direction. • Behavior as seen from the table-fixed programming coordinate system (X 28.868, Y -
Page 1577• Detailed diagram of each block (B 0) Behavior of the control point (machine coordinate value) (B 30.0) (B 30.0) X' X" (C 0) Behavior of the tool Y' center point Y" C-axis rotates, with C B-axis rotates, with (B 45.0) being 120 degrees. B being 45 degrees. N60 block X" Y' (C 120.0) (B 30.0) Y" X' (
Page 1578C-axis rotates, with C (B 60.0) being 240 degrees. (B 60.0) N80 block X" (C 240.0) Y" X' Y' (C 120.0) (B 60.0) (B 60.0) N90 block X" (C 240.0) Y" Y' X' (B 0) (C-axis rotates, with C being 360 degrees.) N100 block (C 360.0) X' X" Y' Y" Detailed diagram of each block (2) FANUC Series 16i/160i/160is-MB
Page 1579- When circular interpolation is performed during tool center point control In this example, one of the three sides of an equilateral triangle, each being 100 mm long side, is specified as a straight line and the other two are specified as arcs, and each side is cut at B-axis angles of -60, -45 to -
Page 1580Center of the B-axis rotation X G54 workpiece Tool center coordinate system point C-axis Z B-axis Y X-axis Center of the C- axis rotation Z-axis Y-axis Machine configuration for the circular interpolation example The following figure illustrates the relative positional relationship between the workp
Page 1581Behavior of the control point (machine B -90 coordinate system) [Up to N031] [N032] B -45 B -60 X B -60 Behavior of the tool Y center point C 90 Y X B -30 Apparent head path B -30 B -30 [N033] [N034] Head path relative to the workpiece C 150 Y C 210 Y B -45 X X Apparent head path [N041 and later] [N
Page 1582Restrictions - Deceleration at a corner In tool center point control mode, the controlled point may move on a curved line even if a straight-line command is issued. Some commands may cause the tool center point to make a sharp turn. The tool may be decelerated if a low value is set as a allowable sp
Page 1583- Programmable mirror image Note the following points when making a programmable mirror image: • In the case of tool center point control of type 1 Mirroring the linear axis alone does not create a mirror image for the rotation axis. To make the direction of the tool symmetrical, it is necessary to
Page 1584- Unusable functions Do not use the following functions in tool center point control mode. - Custom macro B - Macro executor (Execution macro) - The following group 01 G functions Conical interpolation -G02,G03 Exponential interpolation -G02.3,G03.3 Spiral interpolation -G02, G03 Involute interpolat
Page 1585- Small hole peck drilling cycle -G83 - Workpiece coordinate system setting -G92 - Workpiece coordinate preset -G92.1 - Feed per revolution -G95 - Constant surface speed control -G96, G97 - Infeed control -G160, G161 - M,S,T and B functions with motion command - Unavailable functions In tool center
Page 1586- Other Restrictions When the following function is used, tool center point control cannot be used. ・Angular axis control ・Arbitary angular axis control Occasionaly the limitation about the combination of the NC instructions may be attached . Refer to the description of the each functions. CAUTION I